1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Technical Handbook
Alcatel
1696MSPAN
32 + 32 Channels DWDM System
& Compact shelf
1696MSPAN REL.2.2A
8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03

8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03
1696MSPAN REL.2.2A TECHNICAL HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.1 General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
03 061018 ECR 38860 S.LOVISA C. GIANNI

S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
02 060309 ECR 31576 S.LOVISA C. GIANNI
S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
01 051214 S.LOVISA C. GIANNI
S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
Technical Handbook
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 1 / 554
554
4 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

5.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5.3 CD–ROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5.4 CD–ROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.1 Equipment basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.1.1 Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.1.2 Booster + Pre–amplifier Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub) . . . . . . . . . 68
1.1.4 OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.1.5 In line repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.2 Network architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.2.1 Point–to–point links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.2.2 Ring networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.2.3 Ring interconnection (with or without protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.2.4 CPE configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.2.5 Interworking with other Alcatel NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.2.6 Host systems (ADM..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.3 Protection scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.3.1 O–SNCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.3.2 Optical Transmission Section Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.1 Rack design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.2.3 1696MS Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.4 Equipment connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2.4.1 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.4.3 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2.4.4 User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

2.5 Units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.5.1 Tributaries front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 2 / 554
554
2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.5.4 Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

3.1.1 Transponder sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) sub–system . . . . . . . . . 174
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.1.7 Controller sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.1.8 Power supply sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3.1.9 Protection sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.2.1 Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

4.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.1.4 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card for CWDM (OCC10_XFP_CWDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.1.7 Wavelength adapter 2 (WLA2M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.1.8 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.1.9 Wavelength adapter 2 with O–SNCP (WLA2M_OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
4.1.10 Wavelength adapter 3 with O–SNCP (WLA3CDOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
4.1.11 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.1.12 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4.1.13 XFP optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.1.14 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.2 Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.2.1 DWDM mux/demux : OMDX units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.2.2 CWDM mux/demux: CMDX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4.2.3 DWDM OADM units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
4.2.4 SPV_F_1310_1550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.2.5 SPV_F_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.3.2 Way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.3.3 Optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4.3.4 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4.4 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.4.1 ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 3 / 554
554
4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (I–LINK_M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (I–LINK_S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.5 General user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.5.1 LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.6.2 Optical Multiplex Section Protection: OMSP unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.10 FANS unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5.1.1 Main system characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.2.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.2.2 Electrical Safety compliance with standardized Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.2.3 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
5.3.2 DWDM Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
5.3.3 CWDM Multiplexer units (CMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
5.3.4 DWDM Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
5.3.5 Mux/Demux 1310–1550 + supervision unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
5.3.6 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
5.3.7 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
5.3.8 SPV–M + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
5.3.9 OSMC optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
5.3.10 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
5.3.11 OMSP optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
5.4 Alarm characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
5.4.1 Equipment domain alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
5.4.2 Optical transmission domain alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
5.5 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
5.5.1 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
5.5.2 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
5.6 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
5.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ETSI compliancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.7.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ANSI compliancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.7.4 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
5.7.5 Acoustical noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.7.6 Environmental constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
6 HARDWARE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 4 / 554
554
6.1 Part Number and Change Status identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
6.2 General safety rules and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
6.3 Microswitches “ON” position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
6.4 OMDX, OADM and SPV_F hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
6.5 ESC hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

6.5.1 ESC Presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

6.6 SPVM2 and SPVM_H hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
6.7 LANC (LAN access card) hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
6.8 MCC3 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
6.9 OCC10 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
6.10 OCC10_E hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7.1 Maintenance introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7.1.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7.1.2 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7.1.4 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7.2 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
7.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
7.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
7.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
7.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
7.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
7.4 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
7.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
7.4.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
7.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
7.5 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

8.1 WEEE general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
8.2 How to disassembly equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
8.2.1 Tools necessary for disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
8.2.2 Subrack disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
8.2.3 Unit disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
8.2.4 Hazardous materials and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
8.3 Eco declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 5 / 554
554
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES

Figure 1. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 5. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 7. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 12. CE label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 13. WEEE label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 16. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 17. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with a WLA transponder (2 ch) . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 18. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two 4xANY_P transponders . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration . . 67
Figure 20. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration . 67
Figure 21. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 22. The 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 23. OADM or back–to–back terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3
transponders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 24. OADM or back–to–back configuration block diagram with WLA as regenerator for
2 chs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 25. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 26. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 27. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 28. Point–to–point link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 29. Ring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 30. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by OSC . . . 73
Figure 31. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 32. CPE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 33. “Bicycle wheel” configuration: NE on a ring adressing 10 supervised CPE links . . . . . . 74
Figure 34. CPE link based on CWDM technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 35. Connection to host equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 36. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with back–to–back terminals or OADM . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 37. Optical SNCP way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 38. OTSP protection scheme in a point–to–point network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 39. Rack organization, 32 channel bi–directional terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 40. Shelf dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 41. Typical fully equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 42. Example of Master shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 43. Shelf front view with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Figure 44. 1696MS_C Rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 45. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 6 / 554
554
Figure 46. 1696 MS_C – Mechanical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 47. 1696 MS_C – Main shelf board arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 48. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 49. Fan_C board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 50. Simple MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Figure 51. Double MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 52. MCC1 and MCC2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 53. MCC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 54. OCC10 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 55. OCC10_E front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 56. CWLA2M and CWLA3CD front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 57. CWLA2M_OP and CWLA3CDOP front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 58. 4xANY front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 59. MVAC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 60. SFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 61. XFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 62. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 63. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 64. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 65. OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 66. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 67. OADM1100_M_xx_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 68. SPV_F_1310_1550 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 69. SPV_F_C front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 70. CMDX2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 71. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 72. ESC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 73. SPVM2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 74. SPVM_H front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 75. OSMC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 76. I–Link_M front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 77. I–Link_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 78. LAN boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 79. Housekeeping front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 80. RAI front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 81. UIC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 82. OPC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 83. OMSP front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 84. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 85. PMU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 86. FANs front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 87. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 88. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 89. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 90. Line terminal transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 91. Back–to–back terminal or OADM transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 92. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 93. 4 and 8 channels DWDM optical MUXes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 94. 8 channels CWDM optical MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 95. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 96. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 97. 8 channels CWDM optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Figure 98. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 99. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 7 / 554
554
Figure 100. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 101. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 102. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 103. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels back–to–back terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 104. 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration and with a remote channel . . . . 180

Figure 105. OFA sub–system in line terminal or OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 106. OFA sub–system in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 107. OSC management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and In–Line–Repeater
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 108. Automatic Power Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 109. Controller sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 110. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 111. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 112. 1696MSPAN – equipment power supply scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 113. Channel level protection in a ring network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 114. O–SNCP principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 115. Optical SNCP with MCC units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 116. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC–4xANY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 117. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 118. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection) . . . . 197
Figure 119. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection . . . 198
Figure 120. O–SNCP with WLA units (WLA2M_OP/WLA3CDOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 121. Example of a 1696 MS network with path protection using WLA3CDOP cards . . . . . . 200
Figure 122. OTS protection with OMSP unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 123. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 124. Example of starting configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 125. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram with CMDX2 or OADM4
board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 126. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 127. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration with WLA boards . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 128. 4 DWDM channels terminal configuration with 4XANY drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 129. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 130. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal configuration with expansion and
supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 131. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with WLA boards . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 132. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with 4xANY_P . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 133. Example of 8 channels line terminal w/o expansion block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 134. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 135. 8 CWDM channels terminal with two 10Gbps chs and six 2.67Gbps chs block
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 136. 8 channels terminal: two OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and three WLAs connected to
CMDX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 137. 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability block diagram . . 215
Figure 138. 16 DWDM channels terminal (with MCC/OCC10) with expansion and SPV
upgradability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 139. Example of mixed 15–channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 140. 16 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (15–channel) terminal with WLA boards . . . . . 216
Figure 141. Example of mixed 22–channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 142. 24 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (22–channel) terminal with WLA boards . . . . . 217
Figure 143. 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC block diagram (example) . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 144. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 145. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 1 stage OAC configuration with WLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 146. 4 channels OADM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 147. 4 channels back–to–back terminal / OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 8 / 554
554
Figure 148. 8–channel OADM w/ protection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 149. 8 OADM protected channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 150. 8–channel OADM w/o protection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 151. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 152. 8–channel OADM w/o protection block diagram/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Figure 153. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Figure 154. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ protection block diagram . . . . . . . 225
Figure 155. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/o protection block diagram . . . . . . 226
Figure 156. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 157. 8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 158. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 159. 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration . 229
Figure 160. 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion configuration . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 161. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 162. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection . . . 232
Figure 163. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection . . . . 233
Figure 164. 16 channels OADM or mix C/DWDM (15–channel) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 165. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection . . . 234
Figure 166. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection . . . . 235
Figure 167. 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ or w/o protection . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 168. 32 protected channels back–to–back w/ supervision and protection and one OAC
per side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 169. Repeater with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 170. 8 channels terminal configuration with MVAC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 171. 4 channels terminal configuration with 4xANY_P (first channels of an 8–channel band) ..
239
Figure 172. 16 channels terminal with MVAC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 173. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM inside OFA inter–stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 174. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM between 2 double stages OFAs . . . . . . 242
Figure 175. 4 x ANY node configuration without drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 176. 4 x ANY node configuration with drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 177. 4–channel terminal w/o SPV configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 178. 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 179. 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC . 246
Figure 180. 12–channel terminal without SPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 181. 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and
OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 182. OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 183. Remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 184. Two remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 185. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 186. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 187. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 188. Back–to–back 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and by–pass the
others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 189. Remote unprotected MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 190. OADM 1 channel protected back–to–back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 191. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 192. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 193. 2 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 194. 4 channels Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 195. Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 196. SPV Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 9 / 554
554
Figure 197. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white signal . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 198. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white and colored signal
and protected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

and unprotected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Figure 200. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated. . . . . . . . 264
Figure 201. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 202. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 203. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 204. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 205. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 206. MCC in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 207. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 208. Drop / Insert with Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 209. Pass–Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 210. Local Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 211. Remote Loop–Back in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 212. User Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 213. User Loop–Back & pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 214. Remote Loop–Back in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 215. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 216. MCC2 in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 217. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 219. Pass–through (regeneration configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 220. Local Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 222. User Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 223. User Loop–Back & pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 225. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 226. OCC10 unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 227. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 228. Drop–insert (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 230. Pass–through (NNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 231. Regeneration (two pass–through linked by 10G backpanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 232. Remote Loop–Back pass–through (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) 308
Figure 233. Drop–insert remote loop–back (UNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . 309
Figure 234. Remote loop–back (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 235. Local Loop–Back (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 236. User Loop–Back (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 237. OCC10_E unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 238. WLA2M unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 239. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 240. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 241. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 242. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback . . . . . . 320
Figure 243. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 244. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 245. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . 322
Figure 246. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback . 322
Figure 247. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 10 / 554
554
Figure 248. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . 323
Figure 249. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 250. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 251. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . 325
Figure 252. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback . 325
Figure 253. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 254. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 255. WLA3CD unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 256. WLA2M_OP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 257. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop (O–SNCP configutration) . . . . . . . 333
Figure 258. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 259. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 260. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback . . . . . . 335
Figure 261. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 262. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 263. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 264. WLA3CDOP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 265. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 266. SFP modules general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 267. XFP modules general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 268. MVAC unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 269. Example of MVAC location in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 270. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 271. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 272. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram . . . . . . . 355
Figure 273. CMDX2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 274. OADM8: block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 275. OADM4: block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 276. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 277. OADM1100: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 278. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 279. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 280. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 281. Amplifier boards block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 282. Optical amplifiers configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 283. Span variation compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 284. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant) . . . . . 370
Figure 285. SPVM2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 286. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 287. SPVM board in an OADM or Back–To–Back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 288. OMSC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 289. OSMC connection (measured points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 290. I–Link_M block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 291. I–Link_S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 292. Electrical access, slot description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 293. Block diagram of control LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 294. LAN board settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 295. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 296. 2 Mbit/s back–panel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 297. OPC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 298. OMSP Application with and without OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 11 / 554
554
Figure 299. OMSP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 300. PSC2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 301. PMU cabling scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 302. PMU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Figure 303. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version . . . . . . . . 396

Figure 304. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version . . . . . . . 396
Figure 305. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 306. Block diagram of the new FAN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 307. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 308. ALS mechanism on WDM line in point–to–point configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 309. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in pass–through or in add/drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Figure 310. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring . . . . . . . 411
Figure 311. ALS procedure in a point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater . . 412
Figure 312. ALS mechanism with cascaded pre–amplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 313. ALS mechanism with single pre–amplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 314. Restart algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 315. OAC block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 316. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . 494
Figure 317. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . 497
Figure 318. Microswitch front view and meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 319. ESC hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 320. LAN_Q and LAN_I hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 321. MCC3 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 322. OCC10 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 323. OCC10_E hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 324. FAN_C: no–dast filter extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 325. position of the alarms in a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Figure 326. position of the alarms in an OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Figure 327. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Figure 328. Subrack front and rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 329. Handle removing and disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 330. Rear cover removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 331. Back Panel removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Figure 332. Upper and lower guides plane removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 333. Side wall removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Figure 334. Optical fiber duct, guides and contact spring removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Figure 335. Side coverplate removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Figure 336. Levers removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Figure 337. Optical connectors support removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Figure 338. Side coverplate and contact spring removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Figure 339. Internal connectors removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Figure 340. Dissipator removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Figure 341. Modules removal from dissipator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Figure 342. Daughter boad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Figure 343. Gold connector removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Figure 344. Internal cables removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Figure 345. Connector metal support removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . 20
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Table 4. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 5. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 12 / 554
554
Table 6. IEC 950 –Table 16: Over–temperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 7. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Table 12. Example of Client signals – supported bit rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 13. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Table 14. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 15. MCC protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Table 16. OCC10 protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Table 17. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Table 18. WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP protection: switch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Table 19. OTS protection: switch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Table 20. Default thresholds for QoS alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Table 21. Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Table 22. MCC1 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Table 28. MCC2 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Table 34. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 35. OCC10 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Table 36. OCC10 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 37. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Table 38. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Table 39. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration 319
Table 40. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Table 41. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in A/D and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Table 42. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration 321
Table 43. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback configuration . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 44. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . 322
Table 45. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 46. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Table 47. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . 323
Table 48. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration . . . . . . . . 324
Table 49. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Table 50. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . 325
Table 51. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Local
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 52. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 13 / 554
554
Table 53. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration . . 326
Table 54. Alarms and action usage for O–SNCP with auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 55. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop (O–SNCP configuration) . . . . . 333
Table 56. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration 334

Table 57. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback

configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 58. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in A/D and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
335
Table 59. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration 335
Table 60. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 61. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 62. Allowed drawers association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Table 63. Summary of the way of working. Drop insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 64. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers . . . . . 365
Table 65. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table 66. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF . . . . . . 371
Table 67. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table 68. PDU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 69. TRU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 70. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Table 71. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 72. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 73. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Table 74. Generic alarms common to all boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table 75. ESC–EC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table 76. ESC–SC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 77. PSC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 78. HK board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 79. RAI board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 80. LAN board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 81. I–LINK–M board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 82. I–LINK–S board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 83. UIC board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 84. FAN board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 85. FAN_C board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 86. OPC board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Table 87. OMSP board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Table 88. OAC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Table 89. SPVM specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 90. SPV_F_C specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 91. SPV_F_1310_1550 board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Table 92. MCC specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Table 93. SFP specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Table 94. WLA2 specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 95. WLA3CD specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 96. OCC10, OCC10_LAN and OCC10_E specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Table 97. 4xANY main board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 98. 4xANY drawer specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 99. OMDX/OADM specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Table 100. CMDX2 specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Table 101. OSMC specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 14 / 554
554
Table 102. MVAC specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Table 103. SPVM board transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Table 104. OMSP boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Table 105. OAC boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Table 106. OMDX boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Table 107. MCC boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Table 108. SFP specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Table 109. WLA2 boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Table 110. WLA3CD boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Table 111. OCC10 boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Table 112. OADM boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Table 113. 4xANY boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Table 114. SDH_DRAWER, HF_DRAWER and LF_DRAWER drawers transmission alarms . . . . . 484
Table 115. OPC transmission alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Table 116. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Table 119. Example of ANV Part Number + ICS evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Table 120. OMDX, OADM and SPV_F presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Table 121. SPVM2 and SPVM_H presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Table 122. Presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Table 123. MCC3 presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Table 124. OCC10 presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Table 125. OCC10_E presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Table 126. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 15 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
16 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
17 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
18 / 554
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information

ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT ANV P/N

1696MSPAN 3AL 86601 AAAA
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N

1696MSPAN 2.2 A 3AL 87001 AAAA
N.B. See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.5.4.1

on page 56.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 19 / 554
554
1.3 Product-release handbooks
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated on the manual’s front page consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
HDBK
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
8DG 17415 AAAA
Technical Handbook
[1]
Provides information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware
setting documentation.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
8DG 17415 CAAA
Installation Handbook
[2]
Provides stepped procedural instructions for unpacking, inspecting, Alcatel Part
Number assembling, and mounting and wiring bays, sub–frames, I/O panels,
ancillary items, and cabling.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
8DG 17415 DAAA
Turn–On & Commissioning Handbook
[3]
Provides procedures to support visual inspection, module installation, Alcatel Part
Number and provisioning; and local network element verification tests and generic
network tests.
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control
THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
or note
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
8DG 17415 BAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[4]
Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 20 / 554
554
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
HDBK
1320CT 3.X
3AL 79551 AAAA
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[5]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel Info–Model Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.6.5
3AL 88876 AAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[6]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB Rel.2.X Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA
[7]
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 21 / 554
554
Table 4. Documentation on CD–ROM
See para.5.5 on page 57
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A CD–ROM–DOC EN 8DG 17416 AAAA ––––––––
[8]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [4]
Envisaged after the release of all handbooks.
1320CT 3.X CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
[9]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[5] to [7]
Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 22 / 554
554
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel standardized “drawing–up guides” complying with
such suggestion.
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type
of labels that might be affixed to the equipment. Furthermore,
it describes the handbook structure and the customer
documentation. The abbreviation list is supplied too.
DESCRIPTION: It contains all the equipment’s general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical).
MAINTENANCE: It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)
DISMANTLING & RECYLING It contains information for subrack/units dismantling and

recycling and list of hazardous materials.
APPENDICES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting

DOCUMENTATION: operations, if envisaged.
ANNEXES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
(*) If the equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work
Station or other external processing/displaying system) the maintenance carried out with such
system is described in the Operator’s Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 20 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 23 / 554
554
1.5 Handbook configuration check
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legenda
n = new part p =proposal part

m = modified part PR =proposal edition
Table 5. Handbook configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
DESCRIPTION n
1. GENERAL n
2. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION n m
3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION n m
4. UNITS DESCRIPTION n m m
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION n m m
6. HARDWARE SETTINGS n m
MAINTENANCE n
7. MAINTENANCE n
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING n
8. DISMANTLING & RECYCLING n
APPENDICES
Nothing envisaged
ANNEXES
Nothing envisaged
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on December 2005 is the first validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
Ed.02 created on March 2006 is the second validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
It has been created for contents upgrading and for adding the alarms list (in chapter 5) and the hardware
settings chapter.
Ed.03 created on October 2006 is the third validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
It has been created for contents upgrading (Chapters 3 and 4) and for adding the DWDM SFPs technical
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
specifications.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 24 / 554
554
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
2.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 25 / 554
554
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying

1 on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.

Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patient’s head and one under
2
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
3 other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and

4 mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
5 his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patient’s chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patient’s nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patient’s head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
6 Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 26 / 554
554
2.2 Safety Rules
2.2.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the relevant Handbooks and chapters.
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• Unless fitted into the equipment, an external protection device on power supply will be provided
in the building installation. The breaking capacity of the device will be adequate to the maximum
short circuit current which can flow.
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 27 / 554
554
2.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are

enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
• heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 28 / 554
554
The symbols presented in para.2.2.3 through 2.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook refers to.
2.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
2.2.3.1 Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
2.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where A.C. or
D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
2.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para. 5.2.1 on page 405.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 29 / 554
554
2.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals
2.2.4.1 Labelling
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993

International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 or 1M product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wavelength
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlocks
exemple of power and lenght values

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 30 / 554
554
2.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point a not terminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
2.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 31 / 554
554
2.2.5 Risks of Explosions
2.2.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
2.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 32 / 554
554
2.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 60950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts carrying the above depicted
warning label, are those whose temperature T exceeds the limits established by the following formula
(temperatures in °C ):
(T–Tamb) (DTmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:
T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.
DTmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment
specification or 25°C, whichever is greater.
Table 6. IEC 950 –Table 16: Over–temperature limits, Part 2
Maximum over–temperature (°C )

Operator–accessible parts
Glass, Plastic,
Metal
porcelain rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

35 45 60
for short periods
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held 30 40 50
Outer surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
Inner surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 33 / 554
554
2.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following paragraphs:

– para. 5.2 on page 405

– para. 7.1.1 on page 519
– para. 7.2.1.1 on page 521
– para. 7.2.2.1 on page 523

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 34 / 554
554
3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS
3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
relevant Handbooks and chapters.
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
3.1.1 General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degreased it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 35 / 554
554
3.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,

ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
3.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 36 / 554
554
3.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
• an elastic band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elastic band and to the stud on the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 37 / 554
554
3.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)

statement....
3.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment.
Figure 1. to Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Figure 8. to Figure 13. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the reference numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 7. Label references
Ref. No. Name of Label
1 label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

Refer to Figure 8. on page 46
2 label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

3 item identification label – item on catalog

4 label identifying the equipment

5 label identifying compliancy with CE and WEEE Directives.

Refer to Figure 12. and Figure 13. on page 48
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 38 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
4
03
Figure 1. Subrack label
2
ABCD
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 38
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
39 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
ABC

2
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
40 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
NB.1
2
NB.1 = The label is present on the support side

ABC

554
8DG 17415 AA AA
41 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
ABC
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
2
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
3
42 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
ABC
Figure 5. Modules label

554
8DG 17415 AA AA
2
43 / 554
NB.1
1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 44 / 554
554
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 7. Back panels internal label
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 45 / 554
554
FACTORY P/N + CS

FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ALCATEL FACTORY PART
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE NUMBER + SPACE + CS
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

SERIAL NUMBER (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 46 / 554
554
FREQUENCY ACRONYM
(Optional)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER
Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog
EQUIPMENT NAME
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 47 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
equipment.
Figure 12. CE label
Figure 13. WEEE label
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
Warning: CE and WEEE symbols can be in the same label or in different position of the
48 / 554
4 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A/D Add and Drop functionality

ADM Add and Drop Multiplex

AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALC Automatic Laser Control
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APD Avalanche Photo Detector (photodiode technology)
APS Automatic Protection switching
APSD Automatic Power ShutDown
AS Alarm Surveillance
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT ATtended Alarm
ATTD ATtended (Alarm storing)
AU Administrative Unit
AUI Attachment Unit Interface for LAN connection
BER Bit Error Rate
B&W Black and White
BOL Beginning of Life
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
Ch Channel
CID Card IDentifier
CLEI Common Language Equipment Identification
CPE Costumer Premises Equipment
CSF Communication Subsystem Failure
CT Craft Terminal
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCN Data Communication network

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DCU Dispersion Compensating Unit
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 49 / 554
554
DFB Distributed Feedback Bragg
DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
DEMUX Demultiplexing

DTMF Dual Tone Modulation FrequencyDTV (Decision Threshold voltage)
DTV Decision Threshold voltage
DV Digital Video
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Channel Communication
ECID Enhanced Card IDentifier
ECC Embedded Channel Communication
ECMA Standardizing information and communication system

(Formerly ”European Computer Manufacturers Association”)
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EML Equipment Management Layer
EOL End Of Life
EOW Engineering Order Wire
ESC Equipment and Shelf Controller
ESD Electrostatic Discharges
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EXP Expansion
FC Fiber Channel
FDI Forward Defect Indication
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIT Failure In Time

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 50 / 554
554
HDLC High Level Data Link Control
HK HouseKeeping
HW HardWare
HWF HardWare Failure
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
I/F Interface
ILM Integrated Laser Modulator
ILOS Input Loss Of Signal
IND INDeterminate
I/O Input/Output
IOPV Input Optical Power Voltage
IP Internet Protocol
ISO International Standard Organization
ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
IT Inter–stage
ITU_T International Telecommunication Union –Telecommunication
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Protocol D
LB Long Band
LH Long Haul
LOC Loss Of Clock
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOS Loss Of Signal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSD Laser ShutDown
LT Line Terminal
MAC Medium Access Control
MCC Multi Channel Card

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MMF Multi Mode Fiber
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 51 / 554
554
MS Multiplex Section
MVAC Multi Variable Attenuation Card
NE Network Element

NDC Negative Dispersion Chromatic
NES Network Element Synthesis
NML Network Management Layer
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network Node Interface
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol
NURG Not URGent
OAC Optical Amplifier Card
OADM Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operator Alarm Maintenance
OBPS On Board Power Supply
OCH Optical Channel
OCHA Optical Channel Adaptation
ODU Optical channel Data Unit
OFA Optical Fiber Amplifier
OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface
OMDX Optical Multiplexer and DemultipleXer
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OMSA Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation
OOPV Output Optical Power Voltage
OPC Optical Protection Card
OS Operation System
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSMC Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card
O–SNCP Optical Sub–Network Connection Protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OSNR Optical Signal Noise Ratio
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 52 / 554
554
OSPI Optical Generic Physical Interface
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transmission Section

OTSP Optical Transmission Section Protection
OTU Optical channel Transport Unit
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDL Polarization Dependent Loss
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PI Physical Interface
PIN Positive – Intrinseque – Negative (photodiode technology)
PM Performance Monitoring
PMU Power Management Unit
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PSC Power Supply Card
Q3 Interface with Q3 Protocol
QECC Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel
QoS Quality of Service
RAM Random Access Memory
RAI Remote Alarm Interface card
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RECT REmote Craft Terminal
RI Remote Inventory
RUM Replaceable Unit Missing
RUP Replaceable Unit Problem
RUTM Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch
RX Receiver
SB Short Band
SC Shelf Controller
SD ShutDown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 53 / 554
554
SH System Handler
SFP Small Formfactor Pluggable
SMF Single Mode Fiber

SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNCP Sub–Network Connection Protection
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SPVM SuPerVision Module
SSF Server Signal Failure
SWDL SoftWare DownLoad
SWP SoftWare Product
TCA Threshold Crossed Alarm
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TRU Top Rack Unit
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TP Termination Point
TRU Top Rack Unit
TTP Trail Termination Point
TX Transmitter
UEP Unequipped Equipment Present
UIC User Interface Card
UNI User Network Interface
URG URGent
USM User Service Manager
VHM Virtual Hardware Machine
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
XFP 10Gbps Formfactor Pluggable

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 54 / 554
554
5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.
So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.5.4 on page 56.
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.

Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the
”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 55 / 554
554
5.4 Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.1.3 on page 6 .

Each handbook is identified by:

– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
– the handbook name,
– the handbook P/N,
– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 5. on page 24;
• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal
editions.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks (or part of the handbook) relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s
Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers
implies man–machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s
”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
5.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 56 / 554
554
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM
In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’

5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM
In most cases, a CD–ROM contains in read–only eletronic format the documentation of one
product–release(–version) and for a certain language.
In some other cases, the same CD–ROM can contain the documentation of different
product–release(–version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
– CD–ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
• the Installation Guides
• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
– CD–ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:
• the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to
racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and
hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD–ROM
is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD–ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CD–ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 57 / 554
554
5.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM
The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
The CD–ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened “Index” document permit

to visualize the .pdf handbooks
Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been
installed on the platform.
The CD–ROM doesn’t contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting
and installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CD–ROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and
zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
5.5.3 CD–ROM identification
Each CD–ROM is identified:
1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM upper
surface:
– the name of the ”product–release(s)” (and ”version” if applicable),
– a writing indicating the language(s),
– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
5.5.4 CD–ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in section 5.5.3 point 2 ) , in association
with the CD–ROM own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System as a structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released, a check is made in the
Alcatel–Information–System to identify the list of CD–ROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.
Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 58 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
DESCRIPTIONS
59 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
60 / 554
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
The 1696MSPAN product is a DWDM equipment intended for the so called ”enterprise” and metropolitan
market. It is compliant with both ETSI and ANSI standards.
It provides a higher transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 32 channels in the
C–band at the following bit rates:
• up to 2.5 Gbps (STM–16 / OC–48)
• 10 Gbps (STM–64/OC–192).
The 1696MSPAN is mainly composed of transponder cards connected to optical Mux/Demux cards to
manage the main WDM signal (combined signal) and launch it in the fibre.
Both DWDM and CWDM technologies are addressed, allowing to build

– a DWDM system (up to 32 channels) or
– a CWDM system (up to 8 channels) or
– a CWDM + DWDM system (up to 16 DWDM channels + up to 6 CWDM channels).
Client side, all the signals between 100Mbps to 2.7Gbps and 10Gbps native signals are supported.
A ”Compact WDM” architecture, 1696MS_C is proposed. It is a compact 13 slots shelf enabling point–to–
point and ring applications monitored by the Optical Supervisory Channel through SPVM board.
Up to two 1696MS_C expansion shelves can be connected to the main one allowing 12 channels terminals
or 4 channels OADM configurations.
Furthermore amplifiers can be placed inside the compact shelf.
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer the following main functions:
– Multiple configurations and multiple network architectures

The 1696MSPAN can be configured as
• line terminal
• back–to–back terminal
• Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
• in line repeater (optical amplifier)
These basic configurations cover both point–to–point and ring network applications and with or with-
out amplifiers.
Different optical add–drop (OADM) nodes can be provided: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 channels OADM
(channels in Add/Drop in both direction).
– Possibility to manage a remote NE named Customer Premises (CPE): it is a 1696MS or 1696MS_C

located far from a Ring that can be linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another
NE (point–to–point link).
– Multi–rate client signals

The 1696MS is equipped with multi–rate transponders, which support the following Client signals
• from 100 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps, by means of the MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 and 4xANY_P boards (the
max. client bit rate accepted by the 4xANY_P is 1.25Gbps)
• 10Gbps by means of the OCC10 board using, over UNI. Supported bit rates are
– 9.953Gbps (STM–64/10Gbe WAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 61 / 554
554
– Client signals TDM concentration
Up to 4 client signals may be concentrated by Time Division Multiplexing, on a unique STM–16 trans-
ponder access, in order to optimize the use of each wavelength.
This feature is performed by the 4xANY_P board

– Up to 32 optical channels in a single NE
Each client signal is assigned to one of the 32 optical channels provided by the transponders. Each
channel is associated to a fixed wavelength chosen in the third window or C–band (1.550 nm).
Up to 16 bidirectional transponders (i.e. 8 ch. OADM with 1+1 optical ch. protection) in one shelf.
Fully equipped system with up 32+32 bidirectional wavelengths in one rack (4 shelves per rack).
– Flexible and scalable architecture

The 1696MSPAN design allows to begin modestly with a partially equipped configuration (e.g.: 4 or
8 channels) that can be progressively upgraded as the traffic demand grows (e.g.: 16, 24, 32 chan-
nels). In particular, from the initial configuration, the transmission capacity can be increased without
interrupting the existing traffic.
– Protection
A protection at channel level is provided in ring application (Sub–Network Connection Protection,
SNCP) and point–to–point links (1+1). From rel. 2.2 the 4xANY drawers protection is also provided.
– Supervision
An extra channel at 1510 nm, the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC), can be optionally added to
the aggregate signal before being launched in the fiber.
– Multi–rate client signals

The system is equipped with multi–rate transponders (4xANY_P, MCC3, WLA2M and WLA3CD),
which support B&W Client signals from 125Mbps to 2.67Gbps. OCC10 supports 10Gbps signals
– host SFP (up to 2.67Gbps) and XFP (10Gbps) pluggable optical modules are supported
According to the type, SFP modules are provided on MCC3 client interface, 4xANY_P aggregate in-
terface, WLA2 and WLA3 client and WDM interfaces.
XFP modules are provided on OCC10 client interface.
Various types of SFP and XFP are provided. For details, refer to Figure 60. , Figure 61. , para 4.1.12,
para. 4.1.13 and to the equipping boards description (see chapter 4)
SFP and XFP modules allow to fit the client optical interface with the bitrate characteristics and/or
to use CWDM/DWDM wavelengths.
– Automatic power equalization

It consists of an automatic adjustment of the power per channel in order to maintain the optical power
at each node output as flat as possible. This functionality needs OSMC (measuring the power per
channel) and MVAC (adjusting the power value) boards.
– 10Gbps backpanel
The 10Gbps backpanel, introduced in rel. 2.2, allows to link two adjacent OCC10s at 10.7 Gbps.
– Performance Monitoring
Monitoring the performances of the client signals and the WDM transmission is available for SDH and
SONET frames. Up to 32 PM per NE are managed.
– Management Interfaces
As the product is intended to both ETSI and ANSI market, Q3 and TL1 interfaces are supported. In
ETSI market the NE is managed by the Alcatel 1353NM and 1354RM by means of the Q3 interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 62 / 554
554
– User Interfaces
The product offers user interfaces for various overhead for data channels and orders wires using (64
kbit/s, 2Mbit/s, RS232, audio).
– Firmware download
The 1696 MSPAN supports non–traffic affecting firmware download.

Boards supporting non–traffic affecting firmware download: OAC2, OAC2_L, OCC10, OCC10_E,
OCC10_XFP_CWDM, WLA3, OSMC and 4xANY_P (when declared as 4xANY_P).
The NE software automatically performs non–traffic affecting firmware download of the MCC3, 4 x
ANY_P (when declared as 4xANY_P) and OCC10 cards. It is the only firmware download performed
by the NE software in current rel.
N.B. Never unplug a board while this is on Firmware download state. Should this occur, the
board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 63 / 554
554
1.1 Equipment basic configurations
The 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C design, allows the following basic configurations of the equipment:

– Line Terminal

– Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal
– Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub)
– OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater
– In line repeater
– Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).
1.1.1 Line terminal
In line terminal configuration, the 1696MSPAN connects

– up to 32 clients signals (1696MS_C = up to 12 channels) to an optical fibre DWDM line
– up to 8 clients signals (1696MS_C too) to an optical fibre CWDM line
– mixed configuarations (CWDM + DWDM) are allowed too, thus providing up to 16 DWDM channels
plus 6 CWDM channels.
In this configuration, the equipment takes place at both ends of point–to–point links.
B&W Client signals

Up to to 32
client signals
TPD
Mux and Demux can be (up to 32) SPV One fibre pair
– OADM or OMDX in Up to 32 Up to 8 CWDM signals or
DWDM applications WDM Mux
signals λ 1–>32 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
– CMDX2 in CWDM Demux
Up to 16 DWDM plus
applications 6 CWDM signals
SPV
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration
B&W Client signals

DWDM
Up to to 32
client signals
B&W CLIENT SIGNALS
λ 1–>7 (CWDM signals)

TPD
(up to 7)
SPV One fibre pair
CWDM
DWDM Mux
DWDM Up to 16 DWDM plus
TPD λ 1–>16 Mux(es) Aggregate Dmux
(up to 16) Dmux(es) 6 CWDM signals
SPV
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration (mixed configuration)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In the following some examples of Line Terminal configuration are provided.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 64 / 554
554
1.1.1.1 Line Terminal basic configuration with two MCC3 transponders
λ1
MCC3
SPV
RX TX M
B&W WDM u
x
TX RX λ1
B&W WDM
λn
One fibre pair
MCC3
D
RX TX e-
B&W WDM m
TX RX λn u
B&W WDM x SPV
Figure 16. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders
1.1.1.2 Line Terminal basic configuration with a WLA transponder
λ1
SPV
RX TX M
B&W WDM u
x
TX RX λ1
B&W WDM
λn
WLA One fibre pair
D
RX TX e-
B&W WDM m
TX RX λn u
B&W WDM x SPV
Figure 17. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with a WLA transponder (2 ch)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 65 / 554
554
1.1.1.3 Line Terminal basic configuration with two 4xANY_P transponders
RX λ1
B&W 4xANY_P
1 TX
SPV

B&W TX M

WDM u
x
RX RX λ1
B&W WDM
4 TX
B&W λn
One fibre pair
RX
B&W 4xANY_P
1 D
TX
B&W TX e-
WDM m
λn u
RX
RX x SPV
B&W WDM
4 TX
B&W
Figure 18. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two 4xANY_P transponders
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 66 / 554
554
1.1.2 Booster + Pre–amplifier Line terminal
1 x OAC board by terminal
This configuration is made up of a line terminal + one OAC.

B&W Client signals

Up to 8 or up to 32
client signals
TPD
Mux and Demux can be (up to 32) OFA SPV
One fibre pair
– OADM or OMDX in Up to 8 Up to 8 CWDM signals or
or 32 Mux 2
DWDM applications WDM λ 1–>32 1 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
– CMDX2 in CWDM Demux 1
signals Up to 16 DWDM plus
applications 6 CWDM signals
SPV
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration
2 x OAC board by terminal
This configuration is made up of a line terminal + two OACs.
B&W Client signals

Up up to 32 client signals
Mux and Demux can be TPD

(up to 32)
– OADM or OMDX in OFA OFA SPV
Atten/ One fibre pair
DWDM applic. VOA 1 DCU 2 Up to 8 CWDM signals or
Mux
– CMDX2 in CWDM λ 1–>32 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
applications Demux 2 Atten/ 1 Up to 16 DWDM plus
VOA
DCU
6 CWDM signals
SPV
Figure 20. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 67 / 554
554
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub)
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
In OADM configuration, the 1696MSPAN may add and drop a part of the traffic of an optical DWDM line,

in both directions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as linear add and drop multiplexer
in:
– point–to–point links
– ring networks.
Mux and Demux can be Client signals

– OADM or OMDX in x added & dropped
channels
DWDM applic.
– CMDX2 in CWDM
applications TPD TPD
SPV One fibre pair
SPV
One fibre pair Up to 8 CWDM signals or
Up to 8 CWDM signals or Up to 32 DWDM signals or
Up to 32 DWDM signals or Mux Mux
Up to 16 DWDM plus
Up to 16 DWDM plus Dmux Dmux 6 CWDM signals
6 CWDM signals nλ nλ
(up to 32) SPV n–x (up to 32)
SPV
pass through channels
Figure 21. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration
The OADM configuration, especially in ring network, allows the Sub–Network Connection Protection
(SNCP) of the added and dropped channels.
Back–to–back terminal (hub)
When ALL the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1696MSPAN
is a back–to–back terminal or a hub node. There is no optical pass through channel. SNCP may be
performed on all the DWDM line channels.
Mux and Demux can be Client signals

– OADM or OMDX in x added & dropped
channels
DWDM applic.
– CMDX2 in CWDM
applications TPD TPD
SPV One fibre pair
One fibre pair SPV
Up to 8 CWDM signals or
Up to 32 DWDM signals or
Up to 32 DWDM signals or Mux Mux
Dmux Dmux Up to 16 DWDM plus
Up to 16 DWDM plus 6 CWDM signals
6 CWDM signals nλ nλ
(32 max) SPV (32 max)
SPV
Figure 22. The 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration
In the following some examples of OADM / back–to–back terminal configuration are provided.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The OADM / back–to–back terminal configuration is also possible with 4xANY_P equipped with coloured
SFPs.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 68 / 554
554
1.1.3.1 OADM or back–to–back terminal configuration with two MCC3 transponders
SPV
SPV
M M
u u
x x
MCC3 TX RX MCC3
B&W B&W
RX TX
WDM WDM
One fibre pair One fibre pair
TX RX
WDM WDM
RX TX
D B&W B&W D
e- e-
m m
u u
x x
SPV SPV
Figure 23. OADM or back–to–back terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders
1.1.3.2 OADM or back–to–back terminal configuration with WLA as regenerator for two chs
SPV
SPV
M M
u u
x RX
x
TX WLA
B&W B&W
RX TX
WDM WDM
TX RX
WDM WDM
RX TX
D B&W B&W D
e- e-
m m
u u
x x
SPV SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 24. OADM or back–to–back configuration block diagram with WLA as regenerator for 2 chs
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 69 / 554
554
1.1.4 OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater
1 x OAC board in West side + 1 x OAC board in East side
This configuration is made up of a OADM or back–to–back (hub) terminal + one OAC. In the example of

Figure 25. an OADM repeater configuration is shown.
Mux and Dmux can Client signals

be OADM or OMDX x added & dropped
or CMDX2 boards channels
TPD TPD One fibre pair

SPV OFA OFA SPV
One fibre pair
VOA 1 2 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
WDM Mux Mux
Up to 16 DWDM plus
signals 2 Dmux Dmux 1 VOA 6 CWDM signals
nλ nλ
(up to 32) SPV n–x SPV (up to 32)
pass through channels
Figure 25. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side) configuration
OADM or back–to–back terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
2 x OAC board in West side + 2 x OAC board in East side
This configuration is made up of a OADM or back–to–back (hub) terminal + two OACs. In the example of
an OADM repeater configuration is shown.
Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX or CMDX boards
One fibre pair SPV OFA OFA

Up to 8 CWDM signals or Atten/
VOA 1 DCU 2
Up to 32 DWDM signals or
TO/FROM MUX/DMUX
Up to 16 DWDM plus 2 Atten/ 1 VOA
6 CWDM signals nλ DCU
(up to 32)
SPV
Client signals
x added & dropped
channels
TPD TPD One fibre pair

OFA OFA SPV
Atten/
VOA 1 DCU 2 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
TO/FROM Mux Mux
OFA Dmux Dmux 2 Atten/ 1
Up to 16 DWDM plus
VOA
DCU n λ 6 CWDM signals
n–x (up to 32)
pass through channels SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 26. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side) configuration
OADM or back–to–back terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 70 / 554
554
1.1.5 In line repeater
In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is a bidirectional DWDM amplifier, without transponders nor
MUX/DEMUX functions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as line repeater in:
– point–to–point links
– ring networks.
One fibre pair

SPV OFA OFA SPV Up to 8 CWDM signals or
One fibre pair
WDM VOA 1 Attenuator or DCU 2 Up to 32 DWDM signals or
Up to 16 DWDM plus
signals 2 Attenuator or DCU 1 VOA 6 CWDM signals
nλ nλ
(up to 32) SPV SPV (up to 32)
Figure 27. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)
A Customer Premises equipment (CPE) is a 1696MS_C or 1696MS located far from a ring which can be
linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another NE in a point to point link.
In that configuration it is possible to manage a remote NE with no obligation to multiplex the optical signal
(see Figure 32. page 74).
Up to 10 supervised CPE links can be installed on one NE in current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 71 / 554
554
1.2 Network architectures
1.2.1 Point–to–point links

A point–to–point link, based on 1696MSPAN, is obtained with:
– a 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration at each end of the link,

– eventually, one or more 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration.
Client Add & Drop traffic
Client Client
Line OADM Line
end Repeater end
traffic Terminal Terminal traffic
Figure 28. Point–to–point link
1.2.2 Ring networks
A two fibers ring network is obtained with 1696MSPAN equipment in back–to–back terminal and OADM
configurations.
Client end traffic
B–to–B
Client Client
Add & drop OADM OADM Add & drop
traffic repeater traffic
In Line
Repeater
Figure 29. Ring configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 72 / 554
554
1.2.3 Ring interconnection (with or without protection)
NE
NE NE Black & White links

with supervision
NE NE NE NE
NE
Figure 30. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by OSC
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other with optical insertion of the OSC
in one Black & White link through a SPV_F_C board. The NEs host of the interconnection do not need to
be colocated.
NE
NE NE
Supervision through
interconnected LAN_Q boards
NE NE LAN_Q NE NE
LAN_Q
NE
Figure 31. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management transmission
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the electrical connec-
tion of the LAN_Q boards (only the DCC). This type of interconnection can only be performed in ETSI mar-
ket. The NEs host of the interconnection need to be colocated.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 73 / 554
554
1.2.4 CPE configurations
NE

NE
NE
CPE
NE NE
CPE
NO OSC
CPE OSC
CPE
Figure 32. CPE configuration
CPE consists in remote 4xANY or MCC transponders. Management is performed through OSC. Three
different channel configurations can be transmitted to/from a CPE:
• one Black & White channel (1310 nm)
• one colored channel (1550 nm)
• one 1310 nm and one 1550 nm channels
• up to 8 CWDM channels.
CPE CPE CPE
CPE CPE
NE
CPE CPE
CPE CPE CPE
A NE located on a ring can support several CPE links, but only two of them can be supervised.
Figure 33. “Bicycle wheel” configuration: NE on a ring adressing 10 supervised CPE links
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
One NE situated on a ring can support several CPE links (up to 10 supervised CPE links, see Figure 33. )
More 1550 nm channels in CPE links (Multiplex) are foreseen in future rel.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 74 / 554
554
1.2.5 Interworking with other Alcatel NEs
1.2.5.1 4xANY concentrator
As the 4xANY concentrator realizes a real STM–16 frame, the concentrated signal can pass trough an
ADM network.
1.2.5.2 1696MS CWDM as CPE
Taking advantage of the CWDM features of release 2.2A (MCC3, WLA2, WLA3, 4xANY_P, CMDX2
boards), it is possible to implement the transmission on CWDM wavelengths.
On Figure 34. is shown a CPE link based on CWDM technology.

MCC3 in the core ring enables to generate CWDM wavelengths on the client side.
In the CPE, 4xANY_P or WLA2/3 boards give the signal back to the customer in a B&W wavelength.
SPV is inserted/extracted in the 1510nm channel CMDX2 Input/Output.
DWDM 1696MS 1696MS

Mux/Demux
MCC3 4XANY_P
MCC3 4XANY_P
CWDM CWDM
MCC3 Mux/ Mux/
Demux CWDM Demux WLA2
MCC3
WLA3
1510nm 1510nm
Mux/Demux
DWDM SPV SPV
Figure 34. CPE link based on CWDM technology

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 75 / 554
554
1.2.6 Host systems (ADM..)
Host systems can be all data equipments whose optical output signals have the following bit–rates
– between 100 and 2.5 Gbps

– 10 Gbps.

They can be :
– SDH/SONET (STM–1/OC–3, STM–4/OC–12, STM–16/OC–48, STM–64/OC–192) equipments
– IP routers
– Fast Ethernet, GbE, 10GbE WAN, 10 GbE LAN, FC, FICON, ESCON... equipments
10Gbps SDH Tx Rx Tx RxN (32MAX)

SONET OCC10 λ32 TxN (32MAX)
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx Rx
10Gbps B&W 10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10GBE WAN Tx Rx Tx Rx6

OCC10 λ5
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx 10Gbps B&W
Tx Rx
10Gbps
Tx6
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10Gbps LAN Tx Rx Tx Rx5

OCC10 λ4
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx Rx Tx5
10Gbps B&W 10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
2.5Gbps Tx Rx Tx Rx4
SDH/SONET MCC3 λ3 Tx
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx Rx Tx4
2.5Gbps B&W 2.5Gbps Rx
COLOURED AGGREGATE
SIGNAL MULTIPLEXED
STM1/4/16, OC3/12/48 SIGNAL
FC/ESCON/FE Tx Rx Tx Rx3 (UP TO 32 λ)
GBE/FICON Rx
MCC3 λ2
CLIENT SYSTEM Tx Rx Tx3
from 100Mbps to 2.5Gbps 2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
STM1/4/16, OC3/12/48
FC/ESCON/FE Tx Rx Tx Rx2
GBE/FICON
WLA2 λ2
CLIENT SYSTEM
Rx Tx WLA3 Rx Tx2
from 100Mbps to 2.5Gbps 2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL MUX/
STM1/4, OC3/12,
DEMUX
FC/ESCON/FE Tx Rx4 SCHEME
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx from 100Mbps to 1.25Gbps
Tx4
UP TO FOUR Tx Rx1
4 x ANY λ1
STM1/4, OC3/12, Rx Tx1
FC/ESCON/FE Tx 2.5Gbps
Rx1
GBE/FICON COLOURED
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx from 100Mbps to 1.25Gbps
Tx1 SIGNAL
STM1/4, OC3/12,
FC/ESCON/FE Tx Rx4
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx4
UP TO FOUR Tx Rx Tx Rx1
4 x ANY MCC3 λ1
STM1/4, OC3/12, Rx Tx Rx Tx1
FC/ESCON/FE Tx 2.5Gbps B&W 2.5Gbps
Rx1
GBE/FICON COLOURED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx1

1696MS SIGNAL
Figure 35. Connection to host equipments
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 76 / 554
554
1.3 Protection scenario
1.3.1 O–SNCP
In a ring, the SNCP at OCh level can be provided either in back–to–back terminals or in OADM equipment,
as shown in Figure 36. on page 77.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on both arms of the ring and the available signal is selected
at the receive side (when failure of the other signal).
Split and select performed in optical

domain (by switching–off the user Tx)
Mux Mux
Dmux Dmux
back–to–back terminal
OADM or back–to–back
dropped channels added channels
Split and select performed in optical

domain (by switching–off the user Tx)
Figure 36. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with back–to–back terminals or OADM
The split and select function is optically performed.

The protection is optically performed, too; the function is ensured by 2 optical splitters.
The selection is done by switching–off the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activating
the protecting one (see Figure 37. ).
optical electrical optical electrical optical
user Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx user Tx
WDM
user Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx user Tx

optical splitter optical coupler
Figure 37. Optical SNCP way of working

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The protection schemes supported are: MCC3; MCC3 + 4xANY_P (only MCC3 is protected); 4xANY_P
(each client/drawer can be protected); MCC3 + OAC; OCC10; OCC10 + OAC; WLA2M_OP (the two chan-
nels are 1+1 protected, not the board); WLA3CDOP (the same as WLA2M_OP).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 77 / 554
554
1.3.2 Optical Transmission Section Protection
OTSP protection scheme is carried out using the OMSP board.
In a point–to–point link, with a splitter an a switch locaated after the amplifiers, it is possible to protect the

line. The amplifiers are not mandatory.
OMSP OMSP
M M
u u
x x
Sub–Network
D D
e- e-
m m
u u
x x
Figure 38. OTSP protection scheme in a point–to–point network configuration
After bing multiplexed, the signal is amplified (or not) and broadcasted onto 2 lines. At reception, before
being demultiplexed, the MAIN line (port #2) is selected by the OMSP board.
Switching occurs on ILOS detection on OMSP board on MAIN path (port #2) and no ILOS on OMSP board
on SPARE path (port #3).
The OSC, if present, is inserted in the amplifier boards. If amplifiers are not present, OSC is inserted in
Mux/DeMux boards. Thus the OSC passes through the OMSP board, it is then OTSP–protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 78 / 554
554
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer a record size integration to meet the challenging require-
ments of the metropolitan environment. A fully loaded 1696MSPAN system with 32 protected channels
can be housed in one standard ETSI or ANSI racks.

The 1696MSPAN employs a common shelf type for the different network elements. Up to four shelves can
be fit into a single rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 79 / 554
554
2.1 Rack design
The 1696MSPAN mechanical design allows to put up to four shelves in a single rack. It is compatible with
the following mechanical standards

– a 2000 mm high ETSI rack,

– a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
The depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitations in ANSI rack).
OPTINEX RACK NEBS 2000 RACK

(ETSI)
Top rack unit

Power Distribution Unit
Fiber storage
2000
1950
Air deflector Air deflector
600 mm 600 mm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 39. Rack organization, 32 channel bi–directional terminal
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 80 / 554
554
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration
The 1696MS shelf is made up by an empty shelf and the boards and units installed in it.
One 1696MS system is composed by one mandatory main/master shelf and up to three slave/expansion
shelves. The board composition determines the shelf type: master or slave.
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf
2.2.1.1 1696MS shelf organization
The shelf is organized into three parts (one main and two extension), hosting 49 boards or unit slots:
– the main part, which is the upper part and comprises the slots from 1 to 24; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 16 transponders, up to 11 TDM concentrators
(4xANY_P), optical amplifiers, one mux/demux for LT or two mux/demux or OADM boards (east/
west) for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel...
– the first extension part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 25 to 48; here are lo-
cated the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
• two redundant –48V power supply boards
• one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection (in master shelf only)
• one LAN access board for inter–shelf communication (LAN_I)
• one house–keeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK) (in master shelf only)
• one remote alarms board (RAI) (in master shelf only)
• two user interface boards (UIC) (in master shelf only)
• one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel (optical SNCP)
– the second extension part, which is the bottom part and comprises slot 49, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 40. on page 82 and in Figure 41. on
page 84.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 8. on page 86.
Main part (slot 1 to 24)
First extension part (slot 25 to 48)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Second extension part (slot 49)
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 81 / 554
554
2.2.1.2 1696MS Shelf dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

285
443
15
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
88
49
40
FANS
96 TE (24 x 4 TE wide slots)

21’’ (533.4 mm)
Figure 40. Shelf dimensions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 82 / 554
554
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules
The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.
If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards
can be exchanged without functionality loss.
2.2.2.1 1696MS configuration constraints
Optical Sub–Network Channel Protection requires:
– transponder boards (MCC/OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots. [4,5] or [6,7] or [8,9] or
[10,11] or [14,15] or [16,17] or[18,19] or [20,21]
– each Optical Protecting Channel boards (OPC) must be placed

• when protecting transponders, in one of the two slots, located under the corresponding trans-
ponder (MCC/OCC10) pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 28 or 29 corresponds to the slots 4–5). The
transponder above the OPC is the main one and the other is the protecting transponder (e.g.:
OPC in slot 28 implies main transponder in slot 4 and protecting one in slot 5)
• when protecting 4xANY_P client signals, in the four slots located below the corresponding
4xANY_P pair; the 4xANY_P on the right side contains the MAIN/protected drawers. Starting
from the left the first OPC protects drawer 2, the second one drawer 1, the third one drawer 3,
the fourth one drawer 4; in case of 4xANY_P in slots 6,7,8,9, the OPC in slot 30 protects drawer
2, that in slot 31 protects drawer 1, that in slot 32 protects drawer 3, that OPC in slot 33 protects
drawer 4
– if TDM concentrators (4xANY_P) are used with few channels, all the boards are preferably put in a
single shelf
– if TDM concentrators are used with more than 8 channels, 4xANY_P) boards are preferably put in
one dedicated shelf
– using MVAC (for power adjustment of external colored wavelengths, of channel or band optical
passthrough and for transponder post–emphasis, channel/band loop power adjustment) the boards
allocation depends on the needed configuration (for the boards location refer to installation hand-
book).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 83 / 554
554
2.2.2.2 1696MS Typical shelf configuration
Figure 41. shows a typical configuration of a fully equipped shelf and Table 8. resumes the possibilities
that satisfy the configuration constraints.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(X)
Equipment Shelf controler
Mux/Demux or OADM
Mux/Demux or OADM
Optical amplifier
Optical amplifier
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
OSMC
SPVM
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O H R O O O O U U P
S A P P P P K A P P P P I I S
C N C C C C (*) I C C C C C C C
(*) Master 49
shelf only FANS
Figure 41. Typical fully equipped shelf
In the first extension part, except for the PSC and the LAN boards, the placement of the boards has no
hardware limitation. However, here is the most frequently used configuration:
– the slots 28 to 35 and 38 to 45 are dedicated to the Optical Protection Channel board (OPC),
– the slot 36 hosts the HouseKeeping board (HK),
– the slot 37 hosts the Remote Alarm Interface board (RAI),
– the slots 46 and 47 hosts the User Interface Card (UIC).
Mandatory boards are:
– Slot 1 is dedicated to ESC board (Master and expansion (SC) shelves).

– Slots 25 and 48 are dedicated to the Power Supply Cards (Master and Expansion shelves).
– Slot 26 of the master shelf is dedicated to the LAN_Q card.
– Slot 27 of the slave shelf is dedicated to the LAN_I card.
– Slot 49 hosts the FANs card (Master and Expansions).
N.B. Particular setting of the LAN board (slot 26) on the Master shelf:
On this board, the rotary switch SW3 corresponding to the ”Equipment Type” must be set in 5
value (hexadecimal), otherwise the Shelf Controller will not start.
When the straps on the board are forced (by pass state) to be LAN #26 or LAN #27 board, take
care to insert the LAN board in the correct slot.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. the slot 2 can be used for OSMC; it is an optional card.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 84 / 554
554
2.2.3 1696MS Part list
In Table 8. on page 86 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making
up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 86).
Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside a single
shelf, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
• Item Name
• The ”Acronym” identifying the units
• ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
• Maximum quantity per each shelf
• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 40. on page 82 and Figure 41. on
page 84 for slot numbering.
• Number of explanatory notes
Table 9. on page 98 reports the explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 85 / 554
554
2.2.3.1 1696MS shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list

ANV Max

NAME ACRONYM SLOT Note
Part Number Q.ty
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MSPAN shelf 3AL 86607 AA–– – –– [1]
Shelf 1696MSPAN 10G 3AL 95270 AA–– – –– [2]
1696MSPAN FB shelf 3AL 86607 AC–– – ––
Shelf FB 1696MSPAN 10G 3AL 95270 AB–– – –– [2]
21” D.C.U. assembled support 3AN 44747 AA–– 2 ––
TRIBUTARIES
Multirate CH 192.000–192.100 MCC1 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 AA––
Multirate CH 192.200–192.300 MCC1 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 AB––
Multirate CH 192.500–192.600 MCC1 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 AC––
Multirate CH 192.700–192.800 MCC1 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 AD––
Multirate CH 193.000–193.100 MCC1 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 AE––
Multirate CH 193.200–193.300 MCC1 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 AF––
Multirate CH 193.500–193.600 MCC1 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 AG––
Multirate CH 193.700–193.800 MCC1 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 AH–– 4–>11
4 >11
16 [3]
Multirate CH 194.200–194.300 MCC1 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 AL–– 14–>21
Multirate CH 194.400–194.500 MCC1 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 AM––
Multirate CH 194.700–194.800 MCC1 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 AN––
Multirate CH 194.900–195.000 MCC1 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 AP––
Multirate CH 195.200–195.300 MCC1 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 AQ––
Multirate CH 195.400–195.500 MCC1 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 AR––
Multirate CH 195.700–195.800 MCC1 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 AS––
Multirate CH 195.900–196.000 MCC1 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 AT––
MCC2 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 BA––
MCC2 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 BB––
MCC2 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 BC––
MCC2 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 BD––
MCC2 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 BE––
MCC2 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 BF––
MCC2 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 BG––
Enhanched Multirate CH MCC2 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 BH–– 4 >11
4–>11
16 [4]
19x.x00–19x.x00 MCC2 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 BL–– 14–>21
MCC2 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 BM––
MCC2 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 BN––
MCC2 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 BP––
MCC2 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 BQ––
MCC2 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 BR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MCC2 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 BS––

MCC2 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 BT––
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 86 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
MCC3 192.0–192.1 3AL 95150 AA––
MCC3 192.2–192.3 3AL 95150 AB––

MCC3 192.5–192.6 3AL 95150 AC––

MCC3 192.7–192.8 3AL 95150 AD––
MCC3 193.0–193.1 3AL 95150 AE––
MCC3 193.2–193.3 3AL 95150 AF––
MCC3 193.5–193.6 3AL 95150 AG––
Enhanched
E h h d Multirate
M lti t CH MCC3 193.7–193.8 3AL 95150 AH–– 4–>11
4 >11
19x x00 19x x00 with SFP optical
19x.x00–19x.x00 16 [5]
MCC3 194.2–194.3 3AL 95150 AJ–– 14–>21
modules
MCC3 194.4–194.5 3AL 95150AK––
MCC3 194.7–194.8 3AL 95150 AL––
MCC3 194.9–195.0 3AL 95150 AM––
MCC3 195.2–195.3 3AL 95150 AN––
MCC3 195.4–195.5 3AL 95150 AP––
MCC3 195.7–195.8 3AL 95150 AQ––
MCC3 195.9–196.0 3AL 95150 AR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 87 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 192.000 3AL 86834 AA––

OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 192.100 3AL 86834 AB––

OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 192.200 3AL 86834 AC––
OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 192.300 3AL 86834 AD––
OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 192.500 3AL 86834 AE––
OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 192.600 3AL 86834 AF––
OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 192.700 3AL 86834 AG––
OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 192.800 3AL 86834 AH––
OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 193.000 3AL 86834 AL––
OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 193.100 3AL 86834 AM––
OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 193.200 3AL 86834 AN––
OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 193.300 3AL 86834 AP––
OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 193.500 3AL 86834 AQ––
OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 193.600 3AL 86834 AR––
OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 193.700 3AL 86834 AS––
OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 193.800 3AL 86834 AT–– 4 >11
4–>11
16 [6]
OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 142.200 3AL 86834 BA–– 14–>21
OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 194.300 3AL 86834 BB––
OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 194.400 3AL 86834 BC––
OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 194.500 3AL 86834 BD––
OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 194.700 3AL 86834 BE––
OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 194.800 3AL 86834 BF––
OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 194.900 3AL 86834 BG––
OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 195.000 3AL 86834 BH––
OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 195.200 3AL 86834 BL––
OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 195.300 3AL 86834 BM––
OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 195.400 3AL 86834 BN––
OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 195.500 3AL 86834 BP––
OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 195.700 3AL 86834 BQ––
OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 195.800 3AL 86834 BR––
OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 195.900 3AL 86834 BS––
OCC10 CH 196.000 OCC10 196.000 3AL 86834 BT––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 88 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.000 3AL 95238 AA––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.100 3AL 95238 AC––

OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.200 3AL 95238 AE––

OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.300 3AL 95238 AG––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.500 3AL 95238 AN––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.600 3AL 95238 AQ––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.700 3AL 95238 AS––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.800 3AL 95238 BA––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.000 3AL 95238 BE––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.100 3AL 95238 BG––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.200 3AL 95238 BL––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.300 3AL 95238 BN––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.500 3AL 95238 BS––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.600 3AL 95238 CA––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.700 3AL 95238 CC––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.800 3AL 95238 CE–– 4 >11
4–>11
OCC10 _E
E 16 [7]
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.200 3AL 95238 CP–– 14–>21
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.300 3AL 95238 CR––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.400 3AL 95238 CT––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.500 3AL 95238 DB––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.700 3AL 95238 DF––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.800 3AL 95238 DH––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.900 3AL 95238 DM––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.000 3AL 95238 DP––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.200 3AL 95238 DT––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.300 3AL 95238 EB––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.400 3AL 95238 ED––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.500 3AL 95238 EF––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.700 3AL 95238 EM––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.800 3AL 95238 EP––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.900 3AL 95238 ER––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 196.000 3AL 95238 ET––
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AA––
CH193.300 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AB––
CH193.000 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED 4–>11
OCC10 _NA 3AL 95313 AC–– 16 [8]
CH193.100 (1550) 14–>21
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AD––
CH193.200 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95314 AA––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CH195.900 (1530)
OCC–10_XFP_CWDM 1530NM 8DG 81002 AA–– 4 >11
4–>11
16 [9]
OCC–10_XFP_CWDM 1550NM 8DG 81002 AB–– 14–>21
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 89 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE–2X3R WLA2M 3AL 97657 AA–– [10]

DUAL ENH WLA MODULE –

WLA2M_OP 3AL 97657 AB–– 4–>11 [11]
2X3R W/ OPC 16
14–>21
14 >21
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARD–SFP WLA3CD 3AL 97795 BA–– [12]
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARD–SFP–OPC WLA3CDOP 3AL 97795 BB–– [13]
[14]
4xANY Host I–16.1 i/f 4xANY 3AL 86639 AA––
2;4;6;8; [16]
10;12; [15]
4xANY Host S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AA–– 11 14;16;
18;20; [16]
22 [17]
4xANY Host fully pluggable 4xANY_P 3AL 95063 AA––
[16]
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM
SDH–SONET_1310
4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge 3AL 86673 AA–– –– ––
Drawer [18]
4 X ANY 1310nm LS cartridge LF_1310_2 Drawer 3AL 86674 AA–– –– –– [19]
4 X ANY HS cartridge HF_1310 Drawer 3AL 86672 AA–– –– –– [20]
[21]
4 X ANY LS optical cartridge LF_850 Drawer 3AL 86869 AA–– –– ––
[16]
[22]
4 X ANY 850nm HS cartridge HF_850 Drawer 3AL 86870 AA–– –– ––
[16]
[23]
4 X ANY LS plug–in 1310 (OL–I) 3AL 81617 AA–– –– ––
[16]
4 X ANY Electrical DV cartridge 3AL 95267 AA–– –– –– [24]
Multiple attenuator card MVAC 3AL 86892 AA–– 18 4–>21 [25]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 90 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
B&W SFP MODULES
OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 S–1.1 1AB 19467 0001 –– ––

OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 W/DDM S–1.1DDM 1AB 19467 0004 –– ––

OPTO TRX SFP L–1.1 L–1.1 1AB 19467 0002 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.2 L–1.2 1AB 19467 0003 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 S–4.1 1AB 19636 0001 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 DDM S–4.1DDM 1AB 19636 0004 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.1 L–4.1 1AB 19636 0003 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.2 L–4.2 1AB 19636 0002 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP I–16.1 I–16.1 1AB 19637 0002 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP I–16.1 DDM I–16.1DDM 1AB 19637 0005 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 S–16.1 1AB 19637 0001 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 DDM S–16.1DDM 1AB 19637 0006 –– ––
[26]
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.1 L–16.1 1AB 19637 0004 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.2 L.16.2 1AB 19637 0003 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 ANYRATE
S–16–ADDM 1AB 19637 0007 –– ––
DDM
OPTO TRX SFP 100 BASE LX 100B LX 1AB 21471 0001 –– ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX 1GbELX 1AB 18728 0001 –– ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX DDM 1GbELXDDM 1AB 18728 0031 –– ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX 1GbESX 1AB 18728 0002 –– ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX DDM 1GbESXDDM 1AB 18728 0033 –– ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP–ZX 1GbEZX 1AB 18728 0028 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC MM DDM FC/2FCmm 1AB 18728 0037 –– ––
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC SM DDM FC/2FCsm 1AB 18728 0038 –– ––
B&W XFP MODULES
XFP I–64.1/10GBE BASE L XI641 1AB 21454 0001 –– ––
XFP 10GBE BASE S 10GBase–S 1AB 21454 0002 –– –– [[27]]
XFP S–64.2B/10GBE BASE E XS642B 1AB 21728 0001 –– ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 91 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
CWDM SFP MODULES

CWDM 1470NM PIN SFP CWP147 1AB 19634 0001 –– ––

[28]
CWDM 1470NM APD SFP CWA147 1AB19635 0001 –– ––
CWDM 1490NM APD SFP CWA149 1AB 19635 0002 –– ––
[29]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 92 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
DWDM SFP MODULES
OPTO TRX SFP DWDM CH600 DWA600 1AB 32141 0003


–– –– [30]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 93 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH,

contact Alcatel contact Alcatel –– ––

1 FC 1300nm stop gap) BASIC

1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000SX, 1 FC
850nm stop gap) BASIC
SFP STM–16 CWDM 1470NM

PIN BASIC (35 Km typ)






SFP STM–16 CWDM 1610NM [31]


APD BASIC (75 Km typ)







1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 94 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
MULTIPLEXERS
1x8 Mux/Demux 300 – 380 + EXP

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 3AL 86615 AA–– [32]

+ SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300–380+EXP OMDX8100_M_L1_X 3AL 86615 AJ–– 2;3;4;5; [33]
8 6;12;13
1x8 Mux/Demux 200–280 OMDX8100_M_L2 3AL 86615 AB––
;22
1x8 Mux/Demux 520–600 OMDX8100_M_S1 3AL 86615 AC–– [[34]]
1x8 Mux/Demux 420–500 OMDX8100_M_S2 3AL 86615 AD––
OADM 8 CH 300–380 + SPV OADM8100_M_L1_S 3AL 86637 AA––
OADM 8 CH 200–280 + SPV OADM8100_M_L2_S 3AL 86637 AB–– 2 3 4 5 [35]
2;3;4;5;
8 6;12;13
OADM 8 CH 520–600 + SPV OADM8100_M_S1_S 3AL 86637 AC–– [36]
;22
OADM 8 CH 420–500 + SPV OADM8100_M_S2_S 3AL 86637 AD––
OADM 4 CH 200–230 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S 3AL 86637 BC––
OADM 4 CH 250–280 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch25–28_S 3AL 86637 BD––
OADM 4 CH 300–330 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch30–33_S 3AL 86637 BA––
OADM 4 CH 350–380 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 3AL 86637 BB–– 2;3;4;5;
2 345
[37]
8 6;12;13
OADM 4 CH 420–450 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch42–45_S 3AL 86637 BG–– [[36]]
;22
OADM 4 CH 470–500 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch47–50_S 3AL 86637 BH––
OADM 4 CH 520–550 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch52–55_S 3AL 86637 BE––
OADM 4 CH 570–600 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S 3AL 86637 BF––
OADM 2 CH 300–310 + SPV OADM2100_M_30–31_S 3AL 86778 AB––
OADM 2 CH 320–330 + SPV OADM2100_M_32–33_S 3AL 86778 AC–– 2;3;4;5;
OADM 2 CH 350–360 + SPV OADM2100_M_35–36_S 3AL 86778 AD–– 8 6;12;13
; ; [[38]]
OADM 2 CH 370–380 + SPV OADM2100_M_37–38_S 3AL 86778 AE–– ;22
OADM 2 CH 470–480 + SPV OADM2100_M_47–48_S 3AL 86778 AF––
OADM 1 CH 300 + SPV OADM1100_M_30_S 3AL 86777 AJ––
OADM 1 CH 310 + SPV OADM1100_M_31_S 3AL 86777 AK––
OADM 1 CH 320 + SPV OADM1100_M_32_S 3AL 86777 AL––
OADM 1 CH 330 + SPV OADM1100_M_33_S 3AL 86777 AM––
OADM 1 CH 350 + SPV OADM1100_M_35_S 3AL 86777 AN–– 2;3;4;5;
2 345
8 6;12;13 [39]
OADM 1 CH 360 + SPV OADM1100_M_36_S 3AL 86777 AP––
;22
OADM 1 CH 370 + SPV OADM1100_M_37_S 3AL 86777 AQ––
OADM 1 CH 380 + SPV OADM1100_M_38_S 3AL 86777 AR––
OADM 1 CH 470 + SPV OADM1100_M_47_S 3AL 86777 BE––
OADM 1 CH 480 + SPV OADM1100_M_48_S 3AL 86777 BF––
2;3;12;
Mux–Demux 1310–1550+SPV SPV_F_1310_1550 3AL 86779 AA–– 5 [40]
13;22
2835
1510 SPV COUPLER SMALL SPV_F_C 3AL 86779 BA–– 16 [41]
3845
2;3;4;5;
2F 8CH MDX2 W/ 1310 FILTER CMDX2 3AL 97654 AB–– 8 6;12;13 [42]
;22
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 95 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER

OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC1 3AL 86703 AA––

4; 5;
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC1_L 3AL 86703 AB–– 12; 13;
8 [43]
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC2 3AL 86703 AC–– 20; 21;
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC2_L 3AL 86703 AD–– 22; 23
CONTROLLER
ESC (Equip. and Shelf Controller) 3AL 86661 AA–– [44]
ESC 1 1 24
1;
ESC/2 3AL 86661 AB–– [45]
FLASH CARD 80 MB MEM–DEV 1AB 15205 0001 1 1 [46]
SPV–M + OW SPVM2 3AL 86606 AB–– 6 2;16;18 [47]
20; 22;
SPVM_H SPVM_H 3AL 86606 AC–– 6 23 [48]
LAC (LAN Access card) LAN_Q or LAN_I 3AL 86653 AA–– 1 26 [49]
Housekeeping card HK 3AL 86668 AA–– 1 36 [50]
Alarm Card RAI 3AL 87009 AA–– 1 37 [51]
UAC (User Access Card) UIC 3AL 86654AA–– 2 46;47 [52]
2;12;
OSM_C (Monitoring Card) OSMC 3AL 86893AA–– 4 [53]
13;23
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Passive optical protect. module OPC 3AL 86708 AA–– [54]
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC OPC 3AL 86708 AB–– [55]
SM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AC–– 28 >35 [56]
28–>35
16
MM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AD–– 38–>45 [57]
MM_OPC_850 OPC 3AL 95113 AA–– [58]
OMS PROTECTION OMSP 3AL 97541 AA–– [59]
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply Card PSC 3AL 86652 AA–– 2 25;48 [60]
Power Supply Card PSC3 3AL 86652 AB–– 2 25;48 [61]
FANS
Fan Card FANC 3AL 86625 AA–– 1 49
[62]
CO ENH FAN MODULE FANC 3AL 86625 AB–– 1 49
CO NO–DUST FILTER – 3AL 86633 AA–– 1 49
CO METALLIC GRID FILTER – 3AL 95106 AA–– 1 49
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
DCM–5 DCM–5 1AB 15169 0013
DCM–10 DCM–10 1AB 15169 0007
DCM–15 DCM–15 1AB 15169 0014
DCM–20 DCM–20 1AB 15169 0008
2 – [63]
DCM–30 DCM–30 1AB 15169 0009
DCM–40 DCM–40 1AB 15169 0010
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DCM–60 DCM–60 1AB 15169 0011

DCM–80 DCM–80 1AB 15169 0012
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 96 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC – 1AB 16271 0006 2 – [64]

Alarm chain cable – 3AL 86750 AA–– 1 – [65]

HK user cable – 3AL 86751 AA–– 1 – [66]
ANSI & NEBS installation kit – 3AL 86725 AA–– 1 – [67]
1696MS Optinex installation kit – 3AL 86772 AA–– 1 – [68]
KIT – Optical kit 8–channel – 3AL 95184 AA–– 2 – [69]
Jumper kit 4 lambda OADM – 3AL 86827 AA–– 2 – [70]
Optical kit 4xANY intra–shelf – 3AL 86863 AA–– 4 – [71]
Opt. kit 4xANY intra–shelf Prot – 3AL 86864 AA–– 4 – [72]
Air deflector ETSI – 3AN 51293 AA–– 3 –
UAC user cable – 3AL 86753 AA–– 1 – [73]
Opto jumper SMF MU/PC–SC/
– 1AB 1675400010 16 – [74]
PC L = 3MT
SFP module extractor kit – 3AL 81728 AAAA 1 – [75]
KIT – OPC connection SM – 3AL 95185 AAAA 8 – [76]
KIT – OPC connection MM – 3AL 95186 AAAA 8 – [77]
Jumper SM MU/PC–LC/PC cable – 1AB 18577 0004 16 – [78]
KIT–Common optical amplif. – 3AL 95136 AAAA 1 – [79]
KIT–Common optical not amplif – 3AL 95137 AAAA 1 – [80]
WLA PROTECTED KIT – 8DG 17477 AA–– 1 –
Dummy plate 4TE for PBA – 3AN 50555 AA–– 22 –
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY – 3AN 50556 AA–– 22 –
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Opto atten MU/PC 1dB plug type 1AB 20480 0001
–
JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE
1AB 18240 0042 –
2 MM 810 MM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1AB 18240 0050 1 [81]

2 MM 500 MM
1AB 18240 0013 8 [82]
2 MM 650 MM
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 97 / 554
554
1AB 18240 0012 2 [83]
2 MM 650 MM
REMOVAL TOOL MU/PC
1AD 03860 0002 1 [84]
PLUG_IN ATTEN.

SOFTWARE [85]
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes
Note Explanation
[1] It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel. Up to four subracks can be housed in an ETSI and
NEBS compliant rack
[2] Backpanel able to transmit 10G data, able to link two adjacent OCC10s
[3] It is a universal bidirectional multi–clock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protec-
tion, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
[4] 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
[5] It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP modules (S–1.1,
L–1.1, L–1.2, S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2, S–16.1, I–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC...)
[6] 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
– any STM–64/OC–192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
[7] G.709 10Gbps transponder, designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. The client interface
is a B&W XFP module (some types available), accepting the following client signals
– 9.953Gbps (STM–64/OC–192 to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
– 10.709 Gbps (NNI), future rel.
[8] OCC10 board with improved optical performances (with respect to ref. [6]) of non amplified transmis-
sions in order to reach 80 Km
[9] CWDM version for 10Gbps line. It can be connected to the 1530nm or 1550nm port of CMDX2
[10] Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical chan-
nels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
[11] Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying one protected optical channel.
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
[12] Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical chan-
nels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM, CWDM SFPs
[13] Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying one protected optical channel.
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM or CWDM SFPs
[14] TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM–16/OC–48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I–16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 2–3; 4–5;..)
[15] Remote application. It differs from the above 4xANY board (see point [14]) only for the optical
2.5Gbps interface: it is S–16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S–16.1; 2 Km for
I–16.1)
[16] To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the end of Alcatel
code must be:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF–850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG

– 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF–850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG
– 4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 98 / 554
554
Note Explanation
[17] TDM concentrator with an STM–16 (I–S–L type) B&W or CWDM or DWDM aggregate optical interface,
provided by an SFP module. In the releases prior to R2.2A, it is necessary to use the 4xAny_P function-
al variant 3AL95063AB–– when the signal delivered by the 4xAny_P goes through a SDH network
[18] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM–1/OC–3 and STM–4/OC–12.
If it is set as STM–1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM–4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM–1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM–4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM–4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
[19] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
[20] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
[21] 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
[22] 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
[23] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
[24] 2nd window plug–in electrical cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video signal at 270
Mbps. Up to four drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
[25] Allow to manually adjust the optical power budget. Each MVAC board includes two VOAs
[26] STM1/4/16, GBE, FE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... B&W SFP optical modules; they can be fitted in
MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 (client side) and 4xANY_P (aggregate side, STM–16 only) boards (refer to
Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[27] 10GbE B&W XFP optical modules; they can be fitted in OCC10, client side (refer to Figure 61. on
page 139 for XFP placing)
[28] PIN or “Bronze” CWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, ag-
gregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[29] APD or “Silver” CWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggre-
gate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[30] DWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side (refer
to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[31] BASIC SFPs are shorter–reach variants of standard GBE and CWDM SFP optical plugin modules;
they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[32] 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
[33] 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are avail-
able in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used
[34] 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux. Slots 4,5,6 are avail-
able in master shelf only
[35] Allows to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250)
band. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.
[36] Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.
[37] Allows to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym. Slots 4,5,6 are available
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
in master shelf only.

[38] Allows to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym. Slots 4,5,6 are available
in master shelf only.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 99 / 554
554
Note Explanation
[39] Allows to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels. From 47 to 57 are short band channels. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.

[40] Allows to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)

channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
[41] Allows to mux/demux a SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel and a 1310nm or 1550nm channel. This board
allows to supervise a CPE
[42] 8–channel Mux/Demux for the 8 CWDM channels. It is also able to insert/extract the 1310nm OSC.
Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only
[43] Double–stage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the 32 channels in C band. Slots 22 and 23 are
available in expansion shelves only. OAC1_L and OAC2_L provide long spans transmission. OAC2
and OAC2_L reduce power dissipation
[44] It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities. It has to be fitted in expansion
shelves, too, to only perform the shelf controller function. Instead, in slot 24 it is only used to have
a back–up of the slot 1 flash memory, in TL1 management case (North America)
[45] New version of ESC recommended for greenfield deployments in R.22A and future
[46] The flash card contains the equipment data base.
It must be equipped only on ESC board plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
[47] 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel). Hosted in master shelf only.
The SPVM2 in slot 23 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX or OAC: it is dedicated to MS supervi-
sion. The other SPVMs are dedicated to up to 10 CPE links supervision (SPVM has 2 x SPV ports)
[48] Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
[49] Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment:
– plugged in slot #26 of the master shelf, it is used as LAN_Q to connect the NMS
– plugged in slot #27, it is used as LAN_I to inter connect the expansion shelves.
The LAN board code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installation in slot 27 of the
extension shelf. Any variant of 3AL 86653AA–– may be used for LAN_Q in slot 26 of the master shelf
[50] Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
[51] Fitted in master and expansion shelves, it is used for monitoring the rack alarms
[52] Hosted in master shelf only, manages G.703 user channels. For any SPVM, two cards are required
[53] The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card measures the power of each channel. Coupled with MVAC
provides automatic power equalization
[54] SM optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config.) or O–SNCP
(ring config) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCC boards and plugged below the main one.
[55] MM optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. [54]), it manages the
HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
[56] SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. [54]
[57] MM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref.[55]
[58] MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
[59] Protects the OTS (path) between two NE by selecting (switching) the incoming multiplexed signal
[60] PSCs work in “1+1” protection meaning that only one PSC is active at once
[61] PSC3 is a Power Supply Card (evolution of PSC card for central office shelf)
[62] It is equipped with three fans; an anti–dust filter has to be put just below the fans
[63] Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be
placed either in the inter–stage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One
DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the (up to 32) 1696 channels
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 100 / 554
554
Note Explanation
[64] To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
[65] Allows the chain connection of the rack alarms, between the SUB–D 9p and RJ45 connectors of two
RAI cards in two different shelves

[66] Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
[67] Used for equipment installation in ANSI & NEBS rack
[68] Used for equipment installation in OPTINEX rack
[69] The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 transponders to the 8–channel MUX/DEMUX (OMDX/OADM)
following the installation rules. 2 kits are needed to connect a shelf equipped with 16 transponders
[70] The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 wavelenght adapters and SPVM to the 4–channel MUX follow-
ing the installation rules. Optimized solution can be ordered using single MU–MU jumpers
[71] Required to connect 4xANY HOST to MCC in the same shelf, following installation rules
[72] Required to connect 4xANY HOST to the optical splitter (MCC protection) in the same shelf, following
the installation rules
[73] Used to perform the (2Mbps and 64Kbps) AUX/service channels connection from the 50pin connec-
tor of the UIC card to the DDF
[74] MU–SC/PC jumper for plug–in attenuator manager in ODF
[75] Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
[76] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
[77] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
[78] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1
protection. 16 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 32 (16 + 16) 4xANY drawers in eigth 4xANY
[79] Allows the common connection in amplified systems, like the Mux/Demux connection with OAC, con-
nection between two stages of the same OAC, connection between two different OACs and extra or
pass–through channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the Mux–Demux pair). For details
refer to the installation handbook
[80] Allows the common connection in non–amplified systems, like the OSC channel (IN/OUT connector
of SPVM) and extra or pass–through channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the Mux–De-
mux pair). For details refer to the installation handbook
[81] Used to connect the OSMC to the the OMDX/OADM for monitoring
[82] Used to connect the OSMC to the OAC monitoring points (stage1 IN/OUT, stage 2 IN/OUT)
[83] Used to connect the OMDX/OADM to the OAC
[84] Used to remove the opto attenuator plug–in
[85] Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operator’s Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 101 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view
Figure 43. Shelf front view with cover

Figure 42. Example of Master shelf front view
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
102 / 554
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration
The 1696MS_C shelf is a ”Compact WDM” architecture.

It is a compact 6 slots shelf with possible expansion to 3 compact shelves (1 master shelf plus 2 expansion
shelves).
It is dedicated to receive the units developped for the 1696MSPAN shelf.

As the 1696MS, the compact shelf has two redundant power feeds for –48V.
This architecture enables point to point and ring applications

– up to 12 channels in LT configuration
– up to 4 channels in OADM configuration
(colored or black and white) monitored by the SPVM board.
1696MS_C rack version powered from 48V DC voltage source from the rack connected to the Power
Supply Card.
Figure 44. 1696MS_C Rack version
1696MS_C table version
In a table version using, the operator should wear a wrist–strap bracelet connected to the me-
chanical ground (available on the rear of the shelf) for each handling a board, optical connectors
or a part of the shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 103 / 554
554
Main features provided by the 1696MS_C shelf
• It is very easy to use due its small size (6 unit slots versus 24 in the 1696MSPAN shelf)
• Independent stand alone 1696MS_C shelf can be used

• Units of the 1696MS_C are set horizontally

• Up to 12 1696MS_C shelves can be set in a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, or a 2150 mm high ANSI
rack, or a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf
2.3.1.1 1696MS_C Shelf organization
The 1696MS_C shelf is organized into three parts (one main part and two extensions parts), hosting 13
boards or unit slots:
– the main part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 1 to 6; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 4 transponders, up to 2 TDM concentrators
(4xANY), one mux/demux for LT or two mux/dmux or OADM boards (east/west) for hub/OADM ap-
plication, optical supervisory channel board (optimized application with SPVM_Half, that is a depopu-
lated SPVM supporting one transceiver at 1510 nm instead of two, is possible for point to point and
spur configuration)...
– the first extension part, which is the right part and comprises the slots from 7 to 12; here are located
the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
• two redundant –48V power supply boards
• one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection
• one house–keeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK)
• one remote alarms board (RAI)
• one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel
– the second extension part, which is the left part and comprises slot 13, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 47. on page 105 and in Figure 48. on page 107.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 10. on page 109.
Second extension part (slot 13) First extension part (slot 7 to 12)
Main part (slot 1 to 6)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 46. 1696 MS_C – Mechanical structure
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 104 / 554
554
2.3.1.2 1696MS_C Shelf dimensions
Shelf size:
– the size of the 1696MS_C shelf is 446.2mm (19” width) x 274mm (depth with cover) x 132.4 mm
(heigth)
– the depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitation in ANSI rack).
2.3.1.3 Rack partionning
In current release one master shelf and up to two expansion shelves are managed.
Slot 6 12 PSC
Slot 5 11
F A N _C Slot 4 10
Slot 3 9
Slot 2 8
13 7 PSC
Slot 1 I–link_S
SLAVE
Fiber drawer
MASTER
Slot 6 I–link_M 12 PSC
Slot 5 11
132.4
F A N _C Slot 4 10
Slot 3 9
Slot 2 8 LAN_Q
13 7 PSC
Slot 1 ESC
300 88
19’’(446.2 mm)
N.B. dark boards are mandatory
Figure 47. 1696 MS_C – Main shelf board arrangement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 105 / 554
554
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules
The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.

If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards

can be exchanged without functionality loss.
The main configurations available are:
• OADM 1/2/4 channels (protected back–to–back) configuration with/without OPC

• up to 12 channels Line Terminal
• Remote 4xANY + protected MCC
• Remote 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
• SPVM Manager
• 2 channels Line Terminal (MCC + 4xANY)...
• Local spur (up to two x 4xANY to save cost of one supervision unit).
Amplified configurations are allowed, by means of OAC2 and OAC2_L.

The 4xANY drawers 1+1 protection is also allowed, by means of OPCs.
2.3.2.1 1696MS_C configuration constraints
Optical Sub–Network Channel Protection requires:
– Transponder boards (MCC, OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots (slots [2,3] or [4,5],
– 4xANY(_S/_P) unit must be placed in a 2–slots space beginning with an even address ([2,3] or [4,5]);
if two 4xANY are used, they must be installed in in slots ([2,3] and [4,5]);
– if 4xANY is associated with a MCC all the board are put in a single compact shelf.
– Each Optical Protecting Channel board (OPC) must be placed in one of the two slots, located on the
right side of the corresponding MCC/OCC10 pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 9 or 10 corresponds to the
slots 2–3). The MCC/OCC10 on the left of the OPC is the main one and the other is the MCC/OCC10
in protection (e.g.: OPC in slot 9 implies main MCC/OCC10 in slot 3 and protecting MCC/OCC10 in
slot 2).
When protecting 4xANY client signals, the OPCs have to be fitted in the four slots located on the right
of the 4xANY couple; the OPC in slot 8 protects drawer #2, the OPC in slot 9 protects drawer #1, the
OPC in slot 10 protects drawer #3, the OPC in slot 11 protects drawer #4;
– When expansion shelves are used

• in slot 6 of the master shelf have to be plugged the I–Link_M board
• in slot 1 of each expansion shelf have to be plugged the I–Link_S board
N.B. There is no specific NE configuration. The behavior is always the same. The OADM is equiva-
lent to the back–to back terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 106 / 554
554
2.3.2.2 1696MS_C typical shelf configuration
Figure 48. shows a typical configuration of an equipped 1696MS_C Master shelf and Table 10. resumes
the possibilities that satisfy the configuration constraints.
Figure 48. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf
For Hardware and/or Software organization, boards are located on dedicated slots.
The position of the boards on the 1696MS_C shelf are:
– ESC board (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of master shelf

– I–link_M card (mandatory, only when expansion shelves are used): dedicated slot 6 of master shelf
– I–link_S card (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of each expansion shelf
– PSC/PSC2 cards : dedicated small slots (mandatory equipped) 7 and 12
– SPVM cards slot #4, #5, or #6
• SPVM in slot #4 must be provisioned to supervise the multiplexed signal
• SPVM boards set in slot #5 and #6 are dedicated to an application with no multiplexed signal
– LAN_Q card (mandatory): dedicated small slot 8
– HK card can be installed in small slot 11
– RAI card can be installed in small slots 9 or 10
– OAC2 and OAC2_L cards can be installed in slot 2, 3
– FAN_C card (mandatory): dedicated slot 13.
Mandatory boards are:
– ESC board in slot 1 of master shelf

– LAN_Q card in slot 8 of master shelf
– I–link_M card in slot 6 of the master shelf (only when expansion shelves are used)
– I–link_S card in slot 1 of each expansion shelf
– PSC/PSC2 cards in slots 7 and 12
– FAN_C card in slot 13.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 107 / 554
554
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list
In Table 10. on page 109 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units mak-
ing up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 86).

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equip-
ment, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
• Item Name
• The ”Acronym” identifying the units
• ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
• Maximum quantity per each shelf
• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 47. on page 105 for slot numbering.
• Number of explanatory notes
Table 11. on page 121 reports the explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 108 / 554
554
2.3.3.1 1696MS_C shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list

ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MS_C shelf 3AL 86799 AA–– – –– 1
TRIBUTARIES
MCC1 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 AA––
MCC1 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 AB––
MCC1 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 AC––
MCC1 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 AD––
MCC1 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 AE––
MCC1 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 AF––
MCC1 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 AG––
MCC1 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 AH––
Multirate Channel Card 4 2 >6
2–>6 2
MCC1 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 AL––
MCC1 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 AM––
MCC1 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 AN––
MCC1 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 AP––
MCC1 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 AQ––
MCC1 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 AR––
MCC1 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 AS––
MCC1 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 AT––
MCC2 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 BA––
MCC2 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 BB––
MCC2 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 BC––
MCC2 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 BD––
MCC2 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 BE––
MCC2 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 BF––
MCC2 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 BG––
MCC2 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 BH––
Enhanced Multirate Channel Card 4 2 >6
2–>6 3
MCC2 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 BL––
MCC2 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 BM––
MCC2 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 BN––
MCC2 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 BP––
MCC2 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 BQ––
MCC2 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 BR––
MCC2 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 BS––
MCC2 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 BT––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 109 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
MCC3 192.0–192.1 3AL 95150 AA––

MCC3 192.2–192.3 3AL 95150 AB––

MCC3 192.5–192.6 3AL 95150 AC––
MCC3 192.7–192.8 3AL 95150 AD––
MCC3 193.0–193.1 3AL 95150 AE––
MCC3 193.2–193.3 3AL 95150 AF––
MCC3 193.5–193.6 3AL 95150 AG––
Enhanched
E h h d Multirate
M lti t CH MCC3 193.7–193.8 3AL 95150 AH––
19x x00 19x x00 with SFP optical
19x.x00–19x.x00 4 2 >6
2–>6 4
MCC3 194.2–194.3 3AL 95150 AJ––
modules
MCC3 194.4–194.5 3AL 95150AK––
MCC3 194.7–194.8 3AL 95150 AL––
MCC3 194.9–195.0 3AL 95150 AM––
MCC3 195.2–195.3 3AL 95150 AN––
MCC3 195.4–195.5 3AL 95150 AP––
MCC3 195.7–195.8 3AL 95150 AQ––
MCC3 195.9–196.0 3AL 95150 AR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 110 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 192.000 3AL 86834 AA––
OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 192.100 3AL 86834 AB––

OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 192.200 3AL 86834 AC––

OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 192.300 3AL 86834 AD––
OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 192.500 3AL 86834 AE––
OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 192.600 3AL 86834 AF––
OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 192.700 3AL 86834 AG––
OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 192.800 3AL 86834 AH––
OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 193.000 3AL 86834 AL––
OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 193.100 3AL 86834 AM––
OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 193.200 3AL 86834 AN––
OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 193.300 3AL 86834 AP––
OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 193.500 3AL 86834 AQ––
OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 193.600 3AL 86834 AR––
OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 193.700 3AL 86834 AS––
OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 193.800 3AL 86834 AT––
4 2 >6
2–>6 5
OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 142.200 3AL 86834 BA––
OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 194.300 3AL 86834 BB––
OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 194.400 3AL 86834 BC––
OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 194.500 3AL 86834 BD––
OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 194.700 3AL 86834 BE––
OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 194.800 3AL 86834 BF––
OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 194.900 3AL 86834 BG––
OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 195.000 3AL 86834 BH––
OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 195.200 3AL 86834 BL––
OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 195.300 3AL 86834 BM––
OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 195.400 3AL 86834 BN––
OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 195.500 3AL 86834 BP––
OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 195.700 3AL 86834 BQ––
OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 195.800 3AL 86834 BR––
OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 195.900 3AL 86834 BS––
OCC10 CH 196.000 OCC10 196.000 3AL 86834 BT––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 111 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.000 3AL 95238 AA––

OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.100 3AL 95238 AC––

OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.200 3AL 95238 AE––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.300 3AL 95238 AG––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.500 3AL 95238 AN––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.600 3AL 95238 AQ––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.700 3AL 95238 AS––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.800 3AL 95238 BA––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.000 3AL 95238 BE––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.100 3AL 95238 BG––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.200 3AL 95238 BL––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.300 3AL 95238 BN––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.500 3AL 95238 BS––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.600 3AL 95238 CA––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.700 3AL 95238 CC––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 193.800 3AL 95238 CE––
OCC10 _E
E 4 2 >6
2–>6 6
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.200 3AL 95238 CP––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.300 3AL 95238 CR––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.400 3AL 95238 CT––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.500 3AL 95238 DB––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.700 3AL 95238 DF––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.800 3AL 95238 DH––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 194.900 3AL 95238 DM––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.000 3AL 95238 DP––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.200 3AL 95238 DT––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.300 3AL 95238 EB––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.400 3AL 95238 ED––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.500 3AL 95238 EF––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.700 3AL 95238 EM––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.800 3AL 95238 EP––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 195.900 3AL 95238 ER––
OCC10 XFP APD CH 196.000 3AL 95238 ET––
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AA––
CH193.300 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AB––
CH193.000 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
OCC10_NA 3AL 95313 AC–– 4 2–>6 7
CH193.100 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95313 AD––
CH193.200 (1550)
OCC10_NO AMPLIFIED
3AL 95314 AA––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CH195.900 (1530)
OCC–10_XFP_CWDM 1530NM 8DG 81002 AA––
4 2 >6
2–>6 8
OCC–10_XFP_CWDM 1550NM 8DG 81002 AB––
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 112 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE–2X3R WLA2M 3AL 97657 AA–– 9
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE –

WLA2M_OP 3AL 97657 AB–– 10

2X3R W/ OPC 4 2–>6
2 >6
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARD–SFP WLA3CD 3AL 97795 BA–– 11
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARD–SFP–OPC WLA2CDOP 3AL 97795 BB–– 12
13,
4xANY Host w/ I–16.1 i/f 4xANY 3AL 86639 AA––
14
2 2;4
15,
4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AA––
14
16,
4xANY Host fully pluggable 4xANY_P 3AL 95063 AA–– 2 2;4
14
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM (4xANY DRAWERS)
SDH–SONET_1310
Drawer 17
4 X ANY Low speed cartridge LF_1310_2 Drawer 3AL 86674 AA–– –– –– 18
4 X ANY High speed optical car-
HF_1310 Drawer 3AL 86672 AA–– –– –– 19
tridge
4 X ANY Low speed optical car- 20,
LF_850 Drawer 3AL 86869 AA–– –– ––
tridge 14
4 X ANY High speed optical car- 21,
HF_850 Drawer 3AL 86870 AA–– –– ––
tridge 14
4 X ANY Low speed plug–in 1310 22,
3AL 81617 AA–– –– ––
(OL–I) 14
4 X ANY Electrical DV cartridge 3AL 95267 AA–– –– –– 23
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 113 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
B&W SFP MODULES

OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 S–1.1 1AB 19467 0001 ––

OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 W/DDM S–1.1DDM 1AB 19467 0004 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.1 L–1.1 1AB 19467 0002 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.2 L–1.2 1AB 19467 0003 ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 S–4.1 1AB 19636 0001 ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 DDM S–4.1DDM 1AB 19636 0004 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.1 L–4.1 1AB 19636 0003 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.2 L–4.2 1AB 19636 0002 ––
OPTO TRX SFP I–16.1 I–16.1 1AB 19637 0002 ––
OPTO TRX SFP I–16.1 DDM I–16.1DDM 1AB 19637 0005 ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 S–16.1 1AB 19637 0001 ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 DDM S–16.1DDM 1AB 19637 0006 ––
64 24
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.1 L–16.1 1AB 19637 0004 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.2 L.16.2 1AB 19637 0003 ––
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 ANYRATE
S–16–ADDM 1AB 19637 0007 ––
DDM
OPTO TRX SFP 100 BASE LX 100B LX 1AB 21471 0001 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX 1GbELX 1AB 18728 0001 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX DDM 1GbELXDDM 1AB 18728 0031 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX 1GbESX 1AB 18728 0002 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX DDM 1GbESXDDM 1AB 18728 0033 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP–ZX 1GbEZX 1AB 18728 0028 ––
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC MM DDM FC/2FCmm 1AB 18728 0037 ––
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC SM DDM FC/2FCsm 1AB 18728 0038 ––
B&W XFP MODULES
XFP I–64.1/10GBE BASE L XI641 1AB 21454 0001 ––
XFP 10GBE BASE S X10GBase–S 1AB 21454 0002 16 –– 25
XFP S–64.2B/10GBE BASE E XS642B 1AB 21728 0001 ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 114 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
CWDM SFP MODULES


26
CWDM 1470NM APD SFP CWA147 1AB19635 0001 –– ––
27
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 115 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
DWDM SFP MODULES


–– –– 28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 116 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH,


1 FC 1300nm stop gap) BASIC
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000SX, 1 FC

850nm stop gap) BASIC







29








1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 117 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
MULTIPLEXERS

1x8 Mux/Demux 300–380 + EXP +

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 3AL 86615 AA–– 30
SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300–380+EXP OMDX8100_M_L1_X 3AL 86615 AJ–– 31
3 456
4;5:6
1x8 Mux/Demux 200–280 OMDX8100_M_L2 3AL 86615 AB––
1x8 Mux/Demux 520–600 OMDX8100_M_S1 3AL 86615 AC–– 32
1x8 Mux/Demux 420–500 OMDX8100_M_S2 3AL 86615 AD––
OADM 8 CH 300–380 + SPV OADM8100_M_L1_S 3AL 86637 AA––
OADM 8 CH 200–280 + SPV OADM8100_M_L2_S 3AL 86637 AB–– 33,
3 4;5;6 34,
34
OADM 8 CH 520–600 + SPV OADM8100_M_S1_S 3AL 86637 AC–– 35
OADM 8 CH 420–500 + SPV OADM8100_M_S2_S 3AL 86637 AD––
OADM 4 CH 200–230 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S 3AL 86637 BC––
OADM 4 CH 250–280 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch25–28_S 3AL 86637 BD––
OADM 4 CH 300–330 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch30–33_S 3AL 86637 BA––
OADM 4 CH 350–380 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 3AL 86637 BB–– 36,
3 4;5;6
OADM 4 CH 420–450 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch42–45_S 3AL 86637 BG–– 34
OADM 4 CH 470–500 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch47–50_S 3AL 86637 BH––
OADM 4 CH 520–550 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch52–55_S 3AL 86637 BE––
OADM 4 CH 570–600 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S 3AL 86637 BF––
OADM2100_M_30–31_S 3AL 86778 AB––
OADM2100_M_32–33_S 3AL 86778 AC––
2 channels OADM with SPV card OADM2100_M_35–36_S 3AL 86778 AD–– 3 4;5;6
; ; 37
OADM2100_M_37–38_S 3AL 86778 AE––
OADM2100_M_47–48_S 3AL 86778 AF––
OADM1100_M_25_S 3AL 86777 AE––
OADM1100_M_30_S 3AL 86777 AJ––
OADM1100_M_31_S 3AL 86777 AK––
OADM1100_M_32_S 3AL 86777 AL––
OADM1100_M_33_S 3AL 86777 AM––
OADM1100_M_35_S 3AL 86777 AN––
1 channel OADM with SPV cards 3 4;5;6 38
OADM1100_M_36_S 3AL 86777 AP––
OADM1100_M_37_S 3AL 86777 AQ––
OADM1100_M_38_S 3AL 86777 AR––
OADM1100_M_47_S 3AL 86777 BE––
OADM1100_M_48_S 3AL 86777 BF––
OADM1100_M_57_S 3AL 86777 BN––
Supervision Filter card
SPV_F_1310_1550 3AL 86779 AA–– 2 5;6 39
(SPV_F_1310_1550)
Supervision Filter card SPV_F_C 3AL 86779 BA–– 4 8–>11 40
2F 8CH MDX2 W/ 1310 FILTER CMDX2 3AL 97654 AB–– 3 4;5;6 41
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC2 3AL 86703 AC––
2 23
2,3 42
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC2_L 3AL 86703 AD––
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 118 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
CONTROLLER
Equipment and Shelf Controller 3AL 86661 AA–– 43

ESC 1 1
ESC/2 3AL 86661 AB–– 44
FLASH CARD 80 MB MEM–DEV 1AB 15205 0001 1 1 45
SPVM + OW SPVM2 3AL 86606 AB–– 3 4;5;6 46
SPVM_H SPVM_H 3AL 86606 AC–– 3 4;5;6 47
LAN Access card LAN_Q 3AL 86653 AA–– 1 8 48
Housekeeping card HK 3AL 86668 AA–– 1 11 49
Rack Alarm Interface board RAI 3AL 87009 AA–– 1 9;10 50
I–LINK MASTER I–LINK_M 3AL 86805 AA–– 1 6
51
I–LINK_SLAVE I–LINK_S 3AL 86808 AA–– 1 1
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Optical Protection Card OPC 3AL 86708 AA–– 52
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC OPC 3AL 86708 AB–– 53
SM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AC–– 54
4 8 >11
8–>11
MM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AD–– 55
MM_OPC_850 OPC 3AL 95113 AA–– 56
OMS PROTECTION OMSP 3AL 97541 AA–– 57
POWER SUPPLY
PSC_C PSC2 3AL 86888 AA–– 2 7;12 58
Power Management Unit PMU 3AL 86825 AA––
1 – 59
Batteries for PMU 3AL 95210 AA––
Power supply BOX – 3AL 95239 AA–– – – 60
FANS
COMPACT FAN FAN_C 3AL 86802 AA–– 1 13 61
COMPACT DUST FILTER – 3AN 51151 AA–– 1 13
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
DCM–5 DCM–5 1AB 15169 0013
DCM–10 DCM–10 1AB 15169 0007
DCM–15 DCM–15 1AB 15169 0014
DCM–20 DCM–20 1AB 15169 0008
2 – 62
DCM–30 DCM–30 1AB 15169 0009
DCM–40 DCM–40 1AB 15169 0010
DCM–60 DCM–60 1AB 15169 0011
DCM–80 DCM–80 1AB 15169 0012
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 119 / 554
554
ANV Max
Part Number Q.ty
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES

Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC – 1AB 16271 0006 2 – 63

HK user cable – 3AL 95073 AA–– 1 – 64
1696MS_C ANSI install. kit – 3AL 95101 AAAA 1 – 65
Kit for C_shelf install on ETSI rack – 3AN 51124 AAAA 1 – 66
I–Link cable – 3AL 95179 AA–– 2 – 67
Cable from BOX to PSC/PSC2 – 3AL 95264 AA–– 2 – 68
SFP module extractor kit – 3AL 81728 AAAA 1 – 69
JUMPER SMF MU/MU CABLE
– 1AB 18240 0049 4 – 70
2MM 1700MM
JUMPER SMF MU/PC–MU/PC
– 1AB 18240 0004 4 –
360MM
71
JUMPER SMF MU/PC–MU/PC
– 1AB 18240 0007 4 –
450MM
KIT – OPC connection SM – 3AL 95185 AAAA 2 – 72
KIT – OPC connection MM – 3AL 95186 AAAA 2 – 73
Jumper SM MU/PC–LC/PC cable – 1AB 18240 0004 4 – 74
WLA PROTECTED KIT – 8DG 17477 AA–– 1 –
Dummy plate 4TE for PBA – 3AN 50555 AA–– 6 –
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY – 3AN 50556 AA–– 6 –
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
–
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 810 1AB 18240 0042
–
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 500 1AB 18240 0050
REMOVAL TOOL MU/PC
1AD 03860 0002 1 75
PLUG_IN ATTEN.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SOFTWARE 76
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 120 / 554
554
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes
Note Explanation
1 It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel.

2 It is a universal bidirectional multi–clock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protec-
tion, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
3 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
4 It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP modules (S–1.1,
L–1.1, L–1.2, S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2, S–16.1, I–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC...)
5 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
– any STM–64/OC–192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
6 G.709 10Gbps transponder, designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. The client interface
is a B&W XFP module (some types available), accepting the following client signals
– 9.953Gbps (STM–64/OC–192 to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
– 10.709 Gbps (NNI), future rel.
7 OCC10 board with improved optical performances (with respect to ref. 5) of non amplified transmis-
sions in order to reach 80 Km
8 CWDM version for 10Gbps line. It can be connected to the 1530nm or 1550nm port of CMDX2
9 Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical chan-
nels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
10 Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying one protected optical channel.
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
11 Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical chan-
nels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM, CWDM SFPs
12 Multi–rate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125–>2.7Gbps range) carrying one protected optical channel.
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM or CWDM SFPs
13 TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM–16/OC–48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I–16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 2–3; 4–5;..)
14 To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the 4xANY and
4xANY_S, the end of Alcatel code must be:
– 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF–850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG
– 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF–850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG
– 4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC
15 It differs from the above 4xANY boards (see point [14]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps interface: it is
S–16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S–16.1; 2 Km for I–16.1)
16 TDM concentrator with an STM–16 (I–S–L type) B&W or CWDM or DWDM aggregate optical interface,
provided by an SFP module. In the releases prior to R2.2A, it is necessary to use the 4xAny_P function-
al variant 3AL95063AB–– when the signal delivered by the 4xAny_P goes through a SDH network
17 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM–1/OC–3 and STM–4/OC–12.
If it is set as STM–1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM–4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM–1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM–4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM–4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
18 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 121 / 554
554
Note Explanation
19 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC

20 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV

Up to four low frqeuency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
21 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
Up to two high frqeuency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
22 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
23 2nd window plug–in electrical cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video signal at 270
Mbps. Up to four drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
24 STM1/4/16, GBE, FE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... B&W SFP optical modules; they can be fitted in
MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 (client side) and 4xANY_P (aggregate side, STM–16 only) boards (refer to
Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
25 10GbE B&W XFP optical modules; they can be fitted in OCC10, client side (refer to Figure 61. on
page 139 for XFP placing)
26 PIN or “Bronze” CWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, ag-
gregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
27 APD or “Silver” CWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggre-
gate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
28 DWDM SFPs (STM–16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side (refer
to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
29 BASIC SFPs are shorter–reach variants of standard GBE and CWDM SFP optical plugin modules;
they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
30 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
31 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are avail-
able in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used
32 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux
33 Allow to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250) band
34 Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX
35 SW managed in future releases
36 Allow to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
37 Allow to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
38 Allow to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels: from 47 to 57 are short band channels
39 Allow to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)
channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
40 Insert/extract the SPV channel to/from a 1310nm or 1550nm channel, allowing to supervise a CPE;
slot 8 is available in expansion shelf only
41 8–channel Mux/Demux for the 8 CWDM channels. It is also able to insert/extract the 1310nm OSC.
42 Double–stage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the channels. OAC2 provides short span transmis-
sion. OAC2_L provides long spans transmission
43 It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
44 New version of ESC recommended for greenfield deployments in R.22A and future
45 The flash card contains the equipment data base
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 122 / 554
554
Note Explanation
46 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel).
The SPVM2 board in slot 4 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX. Another SPVM2 can be installed
whether in slot #5 or #6 but not in both slots #5 and #6

47 Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
48 Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment. It is directly
connected to the manager
49 Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
50 Fitted in master and expansion shelves, it is used for monitoring the rack alarms
51 Allow the communication between the master shelf and the up to two expansion shelves, by means
of a direct connection from I–LINK_M (slot 6 of master shelf) and I–LINK_S (slot 1 of each exp. shelf)
52 Single Mode optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config) or
O–SNCP (ring) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCCs and plugged below the main one
53 Multi Mode optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. 52), it manages
the HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
54 SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. 52)
55 MM optical splitter with connectors having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref. 53)
56 MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
57 Protects the OTS (path) between two NE by selecting (switching) the incoming multiplexed signal
58 PSC2 is an evolution of the PSC card for the compact shelf but supply less power. It works in “1+1”
protection meaning that only one board is active at once; it can be plugged both in master and slave
shelves
59 External module transforming the alternative 110/230V voltage into a –48V continuous wave, thus al-
lowing a 1696MS_C to be plugged directly to a power supply (avoiding the usage of a telecom rack
for feeding)
60 For power distribution; it is used only in table version
61 FAN module for compact shelf. It is equipped with two fans; an anti–dust filter has to be put on the
left side of the fans
62 Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in
the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be
placed either in the inter–stage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One
DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the 1696 channels
63 To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
64 Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
65 Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ANSI rack; it includes power supply cable, alarm PDU cable...
66 Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ETSI rack; it includes power supply cable, RAI–TRU cable...
67 Used to connect I–link_M (in master shelf) with I–Link_S (one per each slave shelf)
68 Power supply cable used only in table version. It has to be connected between the BOX and the pow-
er supply card (input power connector)
69 Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
70 Used to connect each other boards located in different shelves; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
71 Used to connect each other boards located in the same shelf; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
72 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 123 / 554
554
Note Explanation
73 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).

74 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1

protection. 4 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 8 (4 + 4) 4xANY drawers in two 4xANY
75 Used to remove the opto attenuator plug–in
76 Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operator’s Handbook
2.3.3.2 FAN_C board
A particular board adapted for the compact shelf is available. It also enables to manage the Power Monitor-
ing Unit to feed the shelf with the alternative mains supply.
Figure 49. Fan_C board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 124 / 554
554
2.4 Equipment connections
The external connections of the 1696MSPAN may fall into to following categories:
– optical
– management
– maintenance
– power supply
– user interfaces
All the equipment connection are detailed in the Installation Handbook.
Next paragraph 2.5 on page 129 presents the front view of all the cards, where the connection points can
be identified.
In the following some general indication and reference to the relevant front view are given.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 125 / 554
554
2.4.1 Optical connections
2.4.1.1 Optical connections made with simple MU connectors
See Figure 50. The optical connections are made with simple MU connectors on:

– MCC1 and MCC2 boards, see Figure 52. on page 130
– MCC3 board WDM side, see Figure 53. on page 131
– OPC boards, see Figure 82. on page 160
– SPV–M boards, see Figure 73. on page 151 and Figure 74. on page 152
– MVAC board, see Figure 59. on page 137.
– OMSP board, see Figure 83. on page 161.
Figure 50. Simple MU optical connector
2.4.1.2 Optical connections made with double MU connectors
See Figure 51. The optical connections are made with double MU connectors on:
– OMDX and OADM boards, see para. 2.5.2 from page 140 to page 145Figure 70.
– CMDX2 board, see Figure 70. to page 148
– OAC boards, see Figure 71. on page 149
– OCC10 and OCC10_NA boards, see Figure 54. on page 132
– OCC10_E board WDM side, see Figure 55. on page 133
– SPV_F boards, see Figure 68. on page 146 and Figure 69. on page 147
– OSMC board, see Figure 75. on page 153.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 126 / 554
554
Figure 51. Double MU optical connector
2.4.1.3 Optical connections made with LC connectors
The optical connections are made with LC connectors on:
– 4xANY_P board client side, see Figure 58. on page 136
– all the SFP modules (B&W, CWDM, DWDM, refer to Figure 60. on page 138), plugged on
• 4xANY_P aggregate side, see Figure 58. on page 136
• MCC3 client side, see Figure 53. on page 131
• WLA2 boards (CWLA2M and CWLA2M_OP) both on client and WDM sides, see Figure 56. on
page 134 and Figure 57. on page 135; only LC/PC connectors must be used, LC/APC connectors
must not be plugged in WLA2 boards
• WLA3 boards (CWLA3CD and CWLA3CDOP) both on client and WDM sides, see Figure 56.
on page 134 and Figure 57. on page 135
– all the XFP modules (B&W, refer to Figure 61. on page 139), plugged on
• OCC10_E client side, see Figure 55. on page 133.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 127 / 554
554
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections
2.4.2.1 Housekeeping
The housekeeping alarm signal are available on the front panel connector of the HK board. It is a 25 pin

SUB–D Female connector.
Note: 25 pin SUB–D connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screw’s holes called pin 26 and pin 27.
See Figure 79. on page 157.
2.4.2.2 Rack Alarm Interfaces
The rack alarm interface signals are available on the two front panel connectors of the RAI board. These
two interfaces are:
– A 9 pins SUB–D female connector, which provides the interface between the master shelf and the
TRU (or PDU),
– A 6 pins RJ11 connector, which provides the interface between two shelves.
2.4.2.3 LAN accesses
The LAN board provides LAN accesses on both RJ–45 and BNC connectors.
* LAN access code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installations in slot 27.
Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in master slot 26.
2.4.2.4 “Q3” Interface
At the ESC front panel, a 9–pin SUB–D female connector provides an access to an ”Q3” interface. It allows
to connect a Craft Terminal.
2.4.2.5 1696MS_C Intershelf link
The 15–pin SUB–D female connector, located on the front panel of the I–link_M and I–link_S boards, al-
lows to link the SPI bus and the card presence signal from slave to master 1696MS_C shelves.
2.4.2.6 “DBG” Interface Connector
8–pin RJ45 connectors at the front–panel of the ESC board, are used for the “DBG” interface (factory
tests).
2.4.3 Power supply connections
Power supply voltage is distributed to the shelves on a 3 pin SUB–D connector, in front panel of each PSC.
It is also available on the M1 and M2 connectors of the Power Monitoring Unit.
2.4.4 User interfaces
The user interfaces are available on the front panel connector of the UIC(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
52 pin SCSI–2 Female connector of the UIC.

Note: 50 pin SUB–D connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screw’s holes called pin 51 and pin 52.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 128 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
2.5 Units front view
together with legenda and meaning.
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
The following paragraphs show the units front views and the relevant access points (Leds, switches etc.)
129 / 554
2.5.1 Tributaries front view
3AL86603XX
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C
Extraction
SLOTS SLOTS

handle

4;5;6;7;
MCC1
8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6 Power failure LED
14;15;16;17;
MCC2 Out Of Service LED
18;19;20;21 Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
Access points description APSD restart

Name Meaning push–button
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of

Green led hardware failure (HWF)
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by
Yellow led the software
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the User Rx
configuration. The LED is ON when
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Rx alarm
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the User Tx
1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shut–down of the WDM Tx
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Rx
– green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Green /
– yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow /
– red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
Red led
(OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
WDM Tx
User Rx – User Reception: client input signal (from client)
User Tx – User Transmission: client output signal (to client)
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM
WDM Tx – WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to
OMDX/OADM
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led Optical safety
on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while label
this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and
may have to be returned for factory repair.
Extraction handle
N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the
card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. MCC1 and MCC2 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 130 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
3AL95150AX
ACRONYM SLOTS SLOTS Extraction
handle
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
MCC3 2; 3; 4; 5; 6
14;15;16;17; Power failure LED
Out Of Service LED
18;19;20;21 Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
Access points description
APSD restart
Name Meaning
push–button
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of
Green led hardware failure (HWF)
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Rx alarm User Tx (SFP)**
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the User Rx (SFP)**
1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shut–down of the WDM Tx
Hardware failure. The LED is
– green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Green / – yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow / – red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure WDM Rx
Red led (OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
User Tx – User Transmission: client output signal (to client)*
User Rx – User Reception: client input signal (from client)*
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM WDM Tx
OMDX/OADM
N.B. * Never unplug a board while this is on firmware download state.

Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be
returned for factory repair.
Optical safety
label
N.B. ** User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with
Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules, shown in
Figure 60. on page 138
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 53. MCC3 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 131 / 554
554
3AL86834XX
SLOTS SLOTS Extraction
4;5;6;7; handle

OCC10 8;9;10;11

OCC10_NA 14;15;16;17; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6
Power failure Led
18;19;20;21 Out Of Service Led
Abnormal Rx Led
Access points description Abnormal Tx Led
Hardware failure
Name Meaning Led
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is APSD restart
Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF) push–button
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW. User Rx
The LED is ON when User Tx
Yellow led – (LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX
– DEG_OUT_User_TX WDM Rx
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown” WDM Tx
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW.

The LED is ON when SD or
– (LOS_User_RX
Yellow led
– (LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown”
Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is
– green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure
Green /
Yellow /
Red led
(OR on the power supply alarms) 10Gbps Rx
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from

OMDX/OADM 10Gbps Tx
OMDX/OADM
10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only
2.5Gb back panel is present
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure Optical safety
led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a label
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA Extraction
handle
LEDs are always turned OFF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging/unplug-

ging an OCC10 / OCC10_NA card
Figure 54. OCC10 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 132 / 554
554
4;5;6;7; handle
OCC10_E 8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
OCC10_XFP_CWDM 14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21 Power failure Led
Out Of Service Led
Abnormal Rx Led
Access points description Abnormal Tx Led
Name Meaning Hardware failure
Led
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is APSD restart
Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF) push–button
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW.
The LED is ON when
Yellow led – (LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX
– DEG_OUT_User_TX
– XFP absent User Tx (XFP)**
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown”
User Rx (XFP)**
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW.
The LED is ON when SD or
– LOS_User_RX
Yellow led
– (LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX
– XFP absent
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown” WDM Rx
Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is WDM Tx
– green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure
Green /
Yellow /
Red led 10Gbps Rx
(OR on the power supply alarms)
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from
OMDX/OADM
10Gbps Tx
OMDX/OADM
10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only
2.5Gb back panel is present
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure

led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a Optical safety
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board label
** User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with
Extraction
XFP optical modules, shown in Figure 61. on page 139
handle
*** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA
LEDs are always turned OFF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging/unplug-

ging an OCC10_E / OCC10_E_C card
Figure 55. OCC10_E front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 133 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
4;5;6;7; Extraction
handle
WLA2M 8;9;10;11

2; 3; 4; 5; 6

WLA3CD 14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21
Power failure Led
Access points description Out Of Service Led
CH1 Abnormal Led
Name Meaning CH2 Abnormal Led
Managed by hardware. The led is ON when the board is Hardware failure
plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF). (SPI) Led
Green led
It is OFF when one of the local power supply is in failure
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured
Yellow led by the software
Led ON means problem on channel 1, such as TX_FAULT
Yellow led or CDR_UNLOCK
Led ON means problem on channel 2, such as TX_FAULT
The led is GREEN when the board is properly equipped,
provisioned and In–service.
Green / It is RED before software configuring is finished and be-
Red led comes GREEN when the card configuring is finished
CH2 WDM Transmission – CH2 WDM output signal, to

OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
WDM Tx CH2**
CH2 WDM Reception – CH2 WDM input signal from WDM Rx CH2**
OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
CH1 WDM Transmission – CH1 WDM output signal, to

OMDX, OADM or CMDX2 WDM Tx CH1**
WDM Rx CH1**
CH1 WDM Reception – CH1 WDM input signal from
OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
User Tx CH2**
CH2 User Transmission – CH2 B&W output signal, to client User Rx CH2 **
CH2 User Reception – CH2 B&W input signal, from cli-

User Tx CH1**
ent
User Rx CH1 **
CH1 User Transmission – CH1 B&W output signal, to client
Optical safety
CH1 User Reception – CH1 B&W input signal, from client label
N.B. * WLA3CD only. Never unplug a board while this is on firm-

Extraction
ware download state. Should this occur, the board will not handle
restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. ** All the WDM and User access points have to be equipped
with SFP optical modules, shown in Figure 60. on page 138
Figure 56. CWLA2M and CWLA3CD front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 134 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
4;5;6;7; Extraction
handle
WLA2M_OP 8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
WLA3CD_OP 14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21 Power failure Led
Out Of Service Led
CH1 Abnormal Led
Name Meaning CH2 Abnormal Led
Managed by hardware. The led is ON when the board is Hardware failure
(SPI) Led
Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF).
It is OFF when one of the local power supply is in failure
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured
Yellow led by the software COUP OUT
Led ON means problem on channel 1, such as TX_FAULT SPLIT IN
Led ON means problem on channel 2, such as TX_FAULT SPLIT OUT CH2
The led is GREEN when the board is properly equipped, COUP IN CH2
provisioned and In–service.
Green / It is RED before software configuring is finished and be-
Red led comes GREEN when the card configuring is finished SPLIT OUT CH1
COUP IN CH1
Coupler output – B&W output signal to client
WDM Tx CH2*
Splitter input – B&W input signal from client WDM Rx CH2*
CH2 and CH1 splitter output signal, to User (B&W)

RxCH2 and User RxCH1
WDM Tx CH1*
CH2 and CH1 coupler input signal, from User (B&W) WDM Rx CH1*
TxCH2 and User TxCH1
CH1 and CH2 WDM Transmission – WDM output sig- User Tx CH2*
nals, to OMDX, OADM or CMDX2 User Rx CH2 *
CH1 and CH2 WDM Reception – WDM input signals

from OMDX, OADM or CMDX2 User Tx CH1*
User Rx CH1 *
CH2 and CH1 User Transmission – B&W output signals, to
client
Optical safety
CH2 and CH1 User Reception – B&W input signals, from label
client
N.B. * WLA3CDOP only. Never unplug a board while this is on

Extraction
firmware download state. Should this occur, the board will handle
not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
N.B. * All the WDM and User access points have to be equipped with
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SFP optical modules, shown in Figure 60. on page 138
Figure 57. CWLA2M_OP and CWLA3CDOP front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 135 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C Extraction
ACRONYM handle
SLOTS SLOTS
4 X ANY 2–3; 4–5; 6–7;

8–9; 10–11; 2–3; Drawer 3
Power presence LED
4 X ANY_S 12–13; 14–15; Out Of Service LED
Power
4–5 presence
16–17; 18–19; Abnormal reception LED LED
4 X ANY_P Abnormal transmission LED
20–21; 22–23
Hardware failure LED
Tx Client
Drawer 1 Rx signal
3
Power presence LED

Name Meaning
PWR Managed by hardware. It is ON when the board is Client Tx
Green led plugged and no power failure detected signal Rx Drawer 4
1 Power
OOS This led is ON when the board is plugged but not con-
presence
Yellow led figured by the software LED
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. ON means
RXA
– SD drawers
Yellow
– ILOS on STM–16 side.
led
Managed by software Tx Client
TXA Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. ON means Drawer 2 Rx signal
Yellow – ILOS on drawer side. 4
Power
led Managed by software. presence
LED
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, configured and
Yellow / without failure
Red led – Yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware
download state* Client Tx
signal Rx
– Red when one of the On Board power supply 2
(OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware fail- Tx STM16
aggregate
ure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug Rxsignal **
a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
LASER PRODUCT
HAZARD LEVEL 1
** On 4xANY_P only, the aggregate(WDM interface is a B&W

(STM–16) or CWDM or DWDM SFP optical module (refer to
3ALXXXXX X
Figure 60. on page 138)

N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplug- Extraction
ging the drawers or the 4xANY host card. handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 58. 4xANY front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 136 / 554
554
3AL86892AA
handle
4;5;6;7;8;9
10;11;12;13
MVAC Not used

14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21

Name Meaning VOA1 input
PWR Power and hardware failure led. It is

Green/Red – Green when the board is plugged, configured and without
led failure
– Red when the card is plugged and in hardware failure VOA1 output
In1 Input signals (cable connection 1 and 2) to be adjusted by
In2 the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
Out1 Output signals (cable connection 1 and 2) adjusted/optimized
Out2 by the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
VOA2 input
VOA2 output
Extraction
handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. MVAC front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 137 / 554
554
ACRONYM EQUIPPED ON PORT
4xANY_P (Aggregate side)

B&W STM–16 SFP: S–16.1DDM; I–16.1DDM MCC3 (Client side)

S–16–ADDM WLA2M(_OP) (WDM side)
WLA3CD(_OP) (WDM side)
B&W STM16 SFP: L–16.1; L–16.2
B&W STM–1 SFP: S–1.1DDM

L–1.1; L–1.2
MCC3 (client side)
B&W STM–4 SFP: S–4.1DDM
L–4.1; L–4.2 WLA2M(_OP) (WDM side)
B&W FE SFP: 100B LX WLA3CD(_OP) (WDM side)
B&W GbE SFP: 1GbELXDDM

1GbESXDDM; 1GbEZX
B&W FC SFP : FC/2FCmm; FC/2FCsm
4xANY_P (Aggregate side)

CWDM SFP:
MCC3 (Client side)
CWA147 –> CWA161
WLA2M(_OP) (WDM side)
CWP147 –> CWP161
WLA3CD(_OP) (WDM side)
DWDM SFP: 4xANY_P (Aggregate side)

DWA600 –> DWA200 WLA3CD(_OP) (WDM side)
SFP optical module
OUTPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
Optical cables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 60. SFP optical module
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 138 / 554
554
ACRONYM EQUIPPED ON PORT
B&W STM–64 / 10GbE SFP:

XS642; XI641
OCC10_E (client side)

OCC10_XFP_CWDM (client side)
B&W 10GbE SFP:
X10GBASE–S
XFP optical module
Output signal
Input signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 61. XFP optical module
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 139 / 554
554
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view
3AL86615XX
1696MS SLOTS 1696MS_C
ACRONYM Extraction

Master Expansion SLOTS handle

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS HardWare
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3;
(shown in figure) Failure LED
4,5,6
OMDX8100_M_L1_X 12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
Monitoring Monitor Tx out

Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out
Name Meaning
Line Rx in
Ch#38
WDM Tx in
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Rx out
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) WDM Tx in
37
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement de-
Tx out vice)
WDM Tx in
36
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement de- WDM Rx out
Rx out vice)
WDM Tx in
35
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Rx out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line)
WDM Tx in
33
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transpond- Access- WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
er (Ch. 30 38) channels
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder WDM Tx in
32
WDM Rx out
out (Ch. 30 38)
Extra Tx Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) WDM Tx in
31
in WDM Rx out
Extra Rx Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
WDM Tx in 30
out WDM Rx out
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) Extra Extra Tx in
channels Extra Rx out
SB Tx in Short Band transmission channels input (from other Mux/Demux)
SPV Tx in
SB Rx out Short Band reception channels output (to other Mux/Demux) Supervision S
SPV Rx out
N.B. The OMDX8100_M_L1_X board is not provided with Expansion SB Tx in

EX
the Supervision (SPV Tx in / out) access points SB Rx out
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 62. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 140 / 554
554
1696MS SLOTS
3AL86615XX
ACRONYM 1696MS_C Extraction
OMDX8100_M_L2
HardWare
(shown in figure)
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3; Failure LED
OMDX8100_M_S2 4, 5, 6
12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
OMDX8100_M_S1
Line Tx out
Line
Line Rx in
Ch#28
WDM Tx in
Access points description WDM Rx out
Name Meaning WDM Tx in
27
WDM Rx out
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Tx in
26
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in WDM Rx out
failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
WDM Tx in
Access-
25
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line or other Mux/Demux) WDM Rx out
channels
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line or other Mux/Demux)
WDM Tx in
23
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
(Ch. 2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder (Ch. WDM Tx in
22
WDM Rx out
out 2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
Extra Tx Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) WDM Tx in
21
in WDM Rx out
Extra Rx Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
WDM Tx in
20
out WDM Rx out
Extra Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OMDX8100_M_S2 and S1 boards, except for the set of channels,
i.e. Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. The set of channels is printed on the front
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 63. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 141 / 554
554
1696MS SLOTS
3AL86637AX
ACRONYM 1696MS_C
Master Expansion SLOTS Extraction
handle
OADM8100_M_L1_S

(shown in figure) HardWare

Failure LED
OADM8100_M_L2_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3;
4, 5, 6
12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
OADM8100_M_S1_S
OADM8100_M_S2_S Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out

Line Rx in
Ch#38
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Access points description WDM Tx in
37
Name Meaning WDM Rx out
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Tx in
36
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
35
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement de- Channels
Tx out vice) accesses WDM Tx in
33
WDM Rx out
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement de-
Rx out vice) WDM Tx in
32
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Rx out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line) WDM Tx in
31
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding trans- WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in ponder: ch. 30 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250
WDM Tx in
30
(S2), ch. 5260 (S1) WDM Rx out
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder:
out ch. 30 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250 (S2), ch. Extra Extra Tx in
5260 (S1) channels Extra Rx out
Extra Tx Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/Demux SPV Tx in
Supervision S
in board) SPV Rx out
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/Demux
out board) Unused
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) Unused
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)

Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OADM8100_M_L2/S2/S1_S boards, except for the set of channel, i.e. Ch.
20 to 28 for L2 band, Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. Four different boards are so available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 64. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 142 / 554
554
1696MS SLOTS
3AL86637BA
ACRONYM 1696MS_C Extraction
OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S HardWare
OADM4100_M_ch25–28_S Failure LED

OADM4100_M_ch30–33_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3;
(shown in figure)
4, 5, 6
OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
OADM4100_M_ch42–45_S
OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S Monitoring
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line Tx out
Line Line Rx in
Ch#33
WDM Tx in
Name Meaning WDM Rx out
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Tx in
32
– Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Rx out
Green / Channels
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in accesses
WDM Tx in
31
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Tx out ment device) WDM Tx in
30
WDM Rx out
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure- Extra or
Rx out ment device) pass– Extra Tx in
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) through Extra Rx out
channels
Supervision SPV Tx in S
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding trans-

SPV Rx out
ponder: ch. 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245;
Unused
4750; 5255; 5760
Unused
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder:
out ch. 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245; 4750;
5255; 5760
Extra Tx Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
in mux board)
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De-
out mux board)
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) Optical safety label
Extraction handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM4100_M_chXX–YY_S four channels boards, except for the set
of channels: eight sets of 4 channels are available for this board type; eight different boards are so available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 65. OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 143 / 554
554
3AL86778XX
ACRONYM
handle
OADM2100_M_30_31_S

(shown in figure) HardWare

Failure LED
OADM2100_M_32_33_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3;
OADM2100_M_35_36_S 4, 5, 6
12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
OADM2100_M_37_38_S
OADM2100_M_47_48_S Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out

Line Rx in
Ch#30
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Ch #1
Access points description Channel

accesses
Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) WDM Tx in
31
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure- Ch #2
Tx out ment device)
SPV Tx in S
Supervision
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure- SPV Rx out
Rx out ment device)
Extra Extra Tx in
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line)
Unused
Unused
ponder: ch. 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding trans-
out ponder: ch. 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
Extra Tx in Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
mux board)
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De-
out mux board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM2100_M_chxx_yy_S two channels boards, except for the set
of channels: five sets of 2 channels are available for this board type; five different boards are so available.
The set of channels is print on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 66. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 144 / 554
554
1696MS SLOTS
3AL86777XX
ACRONYM 1696MS_C
handle
OADM1100_M_25_S
HardWare
OADM1100_M_30_S
Failure LED
OADM1100_M_31_S
OADM1100_M_32_S
OADM1100_M_33_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3; Monitoring Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
OADM1100_M_35_S 4, 5, 6
12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22 Line Tx out
OADM1100_M_36_S Line
Line Rx in
OADM1100_M_37_S
Channel
Ch# xx
Add WDM Tx in
OADM1100_M_38_S access Drop WDM Rx out
OADM1100_M_47_S
OADM1100_M_48_S
OADM1100_M_50_S

Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure SPV Tx in
Supervision S
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in SPV Rx out
Extra Extra Tx in
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Tx out ment device)
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Rx out ment device)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line)

ponder: ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transpond-
out er: ch. ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
Extra Tx in Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
mux board)
Optical safety
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De- label
out mux board)
Extraction
handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM1100_M_xx_S one channel boards, except for the channel:
12 different channels are available for this board type and then twelve different boards are available.The
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
number of the channel is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 67. OADM1100_M_xx_S front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 145 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
3AL86779AA
ACRONYM Extraction
SLOTS SLOTS
handle
2; 3; 12

SPV_F_1310_1550 5; 6 HardWare

13; 22 Failure LED

Monitor Rx out
Common Line Tx out

Access points description Line Line Rx in
Name Meaning Mux In
1310
1310
Dmux out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement
Tx out device)
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement
Rx out device) Mux In
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line) 1550 Dmux out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line) SPV Tx in
Mux in Input 1310 nm signal Supervision S
SPV Rx out
Dmux out Output reception 1310 nm signal
Mux in Input 1550 nm signal
Dmux out Output reception 1550 nm signal
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 68. SPV_F_1310_1550 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 146 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS
ACRONYM Master Expansion
SLOTS
28 35 8; 9;
SPV_F_C 9; 10; 11
38 45 10; 11
HardWare
Failure LED
Extra Tx in
Extra
SPV Tx in
Supervision S
SPV Rx out
Tx input
Client access
Rx output
3AL86779BAXX

Name Meaning
Extra In Input extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Extra Out Output extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line)
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line)
Figure 69. SPV_F_C front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 147 / 554
554
ACRONYM
Master Expansion SLOTS
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 2; 3; Extraction

CMDX2 4,5,6 handle

12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
Hardware failure Led
Access points description Optical safety label

Name Meaning
The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
without failure
The LED is RED in case of SW reset or HW failure Supervi- SPV IN (ADD)
sion SPV OUT
1310nm supervision input signal, from SPVM board (OSC ADD) (DROP)
LINE RX IN
1310nm supervision output signal, to SPVM board (OSC DROP) Line LINE TX OUT
Line Reception input signal (DEMUX IN, from line)

CH1 INPUT
CH1 OUTPUT
Line Transmission output signal (MUX OUT, to line)
Above connector: CH1 input. 1470nm WDM input signal, from CH2 INPUT
CH2 OUTPUT
corresponding transponder
Below connector: CH1 output. 1470nm WDM output signal, to CH3 INPUT
corresponding transponder CH3 OUTPUT
Above connector: CH2 input to CH8 input. 1490nm to 1610 nm WDM CH4 INPUT
CH4 OUTPUT
WDM input signal, from corresponding transponder access-
channels CH5 INPUT
TO CH5 OUTPUT
Below connector: CH1 output to CH8 output. 1490nm to

CH6 INPUT
1610nm WDM output signal, to corresponding transponder
CH6 OUTPUT
CH7 INPUT
CH7 OUTPUT
CH8 INPUT
CH8 OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 70. CMDX2 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 148 / 554
554
2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view

ACRONYM Master Expans SLOTS Extraction
handle
OAC1
4; 5; 4; 5;
L_OAC1 Power ON LED
12; 13; 12; 13; 2,3** Out Of Service LED
OAC2 20; 21; Abnormal input signal alarm LED
20; 21 22; 23* APSD status LED
L_OAC2
Reset push–button

Name Meaning
PW Power led managed by HW. It is ON when Stage 1 Mon. Rx (IN)
Green led the board is plugged and without HWF monitoring Mon. Tx (OUT)
OOS Managed by SW. It is ON when the board is

Yellow led plugged but not configured by the SW
Abnormal input signal alarm. Caused by Stage 2 Mon. Rx (IN)
ABN 1) 1st stage input optical signal level has de- monitoring Mon. Tx (OUT)
Yellow led creased below the input signal loss threshold Removable
2) Output safety shutdown ot the 2nd stage. cover
Managed by SW
APSD Managed by SW. The LED is Input
Yellow – OFF when APSD enable Stage 1 Output
led *** – ON when APSD disable forced ON or OFF
Input
Hardware failure led, managed by SW. It is Stage 2 Output
HWF – Green when the board is plugged, configu
Green / red and without failure Input
VOA
Yellow / – yellow when the board is in firmware down Output
Red led load state****

Input Optical
– Red when Supervision safety
Output
a) one of the On Board power supply is in label
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Input

Extra pump
b) C_TYPE alarm is raised Unused
Unused
N.B. * Slots 22 and 23 are available in compact shelf only Unused
** Only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be equipped in compact shelf
*** The LED is always ON because the APSD enable mode is
not supported
**** When the board is on firmware download state, the hard-
ware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never
unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur,
3AL86703AX
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair. Only OAC2 and OAC2_L support FW download
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 71. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 149 / 554
554
2.5.4 Controller front view
3AL 86661AAXX
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C Extraction
SLOTS SLOTS

handle

ESC 1 (master
ESC_2 1 shelf only)
URG Urgent Alarm LED
NRG Not Urgent alarm LED
ATD Attended alarm LED
ABN
Abnormal Condition LED
IND Indicative alarm LED
SC Shelf Controller LED

Access points description STATUS
Name Meaning EC Equipment Controller LED

URG Urgent Alarm (major or critical)
Red led
NRG Not Urgent Alarm (minor)
ACO Alarm Cut Off push button
Red led
ATD Attended Alarm: acknowledged URG or NURG LAT Lamp Test push button*
Yellow led alarm (alarm storing)
ABN Abnormal condition
Yellow led RST RESET push button
IND Indicative Alarm (warning)
Yellow led
EC Green led means communication OK between EC/SC Craft
Green / Red led means no communication between EC/SC

Red / but SC is started ”F” Interface for CT connection
Yellow led Yellow led means start time SUB–D 9 pins connector
SC Green led means SC started
Green/Red Red led means SC default
/Yellow led Yellow led means start time
”DBG” Interface
RJ45 connector
”DBG” Interface
RJ45 connector
NB:*LAT button lights up all leds of the NE except for the ESC ones. Extraction
When pressing RST button, EC & SC LEDs status doesn’t change handle
When SC is restarted, the EC led is red and the SC led is green.
When the communication between EC & SC is re–established, both EC & SC LEDs are green
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 72. ESC front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 150 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
ACRONYM
SLOTS* SLOTS* Extraction handle
2; 16; 18;
SPVM2 4; 5; 6
20; 22; 23
Power ON LED
* Master shelf only Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
HardWare Failure LED
J1: Speech channel

handset connector
Access points description Board reset push button
Name Meaning
Line pick up push button
PWR PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and
Green led without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Rx1 input
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
OSC 1
VL Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel
Yellow led is vacant
Hardware failure. The LED is Tx1 output
Yellow / – Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
RX1 input OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM Rx2 input
TX1 input OSC1 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM
OSC 2
RX2 input OSC2 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM
J1 Speech channel handset connection Tx2 output
Optical safety label
Speech channel number

coding wheels
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hard-

ware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour.
Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should
3AL86606AB
this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be
returned for factory repair.
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 73. SPVM2 front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 151 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
ACRONYM
SLOTS* SLOTS* Extraction handle
SPVM_H 2; 16; 18;

4; 5; 6

20; 22; 23
Power ON LED
* Master shelf only Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
J1: Speech channel

handset connector
Access points description Board reset push button
Name Meaning
Line pick up push button
PWR PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and
Green led without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Rx1 input
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
VL Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel OSC 1
Yellow led is vacant
Hardware failure. The LED is Tx1 output
Yellow / – Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
RX1 input OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM
J Speech channel handset connection
N.B. * When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware Optical safety label
failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never un-
plug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, Speech channel number
coding wheel
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair.
3AL86606AC
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 74. SPVM_H front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 152 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
2; 12;
OSMC Not used

13; 23
Out Of Service LED
Power ON LED
Inputs power
Access points description monitoring
Name Meaning
The led is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured
Green/ and without Hardware failure (HWF).
Red led It is RED when the board is plugged and in HWF.
This led is ON when a firmware download is being per-

Yellow led formed
.... Input power monitoring points giving the possibility to check Inputs power
the power in 8 different locations per each channel monitoring
N.B. When the board is on firmware download state, the OOS Led
on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the
board will not restart and may have to be returned for fac-
tory repair
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 75. OSMC front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 153 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS

I–Link_M Not used 6 (master

shelf only)
EXP. shelves 1, 2,
3, CONNECTION
STATUS LEDs
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED
SUB–D15P, to be
connected to ex-
pansion shelf 1

Name Meaning
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 1 is
Orange led established
SUB–D15P, to be
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 2 is connected to ex-
Orange led established pansion shelf 2
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 3 is
Orange led established (only 2 slave shelves allowed in current rel.)
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly
Orange led powered
Hardware failure led. It is
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
Green/Red
without failure
led SUB–D15P, to be
– RED when software reset is being performed
connected to ex-
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 1
pansion shelf 3
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 2 (not used in cur-
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 3 rent rel.)
(not used in current release)
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 76. I–Link_M front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 154 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
1 (slave
I–Link_S Not used

shelf only) NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED

Name Meaning
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly

Orange led powered SUB–D15P, to be
Hardware failure led. It is connected to the
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and 1696MS_C mas-
Green/Red ter shelf
without failure
led
– RED when software reset is being performed
Connection point with 1696MS_C master shelf
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 77. I–Link_S front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 155 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
LAC (LAN_Q) 26 8

LAC (LAN_I) 27 –
HardWare
Failure LED
RJ45
connector
NMS / INTRA–SHELF
connections
BNC
connectors

Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
(OR on the power supply alarms)
– in master shelf, slot 26, or in compact shelf, slot 8 (LAN_Q), these connec-
RJ45 and tors provide the physical access (Q3 interf.) to connect an external supervi-
BNC con- sion equipment (1353..). Slot 26 is linked to the ESC board via backpanel link
nectors – a second board can be plugged in master shelf, slot 27 (LAN_I), to allow
the intra–shelf communication via a cascade (BNC) or HUB (RJ45) link with
the same connector of the LAN_I board, slot 27, of each expansion shelf.
If a cable is fitted in RJ45 conn., BNC is unavailable and viceversa
Figure 78. LAN boards front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 156 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
ACRONYM
SLOTS* SLOTS*
HK 36 11
* Master shelf only
HardWare
Failure LED
25 pins SUB–D female connector for house-

keeping alarms (8 inputs and 8 outputs)

Name Meaning
Figure 79. Housekeeping front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 157 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
RAI 37 9; 10

HardWare
Failure LED
9 pins SUB–D female

connector (to PDU/TRU)
RACK ALARMS
RJ11, 6 pins connector (to

the 9 pins SUB–D female
connector of the shelf below)

Name Meaning
9 pins SUB–D fe- Used to connect the RAI card of the master shelf with the
male connector PDU/TRU
RJ11 6 pins Used for intra–shelf communication. It has to be connected to
connector the 9–pin connector of the slave shelf below. Only for 1696MS
Figure 80. RAI front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 158 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS_C
ACRONYM
SLOTS* SLOTS*
UIC 46; 47 –
* Master shelf only
HardWare
Failure LED
52 pins SCSI–2
female connector

Name Meaning
Red led – Red when the board is in hardware failure
Figure 81. UIC front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 159 / 554
554
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view

ACRONYM
SLOTS Master Expansion

OPC 28 35 9, 10, 11 8; 9; 10; 11
38 45
SM & MM OPC SM & MM OPC

with connectors with jumpers
3AL86708AC HardWare Failure LED* 3AL86708AA
3AL86708AD 3AL86708AB
3AL95113AA
channel 1 Tx Input
To (Rx OUT) /
Tx input (Tx1IN)
channel 2 Tx Input From (Tx IN) channel1 Rx output (Rx1OUT)
transponders
channel 1 Rx Output or 4xANY Tx input (Tx2IN)
drawers channel2 Rx output (Rx2OUT)
channel 2 Rx Output
To (Tx Out) / Tx output
From (Rx IN)

Tx output To (Tx Out) / Client Rx input
From (Rx IN)
Rx input Client

Name Meaning
Hardware failure. The LED is *
Red led – Red when the board is in hardware failure
N.B. * The hardware failure led is not managed/provided on the SM optical splitter with jumpers
(P/N3AL 86708 AA––)
Figure 82. OPC front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 160 / 554
554
ACRONYM
SLOTS Master Expansion
OMSP 28 35 9, 10, 11 8; 9; 10; 11
38 45
HardWare Failure LED*
Line 1 IN – CWDM line input signal 1 (from line)
Line 2 IN – CWDM line input signal 2 (from line)
Line 1 OUT – CWDM line output signal 1 (to line)
Line 2 OUT – CWDM line output signal 1 (to line)
TX OUT – selected optical signal output (to DEMUX)

RX IN – protected optical signal input (from MUX)

Name Meaning
The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged,
Green / configured and without failure
Red led The LED is RED in case of SW reset or HW failure
Figure 83. OMSP front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 161 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
PSC 25, 48

PSC2 7, 12 (master/exp shelves)
PSC3 25, 48
1 (male) + VBATT
3–pin SUB–D
2 (female) GND
connector
3 (male) – VBATT

Name Meaning
Green / – GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Red led – RED when the board is in failure or the power supply cable is not
connected
Figure 84. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 162 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
PMU Placed below the 1696MS_C
Not used
master shelf
CONTROL UNIT
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 1) 2) 7)
in1 in2 OUT OUT
IN OUT
3) 3) 4) 5) 6)
3)
Two different solutions are provided 7) 1) 2)
OUT OUT
in1 F
A IN OUT
in2 N
5) 4) 3) 6)

Name Meaning
1) GREEN/ MAJOR alarm. The LED is
RED LED – GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
– RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
• both rectifiers aremissing or both rectifiers input voltage < 85V rms
• both rectifiers output voltage <38V or >60V
• both fans from PMU case 1 failed (OR fan from PMU case 2 failed)
• both rectifiers temperature >55 C or output current < 12A
2) GREEN/ MINOR alarm. The LED is
RED LED – GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
– RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
• one rectifier is missing or one rectifier input voltage < 85V rms
• one rectifier output voltage <38V or >60V
• one FAN from PMU case 1 failed or one rectifier temperature >55 C
• battery present but battery breaker open
3) GREEN/ BATTERY CONNECTED. The LED is RED if battery connection is failed.
RED LED The LED is GREEN if battery is connected.
4) GREEN/ TEST BATTERY. The LED is RED if test battery is failed.
RED LED The LED is GREEN if test battery is OK. The LED is LIT OFF if no battery connected
5) BATTERY CONNECTOR. It has to be conncted to the (optional) back–up battery
6) OUTPUT POWER CONNECTORS. SUB–D 3p to be connected to the two PSC(2) cards
7) PMU ALARMS CONNECTORS. SUB–D 15p to be connected to the FAN_C
8) AC INPUT POWER CONNECTORS. To be connected to the primary AC power supply
(100V/50–60Hz, 115V/60Hz, 230V/50Hz)
Figure 85. PMU front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 163 / 554
554
SLOTS SLOTS
FANC 49 –

FAN_C – 13
FANs status LEDs New FAN
HardWare
Failure LED FANC (for 1696MS)
HardWare
Failure LED
15 pins SUB–D
female connector
(for batteries
EXT
PMU alarms raising)
FAN FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

FILTER

Name Meaning
The LED is OFF when the board is plugged but not configured
Green / It is GREEN when the board is plugged but not configured
Red led It is RED to indicate hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in communication with the board
New FANs only. GREEN LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed is OK.
RED LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed is too low.
Green / ORANGE LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed too fast.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Red led
Figure 86. FANs front panel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 164 / 554
554
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General description

This section describes the main functions carried out by the
• 1696MSPAN
• 1696MS_C (CPE, housed in a compact shelf, with reduced functionalities)
Alcatel products.
The functions carried out by the NE, can be splitted in some sub–systems herebelow listed, and described
from para. 3.1.1 to para. 3.1.10:
• Transponder sub–system – see para.3.1.1
• TDM client signal concentrator sub–system – optional, see para. 3.1.2
• Optical MUX/DMUX (Wavelength Division Multiplexing) sub–system, see para. 3.1.3
• Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) sub–system – optional – used in 1696MS only, see para.
3.1.4
• Supervision management (Optical Supervisory Channel, OSC) sub–system – optional,

see para. 3.1.5
• Automatic Power Equalization sub–system (APE) – optional, see para. 3.1.6
• Controller sub–system, see para. 3.1.7
• Power supply sub–system, see para. 3.1.8
• Protection (O–SNCP) sub–system, see para. 3.1.9
• Performance Monitoring sub–system, see para. 3.1.10.
Before starting with the presentation of the above listed functions / sub–systems, for a better system com-
prehension, the 1696MS main configurations (Line Terminal, OADM, back–to–back terminal, Repeater)
and the functions implemented in each of them are described in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 165 / 554
554
Line Terminal configuration
Booster OSC
Up to insertion

32

TDM MUX OFA
Client concentrator
Transponder OSC WDM
signals Up to 32
Up to extraction
32 line
Up to (up to 16 WLA) DMUX OFA
32
Pre–amp.
To boards Supervision OSC

TDM bus
LEGEND: SPI bus
3.6 V
Optical link
Equipment and User To 5.5 V Power
Electrical link boards supply
shelf control Interfaces 48 V
Optional
function 2
LAN–Q3
2 Mbit/s 48 V
NE management
application User service accesses Station batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.2 on page 67).
Figure 87. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration
In the line terminal configuration all the above functions are needed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 166 / 554
554
OADM / back–to–back terminal (Hub) configuration
Client signals
TDM
concentrator
Up to 32
O–SNCP
Transponder Back panel Transponder

electrical links
(West) (East)
OSC Pre–amp. Booster OSC
extraction insertion
OFA DMUX MUX OFA

Pass through traffic
WDM WDM
line line
(West) OSC
Booster Pre–amp. OSC
(East)
insertion extraction
OFA MUX DMUX OFA

Pass through traffic
OSC OSC
Supervision
To boards To boards
LEGEND:
TDM bus 48 V 5.5 V 3.6 V
SPI bus
Optical link
Electrical link
Equipment and User Power
shelf control Interfaces supply Optional
function
LAN–Q3 2
NE management 2 Mbit/s Station

application User service accesses batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.4 on page 70).
Figure 88. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration
The hub configuration is similar to the OADM one, but without pass–through channels (all the channels
are added/dropped).
In OADM configuration all the optical transmission functions (transponder, MUX and DMUX) are dupli-
cated to transmit the client signals in two directions. This configuration allows optical channel protection
functions (O–SNCP).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 167 / 554
554
In line repeater configuration

OFA 1 OFA 2
OSC OSC
VOA Stage 1 DCU Stage 2
WDM WDM
line OSC OSC line
Stage 2 DCU Stage 1 VOA
OSC OSC
Supervision
To boards To boards LEGEND:
TDM bus 48 V 5.5 V 3.6 V
SPI bus Optical link
Electrical link
Equipment and User Power
shelf control Interfaces supply
Optional
function
LAN–Q3 2
NE management 2 Mbit/s Station

application User service accesses batteries
Figure 89. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration
In In line repeater configuration, the MUX/DEMUX and Transponder functions are not implemented. The
equipment acts as an in line amplifier, which allows nevertheless the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC)
and the supervision functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 168 / 554
554
3.1.1 Transponder sub–system
The transponder sub–system is built with

– Multi–rate Channel Cards: MCC
– Optical Channel Cards: OCC10

– Multi–rate WaveLength Adapters: WLA2 and WLA3

one per client signal. The role of this function is:
– At the transmit side (from client to WDM line):

to adapt the client incoming optical signals to a dedicated wavelength and deliver those optical sig-
nals to the multiplexer (MUX) function.
– At the receive side (from WDM line to client):

to restitute the client optical signals from the signal delivered by the demultiplexer (DEMUX) function.
From rel. 22A also 4xANY_P can be considered as a transponder if equipped with a coloured SFP. This
board is not taken into account in current paragraph because it is described in para. 3.1.2
The payload type configuration of the client signal is under control of the operator.
Up to 32 Client signals
User Tx User Rx
Up to 32
transponders
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Tx
To MUX function
Up to 32 DWDM channels or
Up to 8 CWDM channels
From DMUX function
Transponder function
Figure 90. Line terminal transponder function
In back–to–back and OADM configuration, the transponder function is doubled and it is able to transmit
and receive the clients signals in two directions. It provides optionally Optical Sub–Network Connection
Protection (O–SNCP), see section 3.1.9, page 193.
Up to 32 Client signals
O–SNCP
Up to 32 Up to 32
transponders transponders
MCC
User Tx User Rx MCC
User Tx User Rx
: Options
West WDM Rx WDM Rx East

8x8 Matrix Back–panel 8x8 Matrix
electrical
WDM Rx links WDM Rx
WDM Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
From DMUX To MUX
function function
Up to 32 DWDM channels or Up to 32 DWDM channels or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Up to 8 CWDM channels Up to 8 CWDM channels

To MUX From DMUX
function Transponder function function
Figure 91. Back–to–back terminal or OADM transponder function
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 169 / 554
554
3.1.1.1 Client signals
3.1.1.1.1 MCC client signals
The MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3 boards accept all bit rates from 100 Mbit/s to 2.66 Gbit/s in 3R (Re–time,

Re–amplify, Re–shape) mode. However beyond 2.5 Gbit/s the performances may be degraded.
The typical client signals accepted by the MCCs board are listed in the following table.
Some of them are proposed with a 3R regeneration mode for MCC1 and they are indicated with (*) on the
table. All the other signals are in 2R mode in MCC1.
Table 12. Example of Client signals – supported bit rates
MCC1, MCC2, MCC3

Bit rates (Mbit/s) Signal
100.000 FDDI
125.000 FE / FDDI
132.815 FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 STM–1 / OC–3 (*)
200.000 ESCON
265.620 FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270.000 DTV / HDTV
466.560 OC–9
531.250 FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 STM–4 / OC–12 (*)
933.120 OC–18
FC (100-SM–LL–I) (*)
1062.500
FICON / Inter–System Coupling Channel (ISC) (*)
1244.160 OC–24
1250.000 GBE (*)
1866.240 OC–36
2125.000 2FC (*)
2488.320 STM–16 / OC–48 (*)
2500.000 INFINIBAND
One CWDM SFP can be plugged on MCC3, client side.
3.1.1.1.2 WLA2 and WLA3 client signals
The WLA2 and WLA3 boards can accept the following bit rates (from 125 Mbps to 2.666 Gbps) in 3R (Re–
time, Re–amplify, Re–shape) mode: 125 Mbps, 155.52 Mbps, 200 Mbps, 270 Mbps, 622.08 Mbps, 1.0625
Gbps, 1.24416 Gbps, 1.25 Gbps, 2.125 Gbps, 2.48832 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 2.666 Gbps.
3.1.1.1.3 4XANY_P client signals
Refer to para. 3.1.2.
3.1.1.1.4 OCC10 client signals
The OCC10 board accepts the following client signals in 3R (Re–time, Re–amplify, Re–shape) mode:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– 9953.28 Gbps (STM–64 / OC–192 / 10GBE WAN), in UNI mode

– 10.3125 Gbps (10GBE LAN)
– 10.709 Gbps, in NNI mode (future rel.).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 170 / 554
554
3.1.1.2 DWDM optical channels
The 1696MSPAN transmits the 32 possible DWDM channels in the C–band. Table 13. on page 171 gives
the nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 100 GHz channel spacing anchored to a
193.100 THz reference (ITU–T standard grid).

The C–band is split into 4 sub–bands, which support 8 channels each: the long bands L1 and L2, and the
short bands S1 and S2.
Then, each sub–band is composed of 2 sets of 4 consecutive channels. Each set is separated from the
adjacent sets by one unused channel, except between L1 and S2, where the separation is 3 unused chan-
nels.
Table 13. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Central wavelength (nm)

(Craft terminal name) Number wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL) @2.5Gbps
wavelength deviation : 0,1 nm (EOL) @10Gbps
192,000 20 1561,42
192,100 21 1560,61
192,200 22 1559,79
192,300 23 1558,98
L2
192,500 25 1557,36
192,600 26 1556,55
192,700 27 1555,75
192,800 28 1554,94
BLUE
BAND
193,000 30 1553,33
193,100 31 1552,52
193,200 32 1551,72
193,300 33 1550,92
L1
193,500 35 1549,32
193,600 36 1548,51
193,700 37 1547,72
193,800 38 1546,92
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 171 / 554
554
Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Central wavelength (nm)
(Craft terminal name) Number wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL) @2.5Gbps
wavelength deviation : 0,1 nm (EOL) @10Gbps

194,200 42 1543,73
194,300 43 1542,94
194,400 44 1542,14
194,500 45 1541,35
S2
194,700 47 1539,77
194,800 48 1538,98
194,900 49 1538,19
195,000 50 1537,40
RED
BAND
195,200 52 1535,82
195,300 53 1535,04
195,400 54 1534,25
195,500 55 1533,47
S1
195.700 57 1531,90
195.800 58 1531,12
195.900 59 1530,33
196.000 60 1529,55
The Central frequency value (in GHz) is the channel name, visualized on the Craft Terminal.
The Multi–rate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3) is tunable over two channels. 16 different MCCs
(transponders) are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
The WaveLength Adapter (WLA3) provides two independent optical channels or one optically protected
channel, according to the board type.
WLA3 provides two DWDM interfaces. 16 different WLA3s are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
The TDM concentrator (4xANY_P) and the 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10) support one DWDM
channel. 32 different transponders are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
The 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10), support one channel each. Then 32 different OCC10s
(transponders) are necessary to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Mixed configuration (MCC, OCC10, WLA and 4xAny_P in the same equipment) are allowed.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 172 / 554
554
3.1.1.3 CWDM optical channels
The 1696MSPAN transmits the eigth possible CWDM channels according to ITU–T G.694.2. Table 14.
on page gives the nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 20 nm wavelength spacing
anchored to a 193.100 THz reference (ITU–T standard grid).

Table 14. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Central wavelength (nm) Channel Number Wavelength deviation (nm)
1471 1470 6.5
1491 1490 6.5
1511 1510 6.5
1531 1530 6.5
1551 1550 6.5
1571 1570 6.5
1591 1590 6.5
1611 1610 6.5
The WaveLength Adapter (WLA2 and WLA3) provides two independent optical channels or one optically
protected channel each, according to the board type.
WLA2 and WLA3 provide two CWDM interfaces each one.
Four different WLA2 or WLA3 are able to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
The TDM concentrator (4xANY_P) supports one CWDM channel. Eigth different 4xANY_P are required
to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
One CWDM SFP can be plugged on MCC3, client side. Eigth different MCC3s (transponders) are required
to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
Mixed configuration (different transponders in the same equipment) are allowed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 173 / 554
554
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) sub–system
The transponder sub–system supports clients signals from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps. Each client signal
connected to a transponder access uses a WDM channel, a wavelength (λ).

One CWDM or DWDM SFP can be plugged on 4xANY_P, aggregate side: in this case the board is a trans-

ponder and can be directly connected to the mux/demux, avoiding the use of a transponder.
The aim of the 4ANY TDM concentration is to save transponders and to optimize the use of each WDM
channel. Client signals from 100Mbps to 1.25Gbps can be concentrated in one STM–16 or CWDM/DWDM
interface. For example, 4 x STM1 client signals can be concentrated on a unique STM16 signal and ap-
plied to a unique transponder access or a mux/demux access, if a CWDM or DWDM SFP is used.
1 Transponder
4xANY
Up to 4 TDM 1 WDM
4 Transponders client signals Concen- Transponder optical
trator channel
Transponder 1xSTM16 (B&W)
Transponder Up to 4
Up to 4 WDM
client signals optical
Transponder
channels
Transponder 4xANY
Up to 4 TDM 1 WDM
client signals Concen- optical
trator 1xCWDM or DWDM channel
Figure 92. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration
The available client signal accesses and their maximum number are:
– Low bit rate:

• 4 x Fast Ethernet
• 4 x FDDI
• 4 x ESCON
• 4 x Digital Video
– SDH:
• 4 x STM1
• 3 x STM4
– High bit rate:

• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
• 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
The following mixes are also possible:

• 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4
• 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4
• 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
• 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
• 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
Low bit rates and high bit rates are available at 1310nm and 850nm. SDH bit rates are only available at
1310nm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
On the aggregate side, the 4xANY_P board is equipped with a SFP optical module providing the following
interfaces, according to the SFP used: I–16.1, S–16.1, Silver (APD) or Bronze (PIN) CWDM , DWDM (APD).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 174 / 554
554
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing sub–system
The optical multiplexer function

– receives from the transponder sub–system the colored optical channels
– multiplexes them into a WDM signal

– launches the WDM signal on the line.

The optical demultiplexer function
– receives the WDM line signal
– demultiplexes this signal
– sends the recovered optical channels to the transponder sub–system.
The DWDM multiplexer/demultiplexer sub–system have a scalable architecture. By combining three sorts
of basic MUXes and three sorts of basic DMUXes, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 and 32 channels, the multiplexing and
demultiplexing capacities can be obtained.
The CWDM multiplexer/demultiplexer sub–system is based on a 8–channel mux/demux.
3.1.3.1 Optical multiplexing
The multiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical MUXes:
– 5:1 and 9:1 DWDM MUXes:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 4 or 8 channels issued from the transponder function with
an extra input aggregate signal. The extra input may be connected to the output of another MUX
(MUX cascading), connected to the extra output of a corresponding DMUX (traffic pass through) or
simply not connected.
Aggregate signal Extra input

(n channels) Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
5:1 (n+4 channels)
4 channels 4 Channel inputs
from TPD
Aggregate signal Extra input

(n channels) Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
9:1 (n+8 channels)
8 channels 8 Channel inputs
from TPD
Figure 93. 4 and 8 channels DWDM optical MUXes
– 8:1 CWDM MUX:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 8 channels issued from the transponder function.
8 channels 8 Channel inputs Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal

8:1 (8 channels)
from TPD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 94. 8 channels CWDM optical MUX
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 175 / 554
554
– 2:1 expansion MUX:
This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 2 aggregate signals, one in the long band and the other
in the short band. It is necessary to reach the multiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs
to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards.

Aggregate signal LB input
(n1 channels) 2:1 Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
Aggregate signal SB input EXP (n1+n2 channels)
(n2 channels)
Figure 95. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX
3.1.3.2 Optical demultiplexing
The demultiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical DMUXes:
– 1:5 and 1:9 DWDM DMUXes:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (n channels) into 4 or 8
channels and an output aggregate signal (n–4 or n–8 channels). The extra output may be connected
to the input of another DMUX (DMUX cascading), connected to the extra input of a MUX of the multi-
plexer function (traffic pass through) or simply not connected.
Aggregate signal Extra output

(n–4 channels) Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
1:5 (n channels)
4 channels 4 Channel outputs
to TPD
Aggregate signal Extra output

(n–8 channels) Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
1:9 (n channels)
8 channels 8 Channel outputs
to TPD
Figure 96. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX
– 1:8 CWDM DMUX:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (8 channels) into 8 chan-
nels/wavelengths sent to the transponder function.
8 channels 8 Channel outputs Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal

1:8 (n channels)
to TPD
Figure 97. 8 channels CWDM optical DMUX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 176 / 554
554
– 2:1 expansion DMUX:
This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex the DWDM line signal into two aggregate signals,
one in the long band and the other in the short band. It is necessary to reach the demultiplexing capac-
ity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X
boards.
Aggregate signal LB output

(n1 channels) 1:2 Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
Aggregate signal SB output EXP n1 LB channels
(n2 channels) n2 SB channels
Figure 98. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 177 / 554
554
3.1.3.3 Example of MUX and DMUX functions
Line Terminal configurations
In a 4 or 8–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in one step. The extra

input of the MUX and the extra output of the DMUX are not connected.
MUX function
NC
9:1 8 channels
From transponder 8 to WDM line
transmit functions
DMUX function
NC
1:9 8 channels
To transponder 8 from WDM line
receive functions
Figure 99. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal
In a 12 or 16–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in two steps. The
example of Figure 100. shows how to cascade 2 MUXes and 2 DMUXes to obtain a 12–channels Line
Terminal.
The extra input of the first MUX is not connected. The 4–channels aggregate signal output of the first MUX
is connected to the extra input of the second MUX.
The extra output of the first DMUX is connected to the 4 channels aggregate signal input of the second
DMUX. The extra output of the second DMUX is not connected.
From
4 channels MUX function
aggregate
transponder 4 5:1
9:1 12 channels
transmit 8 to WDM line
functions
4 channels DMUX function

To aggregate
transponder 4 1:5
1:9 12 channels
receive 8 from WDM line
functions
Figure 100. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 178 / 554
554
In a 24 or 32–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in three steps. The
example of Figure 101. shows how the 2:1 expansion MUX multiplexes the 16–channels in long band and
16–channels in short band.
MUX function
8 channels
aggregate
From 8 9:1 16 channels (LB)
aggregate
9:1 32 channels
transponder 8 2:1 to WDM line
transmit 8 EXP
functions
8
9:1 16 channels (SB)
9:1 8 channels aggregate
aggregate
8 channels DMUX function

aggregate
8 1:9 16 channels (LB)
aggregate
To 1:9 32 channels
transponder 8 1:2 from WDM line
OMDX_L1_X(S)
receive 8 EXP
functions 8 1:9 16 channels (SB)
1:9 8 channels
aggregate
aggregate
Figure 101. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal
OADM configurations
The example of Figure 102. is an 8–channels OADM. 8 channels are dropped and added on both east
and west lines. In this configuration, the extra output of each DMUX is connected to the extra input of the
MUX of the opposite transmission direction. This allows to place the other 24 channels in pass through.
To/from To/from
transponder transponder
8 channels 8 channels 8 channels 8 channels
dropped added dropped added
DMUX 8 8 MUX
32 channels 24 channels aggregate 32 channels
from WDM line 1:9 pass through 9:1 to WDM line
West line East line

MUX 8 DMUX
32 channels 32 channels
9:1 1:9 from WDM line
to WDM line
24 channels aggregate
pass through
Figure 102. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM
The same configuration is available with 1, 2, 4 and 8–channels (n–channels). In this case, the number
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
of aggregate channels available in pass through is 32 – n.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 179 / 554
554
The example of Figure 103. is a 32–channels back–to–back terminal. In this configuration, there no is
pass through traffic, the 1696MSPAN is like a hub–node.
From/to

transponder function

32 channels 32 channels
MUX function MUX function

9:1 8 8 9:1
9:1 8
9:1 32 channels
8 2:1
32 channels 2:1
8 8 to WDM line
to WDM line EXP EXP
8 8
9:1 9:1
9:1 9:1
East line
West line
DMUX function DMUX function
1:9 1:9
8 8
1:9 1:9
1:2 8 8 1:2 32 channels
32 channels 8 from WDM line
8
from WDM line EXP EXP
1:9 8 8 1:9
1:9 1:9
Figure 103. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels back–to–back terminal
Remote channel to/from CPE.
Client signals Optional

functions
TPD TPD
OFA OFA
WDM WDM
line Mux Mux line
signal Dmux Dmux signal
n λ (up to 32) Passthrough n λ (up to 32)
ÉÉÉ
Remote channel
ÉÉÉ
TPD
Client signal
To/from CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 104. 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration and with a remote channel
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 180 / 554
554
3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification sub–system
The Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) sub–system can deliver:

– single or double stages amplification
– VOA at the first stage entry

– Up to 17 dBm output power.
As shown in Figure 87. and Figure 88. the 1696MSPAN may be equipped with one or two OFAs (one OFA
in west side and one in east side or two OFAs in west side and two in east side) in line terminal and OADM/
back–to–back configuration. In the following example is shown a double stage amplification.
In a single stage amplification, the line terminal or OADM is placed inside the OFA inter–stage (see
Figure 25. on page 70 as an example)
WEST SIDE LEGEND:

Stage 1 – Preamp. Stage 2– Booster
Optional
Pump 1 Pump 2 function
OSC
extraction
ATTEN/
VOA OFA 1 DCU OFA 2
MUX
WDM function
line OSC (OMDX/OADM)
insertion
ATTEN/
OFA 2 DCU OFA 1 VOA
Pump 2 Pump 1
Stage 2 – Booster Stage 1 – Preamp.
Supervision function
Figure 105. OFA sub–system in line terminal or OADM configuration
In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is mainly a bidirectional optical amplifier.
WEST SIDE LEGEND: EAST SIDE

Stage 1 – Preamp. Stage 2– Booster
Optional
Pump 1 Pump 2 function
OSC OSC
VOA ATTEN/
OFA 1 DCU OFA 2
WDM WDM
line OSC OSC line
OFA 2 ATTEN/ OFA 1 VOA
DCU
Pump 2 Pump 1
Stage 2 – Booster Stage 1 – Preamp.
Supervision function
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 106. OFA sub–system in repeater configuration
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 181 / 554
554
3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) sub–system
An optional channel named OSC is allocated to the transport of the supervision data. The OSC allows the
remote monitoring of the NE in a network and gives some order–wires (data channel and voice channel)

to the users.

The OSC channel is managed by the SPV management unit. It is
– inserted at the output of the terminal equipment (input of the WDM line),
– regenerated in each OADM, back–to–back terminal or repeater,
– dropped at the input of the terminal equipment (output of the WDM line).
WDM OADM
terminal OADM repeater
O
M OADM 1 2
X OSC OSC
OSC OADM
SPVM SPVM SPVM

unit unit unit
OSC OSC OADM OSC

O
D OADM 2 1
X
WDM
OADM repeater In Line Repeater terminal
O
1 2 1 2 D
OSC X
OSC OSC
OADM
SPVM SPVM Unit SPVM

unit unit
OADM OSC OSC

OSC O
2 1 2 1 M
X
SPVM SPVM
SPVM
CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 107. OSC management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and In–Line–Repeater Equip-
ment
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 182 / 554
554
In case of repeaters the SPV is inserted at the output of the NE: either in the amplifier board or in the last
mux board (OMDX or OADM). The optical interfaces are located inside the SPV management unit.
More than one SPVM board can be used in one shelf. A link from/to a Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE) carrying only one or two (1550 and/or 1310) data channels can be inserted on any kind of 1696MS
node (terminal or OADM).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 183 / 554
554
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem
Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is a function which allows the automatic balancing of the optical spec-
trum at node output. The objective is to have a flat spectrum in power per channel.

For all information related to automatic power equalization, refer to the commissioning handbook.
Two kinds of boards are mandatory to perform APE :
– OSMC : OSMC board is a embedded optical spectrum analyser. It can measure 8 different spectra
at 8 different points of the NE. Only one OSMC per NE is needed. It must be optically connected to
monitoring ports of the NE
– MVAC : all loop, pass–through bands and external colored channels must be connected to MVAC.
Before launching APE, the operator needs to perform some pre–settings.
Firstly, the operator must declare the cabling between :
– MVAC & OADM or OMDX ports.
– OSMC & monitored boards.
Then, the operator sets the OSMC configuration parameters :
– Calibration factors : Because OSMC is connected to board monitoring outputs, calibration of the at-
tenuation path beween real signal on the line and OSMC input is needed.
8 calibration factors are set (one per OSMC input).
Calibration can be performed manually or automatically.
Each OSMC input can be independently calibrated or not, in automatic or manual mode.
– Optical LOS threshold : OSMC board detects two kinds of LOS of signals :
• Total LOS on input #i : Total LOS is raised on input #i if :

Maximum channel power of input #i < Total LOS threshold of input #i
• Relative LOS on channel x of input #i : relative LOS on channel x of input #i is raised if :

Maximum channel power of input #i – channel power x > Relative LOS threshold
These thresholds are configurable by the operator
Finally, the operator must load APE parameters :
– Installation or Upgrade
– Direction to equalize
– Interstage attenuation and maximum number of iterations in case of an OADM repeater.
When the operator launches the equalization, the NE asks for some spectrum acquisitions to the OSMC.
Spectrum data are sent from OSMC to the NE. The NE calculates required MVAC & transponders attenua-
tions so to have a flat spectrum at node output. The process can be iterative in case of an OADM repeater.
When the output tilt is optimized, resulting spectrum and tilt at node output are displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 184 / 554
554
MVAC
MVAC
D
E M
1 M U 2
U X
X
MVAC
OSMC
Figure 108. Automatic Power Equalization
APE is stopped if RUM, RUP, RUTM are raised, in case of communication problem or if maximum number
of iterations is reached.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 185 / 554
554
3.1.7 Controller sub–system
See Figure 109. on page 188 and Figure 110. The controller sub–system is based on a two levels model:
– Shelf Controller (SC)

– Equipment Controller (EC)

In current release the ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support
the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions.
The Equipment Shelf Controller (ESC) board provides both features or only one (as needed).
It performs both EC and SC when it is located in slot 1 of the Master shelf and only the SC functionality
when it is plugged in slot 1 of an expansion shelf.
The Flash memory of the ESC board must be plugged on its socket and in the correct
sense. In this case, it is plugged easily without constraint. On the wrong sense the Flash
memory cannot be plugged. Then invert the side to be plugged and try again. Furthermore that
flash card must not be installed in a ESC used in Expansion shelf.
The Control Platform is also provided by the ESC board for the 1696MS_C.
Shelf Controller function
SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and man-
agement and configuration provisioning.
In a shelf all the boards are connected to the ESC unit via the SPI bus. By means of the SPI bus, the proces-
sor of the ESC, can collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms collection, remote inventory
and data EEPROM reading).
Equipment Controller function
The EC supports the Q3 agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine).
It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for
the communication between NE and Management system (OS, craft terminal, etc).
It performs as well all the SW functions related to the control and management activities of the ”virtual”
(logical) machine: info–model processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base manage-
ment, SW downloading and management, etc.
Control bus
The SPI bus allows:

• connection between SC and boards for configuration data provisioning
• remote inventory data acquisition
• data collection ( alarms ) and commands handling (ex. loops)
The SC processor is master of this bus.
The IS–LINK (10 Mb/s) is used to realize the communication between the EC in the master shelf and the
SC in the expansion shelves.
The ISSB bus (not used in current release) connects the Shelf Controllers processor to the ASICs and
FPGAs of the different boards in the same shelf. It is used for OCh–OH management and to carry primi-
tives for OCC10 performance monitoring. It is terminated in the PSC.
The Intershelf Link (I–LINK) (10 Mb/s) is used in 1696MS_C system only allowing to connect the SPI
bus and the Card presence signals from the slave shelves to the ESC board, only provided in master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 186 / 554
554
External interfaces toward Craft Terminal, OS...
F interface : available from the EC function for connection to a local Craft Terminal; the electrical interface
and connector are provided by the ESC card.
The standard implementation of the physical layer for the F interface consists of an RS–232 UART port
accessible from the ESC card front panel.
QECC Interface: it is a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Commu-
nication Channels available in the Optical Supervisory Channel (DCC). Through the QECC interface the
equipment can exchange management messages with a remote OS.
QAUX interface: it is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange be-
tween the NE and a Remote OS station based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary protocol.
Q3/TL1 interface: it is dedicated to an OS station connection. LAN_Q supports Q3 connection to a WAN
or LAN respectively. The physical interfaces are provided by the LAN_Q card.
RE / HK interface: this interface consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms and for housekeep-
ing signals. The relevant electrical interfaces are placed on the HK card, and are controlled by the EC func-
tion through parallel I/O ports.
RA interface: it is dedicated to send commands toward the rack to light up the relevant lamps.
Flash backup and Smart Boot
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp ser-
vice, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 187 / 554
554
Rack leds Remote/ OPERATION
Housekeeping SYSTEM
Alarms

RE/HK

RA Q3/TL1
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
RAI HK LAN_Q
Local
Craft Terminal SLAVE SHELF
FLASH
CARD
F
To all
EC IS–LINK SC SPI boards in
the shelf
To all SC ESC BOARD

SPI
boards
QECC
in the shelf
ESC BOARD
SPVM
MASTER SHELF UIC

EXTERNAL INTF
QAUX
REMOTE
OPERATION
SYSTEM
Figure 109. Controller sub–system
3.1.7.1 Example of control interfaces scheme

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 188 / 554
554
MASTER SHELF PDU/TRU
Power Supply A
ISPB (not used in current release)
PSC PSC Power Supply B
O O
Local Craft
M M F INTERFACE
EC Terminal
D D
X X
/ / Q3/TL1 (OPERATION SYSTEM)
W M LAN
O O IS–LINK
L C E LAN
A A
A C S HK HK/RE Remote / HK Alarms
4 D D
O O M 2 / C RA Rack Leds
x M M RAI
M S V / O
A / /
S M A W C
N C C E1/E2
P C C L C QECC
Y M M S
A 1 2x2Mbps QAUX intf (REMOTE OS)
D D P U
3 0 SC F1
X X V I
C NU
M
SPI–A
SPI–B
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION SHELF Power Supply A

PSC PSC Power Supply B
O O
M M
D D
X X
/ /
W M O O
L C A A IS–LINK
LAN
A C 4 D D
O O M
2 / x M M E
M S V RA
/ O A / / S RAI
S M A
W C N C C C
P C C
L C Y M M
A 1 D D
3 0 X X
SPI–A
SPI–B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 110. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 189 / 554
554
MASTER COMPACT SHELF PDU/TRU
Power Supply A
PSC/2 PSC/2 Power Supply B

O O
M M
D D
X X Local Craft
/ / F INTERFACE
Terminal
W M E
O O
I L C Q3/TL1 (OPERATION SYSTEM)
A A S LAN
L A C C IS–LINK
O 4 D D LAN
I 2 / HK/RE Remote / HK Alarms
M x M M HK
N / O EC
S A / / RAI RA Rack Leds
K W C
P N C C
_ L C Y M M QECC S Audio
M A 1 D D P
3 0 SC V
X X
M
SPI–A
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION COMPACT SHELF Power Supply A

PSC2 PSC2 Power Supply B
W M
I L C
L O A C 4
I M 2 / x
N S / O A
K P W C N
_ L C Y
S A 1
3 0
SPI–A
Figure 111. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 190 / 554
554
3.1.8 Power supply sub–system
The powering architecture is distributed: two Power Supply Cards are in charge of feeding all the other
cards hosted in the shelf by selecting the highest voltage supplied by the two station batteries.
Power Supply Cards are fit in

– slot 25 and slot 48 in 1696MS
– slot 7 and 12 in 1696MS_C.
The main purposes are:
– Supply and distribute 48V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in the shelf of the
1696MS/1696MS_C equipment
– Supply and distribute +3V service voltage dedicated to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards
– Supply and distribute +5V auxiliary voltage
– Make a bus termination
– Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.
The PSC boards work in ”1 + 1” protection; this means that (as concerning 48V) only one PSC may be
active at once. This circuit select the battery more charged and protect against reverse voltage applied.
Figure 112. on page 192 shows the equipment power supply scheme housed on the two PSC.
Input power stage

It provides adaptation to the customer central power bus by a main power block and supplies all the SPI-
DER FPGA by means of an on–board converter.
Main power block

It is used to select the input voltage of the system and to supply a surge protection.
It contains an EMI filter to permit the equipment to be reliable in presence of external EMI interferences
and to limit the internally generated EMI.
The voltages coming from the two station batteries, are applied to PSC A and to PSC B respectively by
means of the power connector located on the unit front panel ( ex. +BATT A –BATT A to PSC A and +BATT
B –BATT B to PSC B).
The +Batt can be connected to a mechanical ground through a strap setting.
Moreover each PSC receives from the back panel connector the –BATT voltage coming from the other
station battery (i.e. –BATT B to PSC A and –BATT A to PSC B).
Each PSC can therefore select which of the two station batteries provides the highest supply.
The selected voltages are ORed and sent to the equipment cards.
Protection Circuit
The protection circuit is present in the PSC and in all the boards where a DC/DC converter is required i.e.
input stage and distributed power stages. It is an interface between +BATT –BATT and the DC/DC converter.
It provides the following functions:
– it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input short circuit. Fuses are fitted in order to prevent a
failed unit from shortening the input bus. In fact a input short circuit failure can cause severe fluctua-
tions on the input power of the other DC/DC converters
– it implements a start–up and an inrush current limiting system in order to provide controlled charge–
up for the input hold–up capacitor and therefore it prevents a current surge at the module input when
the board is plugged in
– it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input voltage lower than 33 V.
On board power supply

A DC/DC converter generates a +3.3 V voltage used to power the SPIDER FPGA.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Distributed power stage

All the boards receive the +3.6 V and the 5.5 V voltage to power the FPGA device located on each card.
Moreover, some boards receive the +BATT –BATT voltages generated by the input stage of the PSC.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 191 / 554
554
Normal service range
The normal input voltage range of the power supply module is either:
– 40,5 V – 48 V – 57,0 V or
– 50,0 V – 60 V – 72,0 V.

Abnormal service range
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at –48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the follow-
ing voltage range : 0 V to –40,5 V and –57 V to –60 V.
When the equipment operates at –60 V, the voltage range becomes: 0 V to –50 V and –72 V to –75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.
The maximum power consumption of the main rack is about 400 Watts.
DC/DC Power supply units’ output voltages + 3.6 V 3%
– 5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
–Batt_A
GND
–Batt_B
+Batt_A
PSC A GND
+Batt +Batt_B
* protection * OR Batt PSC B
* pre–filter
* EMI/EMC –Batt
* fuse filter
+Batt
* OR Batt * protection
* EMI/EMC * pre–filter
–Batt
filter * fuse
3.6V * soft start

dual DC/DC * EMI/EMC
5.5V converter filter
* threshold
* soft start 3.6V
dual DC/DC
* EMI/EMC
filter converter 5.5V
* threshold
PRIMARY POWER STAGE
DISTRIBUTED POWER STAGE

GENERIC BOARD
* soft start 3.6V

5.5V
* EMI/EMC OBPS
filter 2.5V
* threshold
OR
OR auxilliary
power supply
SPIDER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FPGA
Figure 112. 1696MSPAN – equipment power supply scheme
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 192 / 554
554
3.1.9 Protection sub–system
The protection type used is Optical SNCP (network protection).

In a ring network the Sub–Network Connection Protection (SNCP) at optical channel level can be provided
either in ”back–to–back” terminals or in OADM configuration.

The transponders (MCC/OCC10/4xANY_P) are duplicated for each protected channel (also WLA2M_OP
and WLA3CDOP provide O_SNCP, but they are not duplicated because they carry one optically protected
channel). At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on the two arms of the ring. At the receive side
one of the two available signals is selected. When a failure occurs on the working path, the system
switches on the signal of the protecting path.
Client end traffic
Receive side: Transmit side:

in case of a failure in one arm client signals are split
of the ring the system select and launched on the
the signal of the other one two arms of the ring
Back–to–back
terminal
Client Client
Add & drop OADM OADM Add & drop
traffic traffic
OADM
Client Add & drop traffic
Figure 113. Channel level protection in a ring network
The Optical SNCP (O–SNCP) is ensured for each client signal by 2 optical splitters, located between the
client interface and the transponder cards:
– At the transmit side, each client signal is split by a 50/50 optical splitter and sent to two transponder
cards. Then, one signal is broadcasted to one arm of the ring and the other signal is broadcasted to
the other arm.
– At the receive side, each WDM signal comes from one arm of the ring to one transponder card. At
the User Tx interface, one transponder card is in working mode (laser ON) and the other is in protect-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ing mode (laser OFF). When a fault is detected on the working path, the protection switching is per-
formed by turning off the working User Tx laser and by re–activating the protecting one.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 193 / 554
554
Client signals
Optical coupling Optical splitting
Working: Protecting:

laser ON laser OFF

User Tx User Rx User Tx User Rx
Transponder Transponder
West East
WDM Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
DMUX MUX
WDM line WDM line
(West) (East)
MUX DMUX
1696MSPAN
Figure 114. O–SNCP principle
In the following are shown the Optical SNCP types provided by the equipment. They are
– the MCC protection (alone and MCC + 4xANY), described on para. 3.1.9.1
– the OCC10 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.2.
– the 4xANY client signals protection, described on para. 3.1.9.3.
– the WLA2 and WLA3 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.4.
– the WLA2 and WLA3 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.5 on page 201.
3.1.9.1 MCC protection
Table 15. MCC protection: switching criteria
Alarm Applicable to the following MCCs Default status

HWF All MCCs
C_ABS All MCCs
C_TYPE All MCCs
ILOS_WDM All MCCs always
y enabled
LOC_user / LOC_User_Tx MCC2, MCC3
C_ABS_SFP MCC3
C_TYPE_SFP MCC3
When a MCC detects one of the above criteria, the transmitter is shut–down.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 194 / 554
554
3.1.9.1.1 MCC alone: MCC1, MCC2, MCC3
MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 115. Optical SNCP with MCC units
The function is provided by two optical splitters. The selection is done by switching–off the user Tx corre-
sponding to the path in failure and re–activating the protecting one.
3.1.9.1.2 MCC + 4xANY
MCC MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
OPC
Tx Rx
4xANY
Rx Rx Rx Rx
Tx Tx Tx Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 116. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC–4xANY)
The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switching–off the
MCC user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 195 / 554
554
3.1.9.2 OCC10 protection

OCC10 West OCC10 East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 117. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit
The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switching–off the
user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
Table 16. OCC10 protection: switching criteria
Alarm Managed Status

HWF X
C_ABS X
C_TYPE X
LOS_WDM_Rx (or LOC_OTN_WDM_Rx) X
always enabled
LOS_user_Tx X
LOF_OTN_WDM_Rx X
LOM_OTN_WDM_Rx X
XFP_unplugged (OCC10_E) X
When an OCC10 detects one of the above criteria then the transmitter is shut–down.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 196 / 554
554
3.1.9.3 Protection of the 4xANY client
Protection can be performed optically on the 4xANY units.

MCC MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
4xANY LF Link 4xANY
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
OPC OPC OPC OPC
Figure 118. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection)
The function is ensured by eight optical splitters (provided by four OPCs). The selection is done by switch-
ing–off the 4xANY user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
The clients are individually protected: if one is protected, it is not necessary to protect the other ones.
In 1696MS, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY on the right side al-
ways contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY on the left side, the SPARE/protecting draw-
ers.
In 1696MS_C, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY above (slots 4 and
5) always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY below (slots 2 and 3), the SPARE/protect-
ing drawers.
The slot allocation of the OPC according to the drawers in protection of the 4xANY clients is fixed as de-
scribed in Figure 119.
N.B. In some configurations, the OPC slot cannot be provided by an OPC board because this is already
allocated by other boards. This concerns LAN, HK and RAI boards. This can limit the number of
protected clients.
N.B. In case the two 4xANY_P are provided with coloured SFPs (CWDM or DWDM), the transponders
are not required.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 197 / 554
554
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #1
DRAWER #1

DRAWER #4
DRAWER #4
DRAWER #2
DRAWER #2
OPC #2
OPC #1
OPC #3
OPC #4
Figure 119. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection
OPC location for drawers protection

– drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
– drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42
– drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
– drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.
The 4xANY boards in slot 2–3 and 22–23 cannot be protected.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O H R O O O O O O O O U U P
S A P P P P P P P P K A P P P P P P P P I I S
C N C C C C C C C C I C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
Table 17. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer
HWF X
Link_Failure_DRW_U X
C_ABS X
C_ABS_DRW_U X always
y enabled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
C_TYPE_DRW_U X
SSF_U X
Pk_AIS_U X
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 198 / 554
554
3.1.9.4 WLA2 and WLA3 protection
The optical protection is provided by the WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP boards.

As they are 2–channel boards, one channel is protected by the other one.
The available protection scheme is O–SNCP.

In Tx direction (from client to WDM) the signal is transmitted on the two paths by means of the optical split-
ter, while in Rx (from WDM to client) only one signal is sent to the client by the optical coupler, being active
only one transponder (the other one is OFF).
WDM Tx WDM Tx
WEST EAST
SPARE MAIN
WDM Rx WDM Rx
B&W Tx B&W Rx B&W Rx B&W Tx
WLA2M_OP
WLA2CDOP
1:1 1:1
optical optical
coupler splitter
Figure 120. O–SNCP with WLA units (WLA2M_OP/WLA3CDOP)
Table 18. WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP protection: switch criteria
Alarm Managed by Status

ILOS_SFP_X (X=WDM ports, WDM CH1 or CH2) WLA2M_OP, WLA3CDOP
always enabled
SFP_ABS_X (X=1 to 4, all B&W and WDM ports) WLA3CDOP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 199 / 554
554
3.1.9.4.1 1354 RM: configuration of the WLA3CDOP
Refer to Figure 121. In the above example, a protected path is created between NE1 and NE2, using
WLA3CDOP cards NE3 provides an optical channel passthrough.

The physical connections indicated in pink are the connections to be created for path discovery (Note that
a physical connection need to be created for an optical channel passthrough but it is done automatically
in case of optical band passthrough).
The physical connections are all of the OPS–type except those related to SDH (port 5) (SDH/WDM inter-
working).
For the physical connections related to ports 2 and 4, it is needed to select the mux ports corresponding
to the same wavelength.
Compared to the protected path creation for an OCC10 or a MCC, an additional operation is needed when
creating a protected path with a WLA3CDOP: it is necessary to create the physical connections between
the DWDM SFPs and the corresponding mux/demux ports.
Figure 121. Example of a 1696 MS network with path protection using WLA3CDOP cards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 200 / 554
554
3.1.9.5 OTS protection
OTSP protects the fiber in point–to–point links.

All the multiplexed signal is protected: if one or some channels fail, there is no switch in OMSP board.
If there is a fiber break on the MAIN path, all the multiplexed signal is lost, then the board switches.
There is no switch in case of HWF, because if HWF occurs on OMSP board, it will not be able to switch.
OMSP OMSP
M M
u u
x x
Sub–Network
D D
e- e-
m m
u u
x x
Figure 122. OTS protection with OMSP unit
Table 19. OTS protection: switch criteria

ILOS on MAIN path and NO ILOS on SPARE path X always enabled
3.1.9.5.1 1354 RM: ACCESS to O–MSP commands when 1354 RM is present
[1] Identify USM handling the 1696MSPAN, i.e. USMSH5Q3WDMVxx
[2] Go to /usr/Systems/1353NM_**/eml/usmsh5q3wdmv’xx’/conf/ directory
[3] Edit param.cfg file
[4] Search SECURITY_ENABLED parameter and set it to False
[5] Close all related open USMs in the machine
[6] Open USM again on the target NE(s)

the USM now behaves as we were in NM only configuration for this USM type only.
We have now access to Protection commands in cross connection menu.
[7] After the operations on OMSP set back the SECURITY_ENABLED parameter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 201 / 554
554
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring sub–system
The 1696MSPAN is able to monitor the performance of the optical signal transmission. It is an SDH type
Performance Monitoring, based on B1 counter and performed at the RX accesses (for SDH or SONET

frames at system inputs only).

This function is available for MCC, OCC10, WLA2M, WLA3CD and 4xANY boards (on the received
aggregate signal only, as regards 4xANY).
These boards monitor the B1 byte.
OCC10 and MCC3 support simultaneous PMs on client and line sides
WLA2M and WLA3CD support PMs on one transponder (of two) at the same time.
The performance monitoring is available:
– at the User Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal,
– at the WDM Rx access in order to monitor the WDM incoming signal and its transmission through
the WDM network.
It is possible to manage up to 32 PM per NE.
PM at WDM Rx side
PM on client signal
User WDM WDM User

RX TX RX TX
ADM 1696MSPAN WDM 1696MSPAN ADM

User WDM WDM User
TX RX TX RX
Figure 123. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC
What does the system monitor?
Performance monitoring are SDH type. The system monitors:
– performance primitive
• 1 CV (Count of Violations). 8 errors by SDH or SONET frame can be detected
• Defect Seconds (DS): second during which one of the LOS (Loss Of Signal), LOF (Loss Of
Frame (SDH) or LOC (Loss Of Clock) events occurred.
N.B. In SDH ADM devices, the number of EB (Erroneous Blocks) is accumulated, what is no more
true here (we perform the count of B1 violations: CV). But we make the approximation that CV
= EB for low BER.
– performance events
• ES (Erroneous Second): second containing one or more erroneous bits
• SES (Severely Erroneous Second): second containing at least 30% of erroneous blocks or at
least one defect (LOS, LOF or LOC)
• BBE (Background Blocks Errors): number of B1 erroneous bits outside an SES.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 202 / 554
554
How does the system store the performance data?
Two counters are provided to store the Performance Monitoring data:

– 15 minutes counter:
The current measurement and measurements of the 4 previous hours (15–minute periods) are
stored in the NE data base. Measurements of several days are stored in SH base.
– 24 hours counter:
The current measurement and the one of the day before are stored in the NE data base. Measure-
ments on several months are stored in SH base.
For both periods, 15 minutes and 24 hours, an adjustable threshold alarm (TCA) on each ES, SES and
BBE is provided to the operator. A TCA alarm (QoS alarm) is raised when one of these thresholds is
reached (all the counter values are available).
Individual PM threshold management. It is provided the ability
– to set the threshold level on a per entity basis for 15 min or 24 hours on the user side or WDM side
of each transponder and on the STM–16 signal of each 4xANY board
– to define user default threshold level on per type of board basis for 15 min or 24 hours.
Table 20. Default thresholds for QoS alarms
SET/RESET thresholds
QoS_24
Q S 24 BBE ES SES Implicite
p RESET after 24 hours
alarm
36000 150 15
SET thresholds RESET thresholds
QoS_15
Q S 15 BBE ES SES BBE ES SES
alarm
24000 50 10 200 5 0
1354 RM: how to handle measures on a WDM protected path
[1] Using PM Domain in RM Browser create the wanted measures profile, i.e. Maintenance –15m or/and
QOS 24h.
Check that Counters Provided field is set to TRUE
[2] Correlate the target path(s) to the previous measure.

There are several ways to do that, from measure or from the path.
i.e. from measure use /Actions/”Correlate/Merge“/“Correlate Paths/Trails”
then drag and drop the target path(s).
i.e. from path use /Performance Measurement/Add to, then select target path(s)
At this stage the RM automatically add default measured point to the measure defined in step
• The default points are extremities/”ctps“ of the path.
You can list them by selecting the measure and clicking on “PmTps“ icon. You can also double
click on the measure.
IF your path is a WDM protected path, the extremities of the path are the “OPC“ ports. OCP
board is not a board generating PM, the PM generation is performed by the transponders linked
to the OPC.
Therefore after step [2] the PmTps list should be still empty
[3] To fill the PmTps list of the target measure for WDM protected paths, open the routing display of the
target path(s) already correlated to the measure(s).
In the routing display, select the wanted ctp(s) you want to monitor then
/Actions/Performance Monitoring/Correlate a Planned Measure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
If the path has been correlated to several measures, a window opens to choose the one(s) you want
to correlate.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 203 / 554
554
The “Ctps“ to select are the ones corresponding to the transponders you want to monitor. If you have
a transponder in slot 12 in your path you should see the related two Ctps (B&W and WDM) in the
routing display of the path.

[4] Activate the measure(s) with /Actions/”Start/Consistency/Stop“/Start

Now the target NE transponders should be counting PM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 204 / 554
554
3.2 System Configuration
3.2.1 Configuration criteria

The basic configuration of the relies on the following criteria:
– the traffic demand defines the number of channels (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 or 32 channels)
– the network architecture and the position of the equipment in the network defines the NE type (line
terminal, OADM, back–to–back terminal, repeater or CPE).
– the optical power budget determines the need of optical amplification in the line terminal and OADM
NEs or the need of repeater NEs.
Once the basic configuration is defined, secondary criteria will be determinant to define the optional features:
– TDM concentrator (4ANY)

Up to 4 client signals may be multiplexed on a single STM16. The concentration of 4 client signals
on a unique transponder access, requires a 4ANY board but saves 3 transponders and the corre-
sponding optical channels. In case of the 4xANY_P is equipped with a CWDM or DWDM SFP optical
module, the transponder is not required.
– Optical Sub–Network Connection Protection (O–SNCP)

In ring networks, both channels and each client signals can be individually protected:
• the protection of a channel/wavelenght requires an OPC board and two transponders (MCC/
OCC10)
• the protection of the client signal(s) requires up to four OPCs, two 4xANY and two MCC boards
(only in case of the 4xANY is not equipped with WDM SFP)
• the protection of the client signal requires one optically protected WLA (WLA2M_OP,
WLA3CDOP).
– Supervision function and User interface

The supervision feature requires an SPVM (SPVM2; SPVM_H) board. The 2 Mbit/s user interface
feature requires in addition an UIC board. These two features also require the OSC insertion MUX
and the OSC extraction DMUX implemented in all the OADM boards, the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS,
the CMDX2 (the last one is used for CWDM applications; 1510nm or 1310nm is the CWDM supervi-
sion wavelength) and the OAC boards. If the use of one of these features is foreseen, the early choice
of a board with the OSC MUX and DMUX will allow a further implementation, without interruption of
the traffic.
– Expansion MUX/DEMUX
The 2:1 expansion MUX and DEMUX (OMDX8100_M_L1_X and OMDX8100_M_L1_XS boards)
are necessary to reach NE configurations with more than 16 optical channels. A NE can be upgraded
up to a 32 channel NE without traffic interruption if the expansion MUX and DMUX are already
installed.
– Remote NE
The type of Remote NE is defined when few channels are needed for the user to reach from a ring
a distant NE or to create a point to point link with CPE using.
N.B. Boards are generally 1696MS shelf and 1696MS_C shelf compatible except boards explicitly
denominated as ”strictly for 1696MS” or ”strictly for Compact shelf”.
When a CPE is used in office version, the customer must provide an appropriate ground.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CPE metallic housing should be connected to the ground,

0 V_DC of the External power feeding must be also connected to this ground.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 205 / 554
554
Consequently the ground connection of the positive Battery 48 Vdc should be directly con-
nected on the ground (PSC side) of the power cable.

Let consider the example of Figure 124.

4 added and dropped
client signals
8 client Line 4 pass–through Line 8 client

signals channels signals
Terminal Terminal
OADM
Figure 124. Example of starting configuration
One 8 channel MUX/DMUX card is sufficient to build this configuration. The Table 21. gives three possibili-
ties and their characteristics.
Table 21. Configuration criteria
MUX/DMUX board Cost Power Upgradability Supervision

budget channel
12 or 16 channels without
OMDX8100_M_L2 or
traffic interruption.
OMDX8100_M_S2 or minimum maximum No
24 or 32 channels with traffic
OMDX8100_M_S1
interruption.
12 or 16 channels without
OADM8100_M_##_S intermediate intermediate Yes
24 or 32 channels with traffic
interruption.
Up to 32 channels without
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS maximum minimum Yes
N.B. In the OMDX and OADM board name, the characters of the fourth part if any, have the following
meaning:
S: board with supervision channel extract and insert functions.
X: board with expansion MUX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 206 / 554
554
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples
3.2.2.1 Typical DWDM / CWDM configurations
3.2.2.1.1 DWDM configurations

– Terminals
• 1 channel terminal
• 2 channels terminal
• 4 channels terminal with two 4ANY boards
• 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface
• 16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision
• 32 channels terminal with two stages amplification in one shelf (w/ WLA)
– Back–to–back terminals / OADM

• 1 channel OADM
• 2 channels OADM
• 4 channels OADM
• 8 channels OADM
• 8 channels west and 4 channels east back–to–back terminal / OADM (asymmetrical configuion)
• 16 (protected) channels back–to–back terminal / OADM in one shelf (with WLA)
• 32 (protected and amplified) channels back–to–back terminal / OADM in one NE
It is also possible to use 12 and 24 channels terminal and back–to–back terminal/OADM.
– Repeaters: With and Without supervision.
3.2.2.1.2 CWDM configurations
– Terminals
• 1 to 8 channels terminal
– Back–to–back terminals / OADM

• 1 to 8 channels back–to–back terminal
– Repeaters: With and Without supervision.
3.2.2.1.3 Mixed (CWDM + DWDM) configurations
– Terminals (with or without supervision)

• (up to) 15 channels terminal: (up to) 8 DWDM channels plus (up to) 7 CWDM channels
• (up to) 22 channels terminal: (up to) 16 DWDM channels plus (up to) 6 CWDM channels
– Back–to–back terminals (with or without supervision)

• (up to) 15 channels b–to–b terminal: (up to) 8 DWDM chs plus (up to) 7 CWDM chs for each side
• (up to) 22 channels b–to–b terminal: (up to) 16 DWDM chs plus (up to) 6 CWDM chs for each side
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.
N.B. If equipped with a WDM SFP module, also the 4xAY_P can be considered as a transponder,
but it will not shown in the following figures for semplicity reasons.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 207 / 554
554
Examples of configurations with MVAC are also provided.
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder (see the
examples shown in the following figures), apart when the WLA unit (WLA2M_OP and

WLA3CDOP) is used: in this case the OPC is not required.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 208 / 554
554
3.2.2.2 Line Terminals (one sided multiplexer / demultiplexer)
3.2.2.2.1 4 channels terminal
4 channels terminal can be designed with

– the 4–channel OADM board, OCC10, MCC, WLA3 and 4xANY_P transponders, in case of DWDM
application. In this case the ”pass–through” link is not connected (Mux/Demux extra–input).
– the 8–channel CMDX2 board, WLA2, WLA3 and 4XANY_P transponders, in case of CWDM application.
WLAs are 2–channel transponders: only two cards are required to provide the 4–channel configuration.
The 4xANY(_S) board can be used only with MCCs and WLAs. The 4–channels terminal configuration
can be applied also to OCC10, but with the 9.953Gbps (STM–64/OC–192/10GBE WAN) client signal.
In case of the 4xANY_P is provided with a WDM SFP module, the transponder is not required.
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S or CMDX2
user
interfaces
1
M 4 channels
U
X
Client 4 x ANY 4
4xMCC OSC in
Signals
8xOCC 1 D
4 x ANY 2xWLA M
U
4 channels
X
4 OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
Figure 125. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram with CMDX2 or OADM4 board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
See note
OADM 4 channels or CMDX2
*
Equipment Shelf Controller
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch. 30
Transponder ch. 31
Transponder ch. 33
Transponder ch. 32
SPVM (2, _H opt.)

OSMC (0pt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 126. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration

* The ESC board is designed in order to support, in the same board, both Equipment and Shelf Controller
facilities. The ESC unit has two microprocessors, one dedicated for each task.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 209 / 554
554
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM 4 channels or CMDX2

*
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

SPVM_H (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 127. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration with WLA boards
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
*
OADM 4100_M_chx–y_S
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
MCC ch. 30
MCC ch. 31
MCC ch. 32
MCC ch. 33
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
O O O O O O O O
P L H R P P P P P P P P
U U P
S A K A C C C C C C C C
I I S
C N I C C C
# # # # # # # #
49 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
FANS
Figure 128. 4 DWDM channels terminal configuration with 4XANY drawers protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 210 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.2 8 channels terminal with expansion, supervision and user interface
Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf.
This configuration can be designed with
– OMDX8100_M_L1_XS mux/demux (only L1 band is supported), OCC10, MCC and WLA3 trans-
ponders, in case of DWDM application. The same board locations are available with any band (L1,
L2, S1, S2) without expansion
– the 8 channels CMDX2 mux/demux, WLA2 and WLA3 transponders, in case of CWDM application.
The 4xANY_P with the appropriate (CWDM or DWDM) SFP can also be used as a transponder.
When OMDX boards are used to design 8 (DWDM) channels terminals, only one set of channels (L1) can
be provided with SPV. If an upgrading up to 32 channels is required, OMDX8 board can perform it.
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS or CMDX2
1 (30)
M 8 channels
8 x MCC U
8 client X
8 x OCC OSC in
signals 8 (38)
4 x WLA
1 (30)
D
M 8 channels
U
X
8 (38) OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
Figure 129. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)

Transponder ch 30
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 38
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
49
FANS
Figure 130. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal configuration with expansion and supervision
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 211 / 554
554
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

SPVM_H (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 WLA 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 131. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with WLA boards
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
*
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM_H (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
O O O O O O O O
P L H R P P P P P P P P
U U P
S A K A C C C C C C C C
I I S
C N I C C C
# # # # # # # #
49 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
FANS
Figure 132. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with 4xANY_P
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 212 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.3 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface and without expansion
In DWDM application four sets of channels are supported: L1, L2, S1, S2.
By using OADM boards in terminals, SPV is available for each set of channels. However, if an upgrading
up to 32 channels is required, using OADM8 boards is not sufficient (need for expansion).
In CWDM application the 8 available channels are multiplexed by the CMDX2 board.
The 4xANY_P with the appropriate (CWDM or DWDM) SFP can also be used as a transponder.
OADM8100_M_xx_S or CMDX2
1
M 8 channels
8 x MCC U
8 client X
8 x OCC10 OSC in
signals 8
4 x WLA
1
D
M 8 channels
U
X
8 OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
Figure 133. Example of 8 channels line terminal w/o expansion block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM8100_M_L1_XS or CMDX2
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)

Transponder ch 30
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 38
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 134. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion)
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 213 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.4 8 CWDM channels terminal: OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and WLAs connected to CMDX2
This configuration allows to mux/demux to/from the CWDM line two 10 Gbps CWDM wavelengths and six
(up to 2.67Gbps) CWDM ones. The involved boards are

– up to two OCC10_XFP_CWDM boards for the two 10 Gbps CWDM signals

– WLA2s or WLA3s (with CWDM SFP) for the (up to 2.67 Gbps) CWDM signals
– one CMDX2 for the demultiplexing/demultiplexing of the eigth wavelengths:
• the up to 2.67Gbps CWDM channels can be connected to all the CMDX2 ports
• the 10 Gbps CWDM channels can connected only to the 1530nm and the 1550nm ports.
1470nm from WLA CMDX2

1490nm from WLA
1510nm from WLA 8 D/CWDM
1530nm from OCC10 M channels
1550nm from OCC10 U OSC in
X
1570nm from WLA
2x 1590nm from WLA
8 client OCC10_XFP_CWDM 1610nm from WLA
signals plus
1470nm from WLA
3 x WLA
1490nm from WLA 8 D/CWDM
1510nm from WLA channels
D OSC out
1530nm from OCC10 M
1550nm from OCC10 U
1570nm from WLA X
1590nm from WLA

1610nm from WLA
Figure 135. 8 CWDM channels terminal with two 10Gbps chs and six 2.67Gbps chs block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
WLA (with CWDM SFP)

WLA (with CWDM SFP)
WLA (with CWDM SFP)
OCC10_XFP_CWDM
OCC10_XFP_CWDM
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM_H (opt.)
CMDX2
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 136. 8 channels terminal: two OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and three WLAs connected to CMDX2
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 214 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.5 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and supervision
In order to upgrade a 8 DWDM channel terminal to a 16 DWDM channel one, or to design 16 DWDM chan-
nel terminals with SPV, one 8 channel OADM and one 8 channel OMDX boards can be used.
The 4xANY_P with DWDM SFP can also be used as a transponder.
OMDX8100_M_L2
20
8xMCC
M
8 client 8xOCC10 U
X
signals 4xWLA 28
20
D
M
U OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
X
28
UNIT 2 30 OSC in
M
U
LB
X
38 SB
8xMCC 16 channels
unused
8 client 8xOCC10 30 D
signals 4xWLA M LB
U
38 X SB 16 channels
unused
OSC out
UNIT 1
Figure 137. 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SPV managenement (opt)

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L2
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 28
Transponder ch 38
Transponder ch 27
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 26
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 25
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 23
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 22
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 21
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 20
Transponder ch 30
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H U U P
S A K I I S
C N C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 138. 16 DWDM channels terminal (with MCC/OCC10) with expansion and SPV upgradability
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 215 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.6 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLA boards
The 16 DWDM channels terminal configuration can be designed with two 8–channel DWDM mux/demux

(OMDX8100) and eigth WLA3 transponders equipped with DWDM SFP, as described in previous para.
3.2.2.2.5 (refer to the block diagram of Figure 137. for details) and in Figure 140.
The mixed 15–channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires
– one 8–channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 or S1 bands to be respectively connected to
the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
– one 8–channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
– eigth WLA3 or WLA2 transponders, taking into account that WLA2 can only provide CWDM channels
and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
Refer to block diagram of Figure 139. and Figure 140.
1470nm
CH1
OSC in
7 client 4xWLA3 7 CWDM channels
or M
signals U
4xWLA2 CH7 1610nm X
15 channels
mixed
1550nm
(7 DWDM
channels
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS plus
30 CMDX2
M
LB 8 DWDM
U M 1470nm channels)
X SB U
38 X 15 channels
8 client unused D mixed
4xWLA3 M
signals 30 8 DWDM chs in L1 band
D 1610nm U
X
M LB D
U M
38 X SB U 1550nm OSC out
unused X
UNIT 1 DWDM UNIT 2
Figure 139. Example of mixed 15–channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MUX/DEMUX 8 channels
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM_H (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H U U P
S A K I I S
C N C C C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
49
FANS
Figure 140. 16 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (15–channel) terminal with WLA boards
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 216 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.7 24 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (22 chs) terminal
The 24 DWDM channels terminal configuration with single channel transponders (MCC, OCC10,
4xANY_P) requires two shelves. The block diagram is similar to that of Figure 143. without the S1 band and
the shelves configuration is similar to that of Figure 144. without S1 band transponders and mux/demux.
The 24 DWDM channels terminal configuration with two–channel transponders requires twelve WLA3s
and three OMDX8100 (L1, L2, S2 bands) equipped in only one shelf. The block diagram is similar to that
of Figure 143. without the S1 band (chs 52 to 60) and the shelf configuration is shown in Figure 142.
The mixed 22–channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires
– two 8–channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 and S1 bands to be respectively connected
to the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
– one 8–channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
– eleven WLA3 or WLA2 transponders, taking into account that WLA2 can only provide CWDM chan-
nels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
CMDX2
CH1 1470nm
3xWLA3
6 client
or 6 CWDM channels OSC in
signals
3xWLA2 CH6 1610nm
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
30 M LB 22 channels
U M mixed
38 X SB U
8 client X
CWDM (6 CWDM
unused
signals 4xWLA3
1550nm channels
8 DWDM chs in L1 band
30 D LB D MUX plus
M 16 DWDM
38 U
X
SB MU DEMUX channels)
unused X DWDM
22 channels
mixed
OMDX8100_M_S1
52 M
U
60 X
8 client
4xWLA3 1530nm OSC out
signals 8 DWDM chs in S1 band
52 D
M
U
60 X
DWDM
Figure 141. Example of mixed 22–channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM_H (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H U U P
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
S A K I I S
C N C C C
49
FANS
Figure 142. 24 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (22–channel) terminal with WLA boards
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 217 / 554
554
3.2.2.2.8 32 DWDM channels terminal + supervision with two stages amplification
2 shelves are needed for this configuration.

OMDX8100_M_L2

20
8 x MCC M
8 client U
signals 8 x OCC10 X
28
4 x WLA
20
D
M
U OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
X OAC OAC
28
UNIT 3 30 OSC in
EXP
M LB
8 x MCC U M
8 client X
SB U OFA OFA
38 X
signals 8 x OCC10
32 channels
4 x WLA LB D
30 D M OFA OFA
M SB U
U X
X
38
OSC out
42 UNIT 1
8 x MCC M
8 client U
50 X
signals 8 x OCC10
4 x WLA 42
D
M
UNIT 4 50 U
X
52
OMDX8100_M_S2
8 x MCC M
8 client U
X
signals 8 x OCC10 60 UNIT 2
4 x WLA
52
D
M
U
X
60
OMDX8100_M_S1
Figure 143. 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC block diagram (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 218 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC) Equipment Shelf Controller
2
L
2
A
N
26
L
3
A
N
3
L
A
N
49
49
OMDX8100_M_S2 OMDX8100_M_L2
4
4
Transponder ch 50 Transponder ch 28
5
5
6
6
7 8
7 8
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
K AI
I
H R
A
R
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
FANS
FANS
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
I I
C C
U U
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
Figure 144. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration

S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
219 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
25
S
P
C
L
2
A
N
3
49
4
WLA
5
WLA
6
WLA
WLA
7 8
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
I
K A
H R
FANS
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
554
WLA
8DG 17415 AA AA
I I
C C
U U
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM_H (opt.)
S
P
C
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 145. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 1 stage OAC configuration with WLA
220 / 554
3.2.2.3 OADM and Back–to–Back Terminals
In the following configurations we can plug MVAC boards in slots 4 to 11 and/or 14 to 21. Each
MVAC is used to replace a transponder in the case of a channel loop or to adjust pass–through
port losses.
In OADM configuration the single–channel transponders are in adjacent slots (West in even, East in odd)
then the board location is the same with or without protection. For configuration without protection, just
remove the OPC boards.
3.2.2.3.1 4 channels OADM
4 client signals 4 client signals

OADM4100_M_chy–z_S OADM4100_M_chy–z_S
OSC out OSC in

D M
M U
U X
X 8x 8x
MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
or or
4x 4x D
M
U
WLA WLA M
U
X X
OSC in OSC out
WEST 2.66 Gb/s back–panel EAST

electrical links (MCC only)
Figure 146. 4 channels OADM block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S (West)
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S (East)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O H R P
S A P P P P K A S
C N C C C C I C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 147. 4 channels back–to–back terminal / OADM

Every combination of east and west sets of channels is possible.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 221 / 554
554
3.2.2.3.2 8 channels OADM
The 8 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with

– two 8–channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100) or two 8–channel DWDM OADM (OADM8100) or

two 8–channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)

– 16 transponders (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY_P): 8 channels are connected to the west side and the other
8 channels are connected to the east side (via OPCs in case of protected channels, directly for unpro-
tected ones). For the 8 channels OADM with WLAs see Figure 154. to Figure 156.
– 8 OPCs, located below the main transponder.
Both DWDM and CWDM channels are available. From Figure 148. to Figure 153. are shown DWDM sys-
tems.
With optical protection of each channel (neither SPV nor EXP)

8 add & drop protected client signals
OMDX8100_M_x OPCs OMDX8100_M_y

Mx/DMx 8 ch.
(n–8) channels
n channels D M n channels
M U
U 8x 8x X
X
MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
WEST EAST
or or
4x 4x D
n channels M
WLA WLA M n channels
U U
X X
(n–8) channels
Figure 148. 8–channel OADM w/ protection block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS West
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS East
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 30W
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 33W
Transponder ch 35W
Transponder ch 36W
Transponder ch 37W
Transponder ch 38W
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)

Transponder ch 30E
Transponder ch 31E
Transponder ch 32E
Transponder ch 33E
Transponder ch 35E
Transponder ch 36E
Transponder ch 37E
Transponder ch 38E
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O R O O O O P
P P P P H A P P
S A K P P S
C N C C C C I C C C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder.
Figure 149. 8 OADM protected channels
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 222 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
OSC out
OSC in
25
S
P
C
SB
L
2
A
N
OSMC (0pt.) LB
SB
49
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
4
WEST
Transponder ch 30W
X
U
D
M
X
U
5
M
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30E
6
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 31E
7 8
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 32E
or
4x
8x
Transponder ch 33W
WLA
MCC /
Only symmetrical configuration can be provided.
OCC10
client signals
8 add&drop
Transponder ch 33E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
I
K A
H R
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
FANS
With expansion and supervision upgrade capabilities
or
Transponder ch 35W
4x
8x
WLA
MCC /
OCC10
Transponder ch 35E
Transponder ch 36W
client signals
8 add&drop
Transponder ch 36E
Transponder ch 37W
Transponder ch 37E
X
X
U
D
U
M
M
Transponder ch 38W
554
Transponder ch 38E
8DG 17415 AA AA
Figure 150. 8–channel OADM w/o protection block diagram
EAST
Figure 151. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
LB
SB
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)

SB
S
P
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OSC in
OSC out
223 / 554
With supervision and without expansion upgrade capabilities
Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2.
xx stands for the band used: L1, L2, S1, S2.

OADM8100_M_xx_S 8 add&drop 8 add&drop OADM8100_M_xx_S
client signals client signals
OSC out
OSC in
D M
M
U 8x 8x U
X
X MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
or or
4x 4x
WLA WLA D
M M
U U
X X
OSC in OSC out
WEST EAST
Figure 152. 8–channel OADM w/o protection block diagram/2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM8100_M_xx_S West
OADM8100_M_xx_S East
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)

Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5E
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L R U U P
H A I I
S A K I S
C N C C C
49
FANS
Figure 153. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 224 / 554
554
8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
In case of the 8 DWDM channels OADM configuration is required, two OADM8100 or OMDX8100 mux/de-
mux and 8 WLA3s with DWDM SFP have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is required, WLA3CDOP boards have to be used.

In case of the optical protection is not required WLA3CD boards have to be used.
In case of the 8 CWDM channels OADM configuration is required, two CMDX2 (8 CWDM channels mux/
demux), 8 WLA2 or 8 WLA3s with CWDM SFPs have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is required, WLA3CDOP or WLA2M_OP boards have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is not required WLA3CD or WLA2M boards have to be used.
* up to 32 channels for DWDM systems

* up to 8 channels for CWDM systems
OMDX8100 or OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or OADM8100 or
CMDX2 CMDX2
(n–8) channels (only for DWDM)
OSC in OSC out
ch1W ch1E D
M M
U U
X ch8W ch8E X
n channels* n channels*
D ch1W ch1E M
M U
U X
X ch8W ch8E
OSC out OSC in
WEST EAST
8xWLA2M_OP
8xWLA3CD_OP
8 client
signals
Figure 154. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ protection block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 225 / 554
554
* up to 32 channels for DWDM systems
* up to 8 channels for CWDM systems
OMDX8100 or OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or OADM8100 or
CMDX2 CMDX2


OSC in OSC out
ch1W ch1E D
M M
U U
X ch8W ch8E X
n channels* (n–8) channels (only for DWDM) n channels*
D ch1W ch1E M
M U
U X
X ch8W ch8E
OSC out OSC in
WEST EAST
8xWLA2M 8xWLA2M
8xWLA3CD 8xWLA3CD
8 client 8 client
signals signals
Figure 155. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/o protection block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM2 (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 156. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 226 / 554
554
8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS West
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS East
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
MCC cgh 38 E
OSMC (0pt.)
MCC ch 30 W
MCC ch 31 W
MCC ch 32 W
MCC ch 33 W
MCC ch 35 W
MCC ch 36 W
MCC ch 37 W
MCC ch 38 W
MCC ch 30 E
MCC ch 31 E
MCC ch 32 E
MCC ch 33 E
MCC ch 35 E
MCC ch 36 E
MCC ch 37 E
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O P
P P P P H P P
S A K P P S
C N C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
*
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O R O O O O O O O O U U P
S A P P P P P P A P P P P P P P P I I S
C N C C C C C C I C C C C C C C C C C C
# # # # # # # # # # # # # #
49 2 1 3 4 2 1 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
FANS
Figure 157. 8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 227 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
WEST
03
8 channels
8 channels
25
S
P
C
L
2
A
N
OSMC (0pt.)
OSC in
OSC out
49
OADM8100_M_xx_S West
4
Transponder ch 8W
5
6
OADM8100_M_x_S
Transponder ch 7W
8
1
1
8
8 client signals
7 8
Transponder ch 6W
or
4x
8x
WLA
MCC /
OCC10
Transponder ch 5W
3.2.2.3.3 8 channels west and 4 channels east
K
H
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
or
2x
4x
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

MCC /
FANS
OCC10
P
C
O
Transponder ch 4W
1
4
1
Transponder ch 4E 4
P
C
O
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Figure 158. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM

4 client signals
P
C
O
Transponder ch 1W
554
OSC in
OSC out
Transponder ch 1E
8DG 17415 AA AA
OADM4100_M_chy–z_S East
OADM4100_M_chy–z_S
SPV managenement
S
P
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
EAST
4 channels
4 channels
228 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
OSMC (0pt.)
3
A
N
3
N
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS West OADM4100_M_chx–y_S
A P
4
C
P
supervision and expansion.
L O
C
4
O
Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 4W
5
5
Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 4E
P
6
C
P
6
O
C
O
P
C
P
O
C
O
7 8
7 8
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
P
C
P
O
C
O
OAC / OAC_L (opt.) OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
K AI
I
H R
FANS
FANS
A P
C
R O
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 1W
3.2.2.3.4 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion
554
Transponder ch 1E
8DG 17415 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS East OADM4100_M_chx–y_S
I I
C C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
The same board location is available with any band (L1, L2, S1, S2) without expansion.
S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 159. 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration
The example of Figure 159. describes a configuration using the L1 band mux/demux (OMDX8100) with
229 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
OSMC (0pt.)
3
A
N
3
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_S2 West OMDX8100_M_L1_XS West
A P
N C
4
L O
P
C
O
supervision and expansion.
5
5
P
6
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
7 8
P
7 8
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
H R
FANS
FANS
A P
I C
R O
K AI P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O

P
C
O
P
C
O

3.2.2.3.5 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_S2 East OMDX8100_M_L1_XS East
I I
C C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 160. 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion configuration
The same board location is available with any band (L1, L2, S1, S2) without expansion (see Figure 161. )
The example of Figure 160. describes a configuration using the L1 band mux/demux (OMDX8100) with
230 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
OSMC (0pt.)
3
A
N
3
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_yy_West OADM8100_M_xx_S West
A P
N C
4
L O
P
C
O
yy has to be different from xx.
5
5
P
6
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
7 8
P
7 8
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
xx and yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
Three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
H R
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
FANS
FANS
A P
I C
R O
K AI P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
3.2.2.3.6 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
P
C
O
P
C
O
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
C
OMDX8100_M_yy_East OADM8100_M_xx_S East

I I
C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 161. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration
231 / 554
3.2.2.3.7 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
The 16 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with four 8–channel DWDM mux/demux

(OMDX8100) and 16 WLA3 (protected or unprotected) transponders equipped with DWDM SFP.
In unprotected configuration, sixteen channels are transmitted on west side, by means of 8 unprotected
WLAs (WLA3CD), and the other sixteen channels are transmitted on east side, by means of the other 8
unprotected WLAs.
In protected configuration the sixteen channels are transmitted both on the west and east sides, via 8 pro-
tected WLAs (WLA3CDOP).
The mixed 15–channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires:
– two 8–channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 or S1 bands to be respectively connected to
the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
– two 8–channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
– 16 WLAs in unprotected configuration, 15 WLAs in protected configuration, taking into account that
WLA2 can only provide CWDM channels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
WLA3CDOP and WLA2M_OP have to be used only if the optical protection is required.
WLA3CD and WLA2M have to be used only if the optical protection is not required.
7 CWDM 7 CWDM
1470nm 1470nm
CH1 CH1 OSC in
4x 4x
OSC out W W
D 7 CWDM chs 7 CWDM chs M
M L L U
U
15 chs X 1610nm CH7 A A CH7 1610nm X
15 chs
mixed mixed
1550nm 1550nm
(7 DWDM (7 DWDM
channels channels
plus CMDX2 30 DWDM
D LB D CMDX2 plus
8 DWDM M 30 M 8 DWDM
M LB
channels) 1470nm U SB U U M 1470nm channels)
X 38 4x 4x
15 chs
X 38 X SB U
15 chs
unused W W X
mixed M 8 chs DWDM L L unused 8 chs D mixed
U 1610nm A A 1610nmM
X (L1 band) M 30 30 D (L1 band) U
M LB 3 3 M LB D X
U M
U U
OSC in X SB X 38 38 X SB U 1550nm OSC out
1550nm X
unused unused
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
8 DWDM 8 DWDM
Figure 162. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 232 / 554
554
7 CWDM
client signals
7x
1470nm W 1470nm
CH1 L CH1 OSC in

A
OSC out 2
D 7 CWDM chs 7 CWDM chs M
M (3) U
U
X 1610nm CH7 l CH7 1610nm X
15 chs 15 chs
mixed O mixed
P
1550nm 1550nm
(7 DWDM (7 DWDM
channels channels
plus CMDX2 30 8x DWDM
D LB
D CMDX2 plus
8 DWDM M 30 M 8 DWDM
M W LB
channels) 1470nm U SB
U
L U M 1470nm channels)
X 38
15 chs X A 38 X SB U
15 chs
unused X
mixed 3 unused D mixed
M 8 chs DWDM C 8 chs 1610nmM
U 1610nm (L1 band) (L1 band) U
X M 30 D 30 D
LB D X
LB M
M U l M
O U
OSC in U SB X 38 38 X SB U 1550nm OSC out
1550nm X P X
unused unused
8 DWDM
client signals
Figure 163. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM2 (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 164. 16 channels OADM or mix C/DWDM (15–channel) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 233 / 554
554
3.2.2.3.8 24 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (22 chs) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
The 22 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with six 8–channel DWDM mux/demux
(OMDX8100) and 24 WLA3 (protected or unprotected) transponders equipped with DWDM SFP.

In unprotected configuration, 24 channels are transmitted on west side, by means of 12 unprotected WLAs

(WLA3CDOP), and the other 24 channels are transmitted on east side, by means of the other 12 unpro-
tected WLAs.
In protected configuration the 24 channels are transmitted both on the west and east sides, via 12 pro-
tected WLAs (WLA3CDOP).
The mixed 22–channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires:
– four 8–channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 and S1 bands to be respectively connected
to the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
– two 8–channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
– twenty–two WLA3s both in protected and unprotected configuration, taking into account that WLA2
can only provide CWDM channels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
WLA3CDOP and WLA2M_OP have to be used only if the optical protection is required.
WLA3CD and WLA2M have to be used only if the optical protection is not required.
6 CWDM 6 CWDM
CMDX2 CMDX2
1470nm CH1 CH1 1470nm
3x 3x
6 CWDM chs W W 6 CWDM chs
L L
1610nm CH6 A A CH6 1610nm OSC in
OSC out
22 chs D 30 DWDM 22 chs

mixed D LB 30 mixed
1550nm M M M
U LB
U SB U M
X 38 1550nm
CWDM X 38 X SB U CWDM
8 chs unused X
(6CWDM unused (6 CWDM
channels MUX (L1 band) DWDM MUX channels
plus M 30 30 D 8 chs plus
16 DWDM DEMUX 1550nm M LB M LB D
U
U
U M 1550nm DEMUX16 DWDM
channels) SB X 38 8x 8x SB U channels)
X 38 X
X
unused W W unused
L L
22 chs A A 22 chs
mixed 52 3 3 52 mixed
D M
1530nm 1530nm
M U
U 60 X
X 60
OSC in 8 chs OSC out
(S1 band)
M 52 52 D
1530nm M 1530nm
U
U
X 60 X
60
OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_S1
16 DWDM 16 DWDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 165. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 234 / 554
554
6 CWDM
client signals
CMDX2 6x CMDX2
W
1470nm 1470nm
CH1 CH1
L
A
6 CWDM chs 2 6 CWDM chs
(3) OSC in
1610nm CH6 l CH6 1610nm
OSC out O
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS P OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
22 chs D 30 DWDM 22 chs

mixed D LB 30 mixed
1550nm M M M
U LB
U SB U M
X 38 1550nm
CWDM X 38 X SB U CWDM
8 chs unused X
(6CWDM unused (6 CWDM
channels MUX (L1 band) DWDM MUX channels
plus M 30 16 x 30 D 8 chs plus
LB M LB D
16 DWDM DEMUX 1550nm M U W M 1550nm DEMUX16 DWDM
channels) U L U channels)
X SB X 38 38 X SB U
A X
unused 3 unused
C
22 chs D 22 chs
mixed D 52 l 52 M mixed
1530nm 1530nm
M O U
U P 60 X
X 60
OSC in 8 chs OSC out
(S1 band)
M 52 52 D
1530nm M 1530nm
U
U
X 60 X
60
16 DWDM
client signals
Figure 166. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 235 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
25
25
S
P
S
P
C
C
Equipment Shelf Controller Equipment Shelf Controller
L
2
L
2
A
A
N
N
3
3
49
49
OMDX8100_M_S1 W MUX/DEMUX 8 channels
4
4
WLA WLA
5
5
WLA
6
6
WLA WLA
WLA
7 8
7 8
WLA WLA
WLA
WLA WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
I
I
K A
K A
H R
H R
FANS
FANS
WLA WLA
WLA
WLA WLA
WLA
WLA WLA
WLA
WLA WLA
554
WLA
8DG 17415 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_S1 E MUX/DEMUX 8 channels
I I
I I
C C
C C
U U
U U
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM2 (opt.)
S
P
S
P
C
C
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 167. 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ or w/o protection
236 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESC (SC) Equipment Shelf Controller

OSMC (opt.)
–
–
ED
49
49
OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
S A A P
S A A P
C N N C
C N N C
P L L O
P L L O
Transponder ch 20 W Transponder ch 30 W
Transponder ch 20 E Transponder ch 30 E
P
P
C
C
O
O
03
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
OAC / OAC_L OAC / OAC_L
H R
FANS
FANS
OAC / OAC_L OAC / OAC_L
A P
P
I C
K AI C
R O
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
4 shelves are needed for this configuration.
OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
I I S
U U P
I I S
U U P
C C C
C C C
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
single channel transponders (MCC and OCC10).
be housed in only two shelves by using WLA3 boards.

one OAC on west side and one OAC on east side
ESC (SC) ESC (SC)

3.2.2.3.9 32 channels OADM/back–to–back terminals
49
49
supervision and amplification. In this configuration there are
S A A P
S A A P
C N N C
C N N C
P L L O
P L L O
P
P
C
C
O
Transponder ch 53 W O Transponder ch 43 W
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
FANS
FANS
A P
A P
I C
I C
R O
R O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
Figure 168. 32 protected channels back–to–back w/ supervision and protection and one OAC per side
The 32 channels back–to–back configuration with or without the optical protection of each channel can
Herebelow is shown a 32 channels back–to–back configuration with the optical protection of each channel,
237 / 554
I I S
U U P
I I S
U U P
C C C
C C C
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
3.2.2.4 Repeater with supervision
OAC1 OAC2
OSC OSC


VOA Attenuator
Preamp or DCU Booster
WDM WDM
OSC OSC
Line extraction Line
insertion
Attenuator
Booster or DCU Preamp VOA
OSC SPVM OSC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OAC
OAC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
P L H R P
S A K AI S
C N C
49
FANS
Figure 169. Repeater with supervision

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 238 / 554
554
3.2.2.5 Configurations with MVAC
MVAC boards can be used for three main applications:

– transponder emphasis:
• pre–emphasis (at WDM Tx output)

• post–emphasis (at WDM Rx input)

– channel loop power adjustement
– band loop power adjustement:
• extra–loop
• expansion–loop
The default configuration depends on the configuration.
3.2.2.5.1 Terminal configuration without protection
In this case the MVACs are used for transponder emphasis only.
The MVACs are placed in the adjacent slot of the concerned transponder.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
MVAC ch 33 (emp)
MVAC ch 35 (emp)
MVAC ch 37 (emp)
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 38
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
MVAC ch 30 (emp)
MVAC ch 31 (emp)
MVAC ch 32 (emp)
MVAC ch 36 (emp)
MVAC ch 38 (emp)
Transponder ch 30
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 33
OSMC (0pt.)
24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I
C C
S
C N N C
49
FANS
Figure 170. 8 channels terminal configuration with MVAC boards
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
MVAC
MVAC
MVAC
MVAC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I
C C
S
C N N C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
49
FANS
Figure 171. 4 channels terminal configuration with 4xANY_P (first channels of an 8–channel band)
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 239 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
OSMC (0pt.)
3
A
N
3
L
A
N
49
49
OMDX8100_M_S2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
4
4
5
5
MVAC ch 42 (emp) MVAC ch 30 (emp)
6
6
7 8
7 8
K AI
I
H R
A
R
FANS
FANS
Figure 172. 16 channels terminal with MVAC boards
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
I I
C C
U U
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
In a 16 channels terminal we must add a second shelf to place the MVAC boards, as shown in Figure 172.
240 / 554
3.2.2.5.2 OADM configuration without protection
a ) MVAC for transponder emphasis

OADM configuration (with or without protection) use adjacent slots for transponders. In this case the MVAC
boards must be placed in an expansion shelf under the pair of transponders considered.
The even slot will be used by default for the pre–emphasis of the two transponders
The odd slot will be used by default for the post–emphasis of the two transponders
Should the pre–emphasis not be required, half the MVAC boards are saved.
b ) MVAC for channel loop

For a loop connection we remove a pair of transponders and place an MVAC in the even slot.
c ) MVAC for extra or expansion loop

For an extra or expansion loop, the default slots for MVAC boards are:
– MVAC for extra loop; slot 5, 13 (by default) or 21
– MVAC for expansion loop: slot 4, 12 (by default) or 20
N.B. the slots 12 and 13 of a first expansion shelf are available only if the configuration does not need
double stage amplifiers at both sides of the OADM (= OADM inside OFA inter–stage).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
MVAC ch 32 (ch loop)

Transponder ch 31 W
Transponder ch 35 W
Transponder ch 36 W
Transponder ch 38 W
Transponder ch 31 E
Transponder ch 35 E
Transponder ch 36 E
Transponder ch 38 E
Transponder ch 30 W
Transponder ch 30 E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I S
C C C
C N N
49
FANS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC)
MVAC ch 38 (post–emp)
MVAC ch 38 (pre–emp)
MVAC ch 35 (post emp)
MVAC (extra loop)
MVAC (exp loop)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 * See notes
P L R P
S A A S
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
C N I C
49
FANS
Figure 173. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM inside OFA inter–stage
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 241 / 554
554
Notes on Figure 173.
– MVAC in slot 4 (and 6) of expansion shelf is used for the pre–emphasis of ch 30 (and ch 31)
– MVAC in slot 5 (and 7) of expansion shelf is used for the post–emphasis of ch 30 (and ch 31)
– MVAC in slot 12 of expansion shelf is used for expansion loop optical power adjustment

– MVAC in slot 13 of expansion shelf is used for extra loop optical power adjustment.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS

Transponder ch 31 W
Transponder ch 35 W
Transponder ch 36 W
Transponder ch 38 W
Transponder ch 31 E
Transponder ch 35 E
Transponder ch 36 E
Transponder ch 38 E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
OSMC (0pt.)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I S
C C C
C N N
49
FANS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC)
MVAC ch 35 (post emp)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
MVAC (extra–loop)
MVAC (exp loop)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 * See notes
P L R P
S A A S
C N I C
49
FANS
Figure 174. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM between 2 double stages OFAs
Notes on Figure 174.

– ch 30 is a channel loop connection. The transponders in slots 4–5 are replaced by an MVAC in slot
4
– MVAC in slot 6 of expansion shelf is used for the pre–emphasis of ch 31
– MVAC in slot 7 of expansion shelf is used for the post–emphasis of ch 31
– MVAC in slot 4 of expansion shelf is used for expansion loop optical power adjustment
– MVAC in slot 5 of expansion shelf is used for extra loop optical power adjustment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 242 / 554
554
3.2.2.6 4 x ANY node configuration
Without drawers protection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I S
C N N C
49
FANS
Figure 175. 4 x ANY node configuration without drawers protection
With drawers protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O H R O O O O O O O O U U P
S A P P P P P P P P K A P P P P P P P P I I S
C N C C C C C C C C I C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
Figure 176. 4 x ANY node configuration with drawers protection
OPC location for drawers protection

– drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42

– drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
– drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.
4xANY boards can be partially protected (drawers 3 & 4 for the 1st couple, drawers 1 & 2 for the 2nd couple).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 243 / 554
554
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples
The 1696MS_C must be able to set many different configurations
– Terminals

• up to 12 unprotected channels Line terminal (with/without supervision)
• up to 8 channels Line terminal with OAC (with/without supervision) in one shelf
– Back–to–back terminals or OADM with/without protection

• up to 4 channels back–to–back terminal or OADM
• asymmetrical configurations are allowed (i.e. 2 channels west and 1 channel east)
– CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
– In Line Repeater
– Supervision manager.
These configurations are preferably exploited with a 1696MS_C but they can be implemented
in a 1696MS, too.
• Remote 4xAny (unprotected)

• Remote 4xAny + Protection MCC on 1310 nm or 1550 nm
• Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
• OADM 1 channel with or without protection
• Remote 4xANY + MCC
• One protected transponder (one signal on 2 channels)
• Back–to–back 4xANY
• SPV manager (used to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring).
• 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
– 1696MS or 1696MS_C configured to connect a CPE or a 1696MS_C in a small ring

• 1696MS or1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised black–and–white signal
• 1696MS or 1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised colored signal
• 1696MS or 1696MS connected to a 1696MS_C located in a small ring
• 1696MS as a remotization
– Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together

• With supervision through optical link (DCC)
• With supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.
N.B. All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 244 / 554
554
3.2.3.1 Examples of Line Terminal configurations
3.2.3.1.1 4–channel terminal without SPV
The 4–channel terminal block diagram is shown in Figure 125. on page 209.
6 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS PSC(2) 12
5 Transponder ch 4 HK 11
F A N _C
4 Transponder ch 3 RAI 10
3 Transponder ch 2 9
2 Transponder ch 1 LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 177. 4–channel terminal w/o SPV configuration
3.2.3.1.2 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OAC OAC
UNUSED L2
30 OSC in
EXP
M LB
8x U M
X U OFA OFA
MCC / 38 SB X
8 client OCC10 UNUSED 8 channels
signals UNUSED L2 LB D
or 30 M
D
U
OFA OFA
4x M SB
U X
WLA X UNUSED
38
OSC out
6 PSC2 12
F A N _C
13 1 I–Link_S PSC2 7
6 PSC2 12
F A N _C
6 I–Link_M PSC(2) 12
5 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM2, SPVM_H RAI 10

3 OAC / OAC_L (optional) 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2 OAC / OAC_L (optional) LAN_Q 8

13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 178. 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 245 / 554
554
3.2.3.1.3 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC
6 PSC2 12
5 WLA 11

F A N _C

WLA

4 10
3 WLA 9
2 WLA 8
5 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS or CMDX2 HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM_H RAI 10
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 179. 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 246 / 554
554
3.2.3.1.4 12 unprotected channels terminal without SPV
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S
1
4x M
U
MCC / X
OCC10 4
4 client
signals or 1
2x D
M
WLA U OADM8100_L1_X
X
4
30 EXP
M LB
8x U M
X U
MCC / 38 SB X
8 client OCC10 UNUSED
signals or LB D
30 D M
4x U
M SB X
WLA U
X UNUSED
38
6 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S PSC2 12
F A N _C
6 OADM8100_L1_X PSC2 12
F A N _C
5 Transponder ch 33 HK 11
F A N _C
4 Transponder ch 32 RAI 10
2 Transponder ch 30 LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 180. 12–channel terminal without SPV

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 247 / 554
554
3.2.3.1.5 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and OAC
For configuration description and block diagram refer to para. 3.2.2.2.6 on page 216.

6
MUX/DEMUX 8 channels PSC2 12
5 WLA 11
F A N _C 4 WLA 10
3 WLA 9
2 WLA 8
6
MUX/DEMUX 8 channels PSC2 12
5 WLA 11
F A N _C
4 WLA 10
3 WLA 9
2 WLA 8
5 HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM_H RAI 10
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 181. 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 248 / 554
554
3.2.3.2 OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC
4 add & drop protected client signals

OPC OPC OPC OPC
OAC OADM4100_M_chx–y_S OADM4100_M_chx–y_S OAC

OSC out Mx/DMx 4ch Mx/DMx 4ch OSC in
n–4 ch
D M
OFA M U OFA
U X
X 4x 4x
MCC / MCC /
n channels OCC10 OCC10 n channels
or or
2x 2x
D
M WLA WLA M
OFA U U OFA
X X
OSC in
n–4 channels OSC out
WEST EAST
6 PSC2 12
5 Transponder ch 4 W 11
F A N _C
4 Transponder ch 4 E OPC 10
6 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S PSC2 12
F A N _C
5 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM2 / SPVM_H RAI 10

3 OAC / OAC_L (opt) 9
2 OAC / OAC_L (opt) LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 182. OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 249 / 554
554
3.2.3.3 CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
3.2.3.3.1 Remote 4xANY
In this case, OADM is not needed since the data signal is carried by a ”Black & white” 1310 nm wavelength.

The OSC is extracted to/from the 1310 nm data signal on a special 1310/1510 filter SPV_F_C card. OSC
is managed by the SPVM board.
1550 nm
MCC MCC
1310 nm
SPVF SPVM
1696MS SPVM UI
1310 nm
OSC
to/from 1510 nm
SPVF
4xANY
1696MSPAN SPVM
SPVM 1310 nm
1310 nm
4xANY
1696MS_C SPV_F_C
1310
CPE UI
UI
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
Equipment Shelf Controller PSC
Figure 183. Remote 4xANY
N.B. All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
3.2.3.3.2 Two remote 4xANY
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
4xANY
LAN_Q
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 184. Two remote 4xANY
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 250 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.3 Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY wihtout protection
The situation is the same with or without the 4xANY board : the signal transmitted from the CPE to the
1696MS in a core ring or in a point–to–point configuration is colored and carries a 1510 nm OSC.
The Remote MCC is connected to the Metro ring via one MCC or directly from the WDM path. This configu-
ration allows a greater Span Budget.
1550 nm
MCC MCC
1310 nm
SPVF SPVM
1696MS SPVM
SPVF
SPVM 1550 nm
UI
MCC
1696MS_C 1310 nm OSC
4xANY 1510 nm
4xANY
Colored signal
MCC
SPVM
UI
SPV_F–C
1550 UI
CPE
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
MCC LAN_Q
Figure 185. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 251 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.4 Remote 4xANY plus MCC
In this configuration, the CPE supports 2 data channels, one from the 4xANY board (B&W), and one from
the MCC (colored). The SPV_F_1310_1550 enables to insert/extract them with an OSC. Thus the fiber

carries 3 wavelengths : 1510 (OSC), 15xx (transponders with coloured interface) and 1310 (4xANY with

B&W aggregate interface).
MCC+4xANY
SPV_F
MCC
SPVM
1310_1550
UI
1550 nm + 1310 nm + OSC CPE
4xANY
SPV_F
1310+1550
OSC
SPVM 1310 nm 1550 nm
4xANY MCC
1696MS_C UI
UI UI
SPVM PSC
SPV_F_1310_1550 HK
F A N _C
MCC RAI
4xANY LAN_Q
Figure 186. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 252 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.5 One protected transponder
In this configuration OPC card is used to protect transponder cards. The same signal is launched into the
fiber on two different wavelengths. This configuration is used in a point–to–point link.
One protected transponder on the same fiber (2 wavelengths) with OADM 2–channel
MCC/OCC10
User
OPC interface
To/from CPE
SPVM
Not from 1696 ring
MCC/OCC10
OPC
User
interface
CPE
SPVM
1696MS_C
OADM1
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
OPC
User
PSC
OADM1100_M_xx_S HK
F A N _C
SPVM RAI
MCC /OCC10 spare OPC
MCC/OCC10 main LAN_Q
SPVM must be set in slot 4 of the master shelf when it is linked to OADM board
Figure 187. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In this case an OADM is needed to multiplex the main signal and the spare in one fiber if only one fiber
is used. When two fibers are available, the main and spare signals do not need to be launched in the same
fiber, and they also do not need to have different wavelengths.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 253 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.6 Back–to–back 4xANY
This configuration is designed to drop/(insert) some of the 4 services carried by the 4XANY functionality.
The others are by–passed to a second 4XANY board to be launched to their destination. In the following

figure, 2 services are dropped (inserted) and 2 are passed–through.

N.B. Less than 4 services can be carried.
4xANY 4xANY
UI
SPV_F_C
4xANY
4xANY
SPVM
SPVM
SPV_F_C
UI
CPE
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
4xANY
LAN_Q
Figure 188. Back–to–back 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and by–pass the oth-
ers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 254 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.7 Remote unprotected MCC
1550 nm 1696MS Transp

Transp
Transp
OADM
Transp 4 ch East
OADM SPVF
4 ch West
SPVM
SPVM
1550 nm + OSC
SPVF
OSC
SPVM
Transponder
ch.2E
1696MS_C
SPVM PSC
HK
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
Transponder ch 1 LAN_Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S W
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S E
Transponder ch 1 W
Transponder ch 2 W
Transponder ch 3 W
Transponder ch 4 W
Transponder ch 1 E
Transponder ch 2 E
Transponder ch 3 E
Transponder ch 4 E
SPVM2 / SPVM_H
SPVM2 /SPVM_H
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L R S P
H A P U U S
S A K I V I I
C N C
49
FANS 45:
SPV Filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 189. Remote unprotected MCC
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 255 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.8 1 protected channel OADM
1696MS_C

SPVM
1550 nm OADM1
OADM1
1310 nm
OPC
User
OADM1100_M_chx_S PSC
OADM1100_M_chx_S RAI
F A N _C
SPVM HK
Transponder W OPC
Transponder E LAN_Q
ESC PSC
Figure 190. OADM 1 channel protected back–to–back
3.2.3.3.9 Remote 4xANY+ Protected MCC
The remote 4xANY + protected MCC is the combination with the 2 MCC protected at each other with an
OPC on different NE, and use of the 4xANY on the User side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 256 / 554
554
1696MS 1696MS 1550 nm
1550 nm
MCC MCC MCC

OADM OADM OADM OADM

SPVF SPVF
SPVM SPVM
SPVM SPVM
SPVF SPVF
SPVM 1310 nm on WDM side
MCC MCC
1310 nm
OPC
4xANY
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 191. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm
1696MS 1550 nm OADM

1550 nm
MCC
OADM
OADM OADM
SPVF SPVF
SPVM SPVM
SPVM SPVM
1696MS
1550 nm + OSC
1550 nm + OSC
SPVF SPVF
OSC
SPVM 1550 on WDM side
MCC MCC
1310 nm
OPC
4xANY
1696MS_C UI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 192. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 257 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.10 2–channel Line Terminal
The line Terminal 2 Channels use OADM 2 in order to deliver 2 different channels.

OADM2
OSC
SPVM λ1 λ2
1696MS_C
UI UI
PSC
OADM2100_M_chx–y_S HK
F A N _C
SPVM2 / SPVM_H RAI

Transponder ch 2
Transponder ch 1 LAN_Q
ESC PSC
Figure 193. 2 channels Line Terminal
3.2.3.3.11 4–channel Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision
MUX/DEMUX 4 channels PSC

SPVM_H HK
F A N _C
WLA RAI
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (optional) LAN_Q
ESC PSC
Figure 194. 4 channels Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 258 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.12 Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
Rx
OADM2100_M_chx–y_S SPVM
Tx #1 OSC in
ch1
Tx
Rx
#2 MCC
Tx M
4xANY U
OPC Rx ch1
Tx #3 ch2 X
Rx
#1
Rx
Tx #4
OPC
#2
2 channels
OPC
#3 Rx
Tx #1
ch1 D
Tx
Rx
OPC Tx #2 MCC M
#4 4xANY U
Rx
#3 ch2 ch2 X
Tx
Rx Rx
Tx #4
OSC out
6 PSC2 12
5 OPC #4 11
F A N _C
4 4xANY OPC #3 10
3 OPC #1 9
4xANY
2 OPC #2 8
5 OADM2100_M_chx–y_S HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM2 / SPVM_H RAI 10

3 MCC ch2 9
2 MCC ch1 LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 195. Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 259 / 554
554
3.2.3.3.13 SPV manager
The SPV manager is used only when the customer want to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring.
This configuration allows to add and drop, on both sides, the supervision signal.

SPVM
1550 nm + OSC 1550 nm + OSC
SPV_F_C SPV_F_C
OADM OADM
LAN_Q
1696MS_C
SH
PSC
F A N _C
SPVM SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
ESC PSC
N.B. In this configuration two OADM boards must be provisionned by the software even if
they are not needed for the Hardware function. Then the associated alarm (RUM) will
raise on the craft Equiment even if the working is normal.
Figure 196. SPV Manager

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 260 / 554
554
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE
In this paragraph, we describe the configuration of 1696MS in a core ring, host of a link to a distant CPE.
In current release two data signals plus OSC can be managed as such a one fiber link (1310 nm, 1550
nm or 1310+1550 nm).
3.2.4.1 1696MS receiving/emitting a supervised B&W signal
This situation is the same as a customer signal arriving on a B&W port of 1696MS, except that the incoming
signal carries the OSC which has to be extracted/inserted in the 1696MS.
OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC
1310 nm 1310 nm
SPVM
1696MS SPV_F
Black & White signal
To/From
CPE
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 x SPVM boards
needed).
Figure 197. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white signal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 261 / 554
554
3.2.4.2 1696MS receiving a supervised colored signal
In this configuration, the signal coming from the CPE is plugged on the User Interfaced of the 1696MS.
In this case the signal from the 1696MS to the CPE is carried by a 1310 nm wavelength, and the contrapro-

pagative signal is carried by a 1550 nm wavelength.

The optical budget is then limited by the Black and White span optical budget.
3.2.4.2.1 Protected signal in the ring
The signal coming from the CPE is launched in both directions in the 1696MS ring (East and West).
In this case, the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards are need-
ed).
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC
1550 nm 1310 nm
SPVM
1696MS
SPV_F_1550
To/From CPE
and protected in the ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 262 / 554
554
3.2.4.2.2 Unprotected signal in the ring
In this case the signal coming from the CPE is launched only on one side of the ring.
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards
needed).
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1550 nm
SPVM
1310 nm
or 1310 nm
To/From
1696MS
CPE
and unprotected in the ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 263 / 554
554
3.2.4.3 1696MS as a ”remotization”
In this configuration one channel is demultiplexed and the other one is sent directly to the CPE without
MCC using.

3.2.4.3.1 Without OSC
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS To/From CPE
Figure 200. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated.
3.2.4.3.2 With OSC
To 1696
To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM
SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS SPV_F SPV_F

To/From CPE
Figure 201. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
When the optical budget is available, this configuration can be used to reach a CPE. In this case, the
1696MS node has to support 3 OSC channels and then 2 SPVM boards are needed.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 264 / 554
554
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together
It is possible to make two 1696MS rings (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C) communicate. It is not
necessary that both communicating nodes are located on the same spot. User interfaces are intercon-
nected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black and white signal from one
ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
PSC
OADM1 RAI
F A N _C
SPVM OPC
Transponder (from SPVF_C) SPV_F_C (1550 nm)
Transponder ch. 1 LAN_Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Transponder ch 1 W
Transponder ch 2 W
Transponder ch 3 W
Transponder ch 4 W
Transponder ch 1 E
Transponder ch 2 E
Transponder ch 3 E
Transponder ch 4 E
Half SPVM Board

OADM 4 ch. West
OADM 4 ch. East
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L S R
P H A U U P
S A V K I I I S
C N C
49
28: SPV Filter FANS
Figure 202. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 265 / 554
554
Supervision through optical link (DCC)
It is possible to make two 1696MS Rings communicate (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C). Both
the communicating nodes are not necessary to be located on the same spot. User interfaces are intercon-

nected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black–and–white signal from one

ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
Protection is provided for remote MCC Boards of both rings with OPC boards.
This protection type allows two failures at a time, one in each ring.
OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC SPVM
1696MS
SPVM
SPV_F_C
User interfaces
User interfaces
SPV_F_C
SPVM
OPC
OADM 1 channel +OSC OADM 1 channel +OSC
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM SPVM
ring
Pass–Through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1696MS_C
Figure 203. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 266 / 554
554
Supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
The supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the LAN_Q boards. This avoid to have
one SPVM in the 1696MS shelf and one in the MS_C shelf.
OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
SPVM
User interfaces
LAN_Q
1696MS
User interfaces LAN_Q
OADM 1 channel +OSC OADM 1 channel +OSC

MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS_C Pass–Through
Figure 204. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
The transponders shown in the figure are not protecting each other, but only transmitting the signal they
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
receive. In this configuration both NEs located in the same spot are necessary because of the electrical
link length.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 267 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
268 / 554
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the cards and units of the 1696 Metro Span for this release. It gives for each card
a functional diagram, description and interfaces definition.
4.1 Tributaries
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1)
2.5 – 2.66 Gb/s back–panel electrical links

to/from
to/from corresponding to/from
future matrix transponder future matrix
copy 0 copy 1
Client User Rx
input
(optional)
User Tx Client
(optional) output
B1
non intrusive
monitoring
WDM Tx WDM
output
WDM
input WDM Rx 8 x 8 MATRIX
Alarm & Control

unit to/from
corresponding
transponder
Figure 205. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 269 / 554
554
4.1.1.1 Description
The MCC1 unit is a bidirectional multi–clock interface. The block–diagram is shown on Figure 205.
The receivers (WDM and user) are 2R. Two multi bit–rate clock–selectable CDR (Clock and Data Recov-

ery) units are used so that the MCC is globally 3R for some bit-rates between 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
(155Mbit/s - 622Mbit/s - 1.06Gbit/s - 1.25Gbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s).
The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features:
• drop / Insert with or without Optical–SNCP

• electrical pass–through
• internal (local) loop–back
• line (remote) loop–back
• line (remote) loop–back drop–insert
• user loop–back
• user loop–back pass–through
• possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
The alarm and control unit ensures the following functions:

• matrix management interface
• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...)
• alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller
• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if Optical–SNCP
(O–SNCP): user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM).
In OCh protection scheme, each MCC transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the MCC
just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each MCC unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so
that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support.
Two EEPROM contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC
board by means of the SPI bus.
4.1.1.2 Optical characteristics
See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 414.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 270 / 554
554
4.1.1.3 Optical safety
Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:

– the “APSD enable” mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes
– the “APSD disable” mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Optical safety, fault localization and protection criteria are based on the LOS alarm only.
How does it work?
– ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM
Tx.
– ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if
available). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut down. To
restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms.
Boards behavior depending on APSD status

If the transponder is in APSD enable or disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder
failure, jumper disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (For-
ward Defect Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) will imply a shut–down which will indicate
to the next NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager
to have a good understanding of the fault localization.
This mechanism of LOS propagation is independent from safety procedure. The next table sums up the
different transponder behavior according to safety + LOS propagation command.
Table 22. MCC1 Shut down mode
Behaviour
Node Type OCC10 state
Alarm Consecutive action
LOS on User Rx SD of WDM Tx
APSD enable SD of User Tx & WDM Tx of the same
LOS on WDM Rx
board
a) Line Terminal
b) Add & Drop in APSD disable LOS on User Rx SD of WDM Tx
OADM or LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
back–to–back APSD disable WDM Tx always ON
node forced ON LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
APSD disable WDM Tx always OFF
forced OFF LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
LOS on WDM Rx SD of WDM Tx of the same board and
APSD enable
of the adjacent board
Pass–through
g in APSD disable LOS on WDM Rx SD of WDM Tx of the adjacent board
OADM or back–to– APSD disable
WDM Tx always ON
back node forced ON
APSD disable
WDM Tx always OFF
forced OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 271 / 554
554
4.1.1.4 MCC cross–connection configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent MCCs and the MCC matrix configurations. The
HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11,

14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.

4.1.1.4.1 Default configuration
By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection.
After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 206. MCC in default configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 272 / 554
554
4.1.1.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection
The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in drop–insert, the other one can
be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back mode).

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 207. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms consecutive action
WDM Rx user Tx user Rx WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – SD of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enabled)
– shutdown of the user Tx
(LOC)* concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 273 / 554
554
4.1.1.4.3 Drop / Insert with Optical channel protection
The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots

4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass

information between them.
MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 208. Drop / Insert with Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enabled)
– shutdown of the user Tx
– protection action: activation of the protecting
user Tx laser
(LOC)* concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 274 / 554
554
4.1.1.4.4 Electrical pass–through
The MCC can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the
protection.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx optional
interfaces
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 209. Pass–Through
inhibited inhibited LOC* – no action
ILOS inhibited inhibited (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)
ALS enable)
– ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 275 / 554
554
4.1.1.4.4.1 Master board
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that man-
ages the protection.

ILOS (LOC)** – SD of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)** – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enable)
– protection action
LOC* for the bit–rates managed by the CDR

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
4.1.1.4.4.2 Slave board
The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
ILOS inhibited inhibited – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enable)
– transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)

CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 276 / 554
554
4.1.1.5 Loop–back
4.1.1.5.1 Local loop–back

This configuration is used for tests only.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 210. Local Loop–Back
The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loop–back, the other one
can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back mode).
As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look
at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 277 / 554
554
4.1.1.5.2 Remote loop–back drop–insert

back–panel

connections
MCC ”loop–in” MCC ”loop–out”
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 211. Remote Loop–Back in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the
MCC to work in ”loop–in” or ”loop–out” mode.
4.1.1.5.3 User loop–back
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 212. User Loop–Back
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 278 / 554
554
4.1.1.5.4 User loop–back & pass–through
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 213. User Loop–Back & pass–through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 279 / 554
554
4.1.1.5.5 Remote loop–back

back–panel

connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 280 / 554
554
4.1.1.6 Protection management
In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, board
absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is
retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

At the creation of the protection function, the operator define one main and one spare channel.
The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings:

– software locked protection on the main channel
– software forced selection of the spare channel
– ILOS at WDM Rx access on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one nor Hard-
Ware Failure on the board.
The software forcing has the highest priority level. The manual switch has a lower priority level than the
alarms on the signals.
A clear function allows, via software, to re–initialize the protection board (clear all the switches com-
mands), and a lockout of protection function gives the possibility to block the switch in the main position
(whatever the status of the signals). The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the high-
est to the lowest):
– lockout of protection
– software forcing
– automatic switching
Total switching time < 50 ms.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 281 / 554
554
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2)
2.5 – 2.66 Gb/s back–panel electrical links

to/from

corresponding
transponder
to/from to/from
future matrix future matrix
copy 0 copy 1
Client User Rx
input 8 x 8 MATRIX
(optional)
User Tx Client
(optional) output
OPL
B1 OOPV
non intrusive
monitoring
Optical
Receiver
VOA
WDM Tx WDM
WDM output
input WDM Rx
Alarm & Control

unit to/from
corresponding
transponder
Figure 215. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 282 / 554
554
4.1.2.1 Description
The MCC2 transponder unit is a bidirectional multi–clock interface. The block–diagram is shown on
Figure 215.
All the signals are 3R.
The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers.
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select bit rate by :

– selecting it in a list
– entering its exact value
A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix, a B1 perfor-
mance monitoring unit and an alarm and control unit are present on the board.
The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on
SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning).

This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:

• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...
• B1 device management
• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if optical–SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the un-
failed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 283 / 554
554

Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:
– the “APSD enable” mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes
– the “APSD disable” mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria:
– LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between
100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s.
– ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
Way of working 1st case :
– ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM
Tx.
– LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the
WDM Tx.
available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut-
down. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
– LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and
protection mechanism (if available).
N.B. During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between λ ITU ± 500 pm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 284 / 554
554
If the transponder is in APSD enable or disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder
failure, jumper disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (For-
ward Defect Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) will imply a shut–down which will indicate
to the next NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager
to have a good understanding of the fault localization.

This mechanism of LOS propagation is independent from safety procedure. The next table sums up the
different transponder behavior according to safety + LOS propagation command.
Table 28. MCC2 Shut down mode
Behaviour
SD of User Tx & WDM Tx of the same
LOS on WDM Rx
APSD enable board
LOC on User Tx SD of User Tx
LOC on WDM Tx SD of WDM Tx
a) Line Terminal
b) Add & Drop in LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
APSD disable
OADM or LOC on User Tx SD of User Tx
back–to–back LOC on WDM Tx SD of WDM Tx
node WDM Tx always ON
APSD disable
di bl LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
forced ON
WDM Tx always OFF
APSD disable
forced OFF
APSD enable Forbidden
LOS on WDM Rx SD of WDM Tx of the adjacent board
APSD disable
Pass–through
P th h in
i
APSD disable
OADM or back–to– forced ON WDM Tx always ON
b k node
back d
APSD disable
WDM Tx always OFF
forced OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 285 / 554
554
4.1.2.4 MCC2 configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix con-
figurations. The HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,

6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.

The board is on APSD disable state.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 216. MCC2 in default configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 286 / 554
554
The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
ILOS (LOC)** – ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
– ShutDown of the user Tx
– activation of the protecting user Tx laser if
protection activated
LOC* – shutdown of the user Tx laser

LOC* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. If WDM Tx is Forced ON, shut–down of the WDM Tx does not occur.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 287 / 554
554
4.1.2.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection


MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
ILOS (LOC)** – ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
– ShutDown of the user Tx
LOC* – shutdown of the user Tx laser

LOC* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 288 / 554
554
4.1.2.4.4 Electrical Pass–through (regeneration configuration)
The MCC2 can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the
protection.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx optional
interfaces
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 219. Pass–through (regeneration configuration)
ILOS inhibited inhibited (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)
ALS enable)
– ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 289 / 554
554
4.1.2.4.4.1 Master board
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that man-
ages the protection.

ILOS (LOC)** – SD of the WDM Tx

ALS enable)
– protection action

CDR
4.1.2.4.4.2 Slave board
The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
ILOS inhibited inhibited – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enable)
– transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)

CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 290 / 554
554
4.1.2.5 Loop–back

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 220. Local Loop–Back
The two adjacent boards have an independant configuration (one can be in local loop–back, the other one
4.1.2.5.2 Remote loop–back drop–insert
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 291 / 554
554

4.1.2.5.3 User loop–back
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 222. User Loop–Back
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 292 / 554
554
4.1.2.5.4 User loop–back & pass–through

back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 223. User Loop–Back & pass–through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 293 / 554
554

back–panel

connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
The two adjacent boards have an independant configuration (one can be in local loop–back, the other one
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 294 / 554
554
4.1.2.6 Laser and VOA status
The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the MCC3.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable.
Table 34. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states
MCC3 configuration WDM Tx laser VOA WDM Tx User Tx laser

Plugged not declared OFF 20 dB OFF
Declared but no cross–connection OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–conn declared but no signal OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–connection + signal according to configuration according to configuration
In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card ab-
sent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is re-
trieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel.

– software locked protection on main channel
– software forced selection of spare channel
– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bit–rates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
– software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare sig-
nal)
The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest):
When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 295 / 554
554
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3)

STM–1, STM–4,

STM–16, GBE, FC,
CWDM SFP module
2x2
WDM B&W CLIENT
INPUT WDM Rx CDR TX OUTPUT
B&W or
WDM CWDM
OPTICAL SFP
MODULE
2x2
WDM B&W CLIENT
OUTPUT VOA WDM Tx CDR RX INPUT
Pin
amp TO/FROM
CORRESPONDING
TRANSPONDER
OOPV
2.5 – 2.66 Gbps

back–panel
electrical links
FPGA ALARM &

(PM / G.709) CONTROL UNIT
TO/FROM
ADJACENT
BOARD
N.B. links from Control Unit to components have been greyed for clarity)
Figure 225. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 296 / 554
554
4.1.3.1 Description
The block–diagram is shown in Figure 225.

MCC3 is built on the model of the MCC2 board. It is a MCC2 with a SFP Pluggable module in place of
Rx–Tx USER Interface. Refer to para. 4.1.12 on page 346 for SFP descrption.
The MCC3 unit is a bidirectional multi–clock transponder with one client optical interface and one coloured
WDM optical interface.
The Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by a
coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multi-
plexed into a single fiber and sent to the G.709 network.
The WDM emitter is a WDM optical module tunable over two channels with 100 GHz channel spacing and
3200 ps/nm dispersion accomodation.
The optical receiver performs an optical–to–electrical conversion and viceversa the optical transmitter.
The Client interface is a no–OTN bidirectional optical interface providing the connection of a single wave-
length of the client network with the User (B&W or CWDM) module.
The client interface is a Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) module. Small Formfactor Pluggable modules
are optical transceivers enabling the building of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
The following SFP modules are supported (see also Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 60. on page 138):
– B&W S–1.1/L–1.1/L–1.2: STM–1 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L–1.2) 1550nm
– B&W S–4.1 / L–4.1 / L–4.2: STM–4 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L–4.2) 1550nm
– B&W I–16.1/S–16.1/L–16.1/L–16.2: STM–16 Inter–office/Short/Long reach at 1310nm and (L–16.2)
1550nm
– B&W S–16.1 multi–rate: S–16.1 multi–rate (up to 2.666Gbps) at 1310 nm
– B&W 100B–LX: Fast Ethernet at 1310nm
– B&W GbE–SX / Gbe–LX / GbE–ZX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850nm / 1310 nm / 1550nm
– B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) / 2 FC (2.125GHz) / Fiber Channel at 850nm / 1310nm
– CWDM Silver/Bronze: 8 CWDM modules with APD/PIN detector (bitrates = 125 Mbps–>2.7 Gbps)
The Client optical interface is made up of LC/SPC connectors. The SFP module can be extracted/inserted
via the front panel without removing the board.
The following B&W signals at 2.488 Gbps are managed in current rel.:
– ITU–T G.957 STM–16 (2.488 Gbps), STM–4 (622.08Mbps), STM–1 (155.52Mbps)
– OC–48 (2.488 Gbps)
– GbE (1.250 Gbps)
– 2FC / FC (2.125Gbps / 1.065Gbps)
– FE (125Mbps)
The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps–>2.666Gbps.
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select the bit rate by
– selecting it in a list
– entering its exact value
A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces an electrical matrix, an alarm and control unit and a FPGA devoted to
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
B1–based performance monitoring and G.709 optical layer management are present on the board.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 297 / 554
554
The FPGA / PM block enables the operator to achieve PM based on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SO-
NET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning). User
signal is monitored after the 8x8 electrical matrix whereas the line signal is monitored before the matrix.


• Drop / Insert with or without Optical–SNCP
• Electrical pass–through (with or without SFP module as client interface)
• line (remote) loop–back and pass–through in
• line (remote) loop–back and pass–through out
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:

• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...
• B1 device management
• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if optical–SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the un-
failed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
Regenerator configuration
This configuration is provided with two MCC3 in pass–through. In this case the User interface (SFP) is not
required.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 298 / 554
554

Refer to para. 4.1.2.3 on page 284.
4.1.3.4 MCC3 configurations
Refer to para. 4.1.2.4 on page 286
4.1.3.4.1 Default configuration (no cross–connection)
Refer to para. 4.1.2.4.1 on page 286.
4.1.3.4.2 Drop / Insert (with and without optical channel protection)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.2 on page 287 and para. 4.1.2.4.3 on page 288.
4.1.3.4.3 Electrical pass–through, with/without SPF client interface (regeneration config)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.4 on page 289.
When two transponders are configured in pass–through, there is no need of User Interfaces, hence the
user interface (SFP modules) in MCC3 can be equipped or not.
In case it is not equipped, neither alarms nor measurements should be shown to the operator.
4.1.3.4.4 Loop–backs
Refer to para. 4.1.2.5 on page 291 where are described the following loop–backs:
– local loop–back
– user loop–back
– user loop–back and pass–through
– remote loop–back.
– remote loop–back and drop/insert
– remote loop–back and pass–through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 299 / 554
554

In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card ab-
sent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is re-
trieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bit–rates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
nal)
– SFP removed (missing)
The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 300 / 554
554
4.1.4 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10)
Client input Client Client output

9.95328 Gbps
10.3125 Gbps
User User
Rx Tx
CDR CDR
to/from front panel connectors
Back panel
10 Gbps input 8 x 8 MATRIX to/from Matrix 1
10 Gbps output
CDR
some functionalities
can be short–cut
G.709, G.709,
FEC, PM FEC, PM
CDR
WDM WDM
Tx Rx
Photo–diode
VOA VOA
Photo–diode
10.709 Gbps
11.096 Gbps
WDM output WDM WDM input

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 226. OCC10 unit block diagram
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 301 / 554
554
4.1.4.1 Description

The OCC10 unit transponder is a bidirectional multi–clock interface for 10 Gbps native signals. It is hard-

ware compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec.

This transponder can be provisioned to accept any digital signal at the nominal bit rate of
– 9.953 Gbps (STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN)
– 10.3125 (GBE LAN).
Two Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) are present on the board: one is inserted after the WDM Tx and
the other one is placed before the WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input.
By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm
and control unit are present on the board.
SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously.
The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit; it
gives some flexibility and additives features:
• line (remote) loop–back pass–through (in and out)
• local loop–back
The alarm and control unit performs the following functions:

• Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through..)
• optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the
transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength.
The channel/wavelength is written on the card support.
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board.
The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus.
The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus.
The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is
– supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (requires 3AL96270AA–– CO shelf).

On the front panel of the OCC10 are located four electrical connectors allowing pass–through configura-
tion even with back panel not 10 Gbps compatible (for future rel.).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 302 / 554
554
4.1.4.2 OCC10 optical characteristics

In case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure,...) a mechanism that enables to propagate a
kind of FDI along the trail is proposed (allowing for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria):
– LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for the 9953.28 Gbps
bit rate.
– LOS: Loss Of Signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
– generic AIS detection.

If the transponder is in disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure, jumper
disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (Forward Defect
Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) or a Loss Of Clock (LOC) detection will imply a shut–
down or an AIS generation (depending on the mode chosen by the operator) which will indicate to the next
NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager to have a
good understanding of the fault localization.
If the protection is activated, only the shut–down mode is authorized.
This mechanism of LOS or LOC propagation is independant from safety procedure. The next table sums
up different OCC10 behaviour according to safety + LOS + LOC propagation command.
Table 35. OCC10 Shut down mode
Behaviour
SD of User Tx & WDM Tx of the same
LOS on WDM Rx
APSD enable board
a) Line Terminal
b) Add & Drop in LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
APSD disable
OADM or LOC on User Tx SD of User Tx
back–to–back LOC on WDM Tx SD of WDM Tx
node WDM Tx always ON
APSD disable
forced ON
WDM Tx always OFF
APSD disable
forced OFF
APSD enable Forbidden
LOS on WDM Rx SD of WDM Tx of the adjacent board
APSD disable
Pass–through
P th h in
i
APSD disable
OADM or back–to– forced ON WDM Tx always ON
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
b k node
back d
APSD disable
WDM Tx always OFF
forced OFF
Example of way of working for ADD & DROP with APSD Disable:
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 303 / 554
554
– ILOS at user Rx input implies the SD of WDM Tx
– LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from user Rx or WDM Rx) implies SD of WDM Tx
available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut-

down. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.

– LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and
protection mechanism (if available).
N.B. During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between λ ITU ± 500 pm.
4.1.4.4 OCC10 configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix con-
figurations. The HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,
6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.
Table 36. OCC10 configurations
Configuration type UNI NNI
Client bit rate (Gbps) 9.95328 / 10.3125 10.709 / 11.096
Drop–insert YES Future rel.
Optical SNCP YES Future rel.
Pass–through Not Applicable YES
Remote loopback pass–through (IN and OUT) Not Applicable YES
Remote loopback drop/insert YES Future rel.
Remote loopback Not Applicable YES
Local loopback YES Future rel.
User loopback YES Future rel.
In the following tables the alarms which are not shown or not applicable are alarms with potentially conse-
quent actions but not displayed to the craft user.
Notice that “_User” is used for B&W link or back panel link.
The switch criteria are described in the protection para. 3.1.9 on page 193.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 304 / 554
554
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
For User to Network Interface (UNI) both ODU and OTU are terminated at the WDM interfaces.
9953.28 Gbps
ODU
OTU
B&W B&W
O/E O/E
FEC DEFEC
WDM
ODU
OTU
OTU
O/E
10.709 Gbps 8x8

DEFEC FEC
Matrix
WDM
ODU
O/E
OTU
OTU
Figure 228. Drop–insert (UNI)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 305 / 554
554
4.1.4.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection


Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
4.1.4.4.4 Electrical pass–through
The transponder can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility
and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not man-
age the protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 306 / 554
554
front panel (future rel.)
Rx Tx
WDM Tx OR OR WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
OR OR
Tx Rx
Figure 230. Pass–through (NNI)
For the regeneration configuration, OTU is terminated at the WDM interfaces and ODU is bypassed. A
dummy OTU is sent through the matrix
ODU
OTU Dummy OTU OTU
Front Panel (future rel.)
FEC DEFEC DEFEC FEC

WDM OR OR WDM
ODU
ODU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
O/E O/E
10.709 Gbps 8x8 8x8 10.709 Gbps

Matrix Matrix
DEFEC FEC FEC DEFEC
WDM WDM
ODU
ODU
O/E O/E
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OR OR
Board 1 Front Panel (future rel.) Board 2
Figure 231. Regeneration (two pass–through linked by 10G backpanel)
The Dummy OTU does not correspond to a real transmission section: it is used to monitor the matrices
connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 307 / 554
554
When the board is configured in loopback the RXA and TXA LEDs, located on its front plate, are
always turned OFF.

4.1.4.4.5.1 Pass–through remote loop–back
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
OR OR
Tx Rx
Figure 232. Remote Loop–Back pass–through (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
OCC10 to work in loop–in or loop–out mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 308 / 554
554
4.1.4.4.5.2 Drop–insert remote loop–back
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 233. Drop–insert remote loop–back (UNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can
be in loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop–insert configuration or in local loop–back mode).
4.1.4.4.5.3 Remote loop–back
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 234. Remote loop–back (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
be in loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop–insert configuration or in local loop–back mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 309 / 554
554
4.1.4.4.6.1 Local loop–back

back–panel

connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 235. Local Loop–Back (UNI)

be in local loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back
mode).
4.1.4.4.7 User loop–back (UNI): foreseen for Hardware and Software.
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 236. User Loop–Back (UNI)
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one
can be in local loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–
back mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 310 / 554
554
The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the OCC10.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable and LOS_mode_SD.
Table 37. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states
OCC10 configuration WDM Tx laser VOA WDM Tx User Tx laser

Plugged not declared OFF 20 dB OFF
Declared but no cross–connection OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–conn declared but no signal OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–connection + signal according to configuration according to configuration
In Optical SNCP, as for MCC, if the master OCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware fail-
ure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board
in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protect-
ing one
nal).
The software lockout of protection is the highest priority.
in its current position to avoid useless switches.
An example of optical protection is given in Figure 229. on page 306.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 311 / 554
554
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E)
Client input Client interface Client output

9.95328 Gbps (SDH, WAN)

10.3125 Gbps (LAN)
10.709 Gbps (NNI)
User User
Rx B&W XFP Tx
CDR CDR
to/from front panel connectors
Back panel
CDR
10 Gbps input 8 x 8 MATRIX
to/from Matrix 1
10 Gbps output
CDR
some functionalities
can be short–cut
G.709, G.709,
FEC, PM FEC, PM
CDR
WDM WDM
Tx Rx
(APD)
Photo–diode
VOA VOA
Photo–diode
10.709 Gbps (SDH, WAN, NNI)

11.096 Gbps (LAN)
WDM output WDM WDM input

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 237. OCC10_E unit block diagram
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 312 / 554
554
4.1.5.1 Description

The OCC10_E unit is a bidirectional multi–clock transponder for 10 Gbps native signals, with one client
optical interface and one coloured WDM optical interface. It is hardware compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec.
The USER Interface is a XFP Pluggable module. Refer to para. 4.1.13 on page 348 for XFP descrption
The Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by a
coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multi-
plexed into a single fiber and sent to the G.709 network.
The WDM interface is OTN and the bit rate is
– 10.709Gbps for SDH STM–64, SONET OC–192, 10GbE WAN and (in future rel.) NNI client signals
– 11.096Gbps for 10GbE LAN client signals
in the corresponding wavelength.
The WDM emitter is a non–tunable WDM optical module with 100 GHz channel spacing.
The WDM Receiver is APD type.
The Client interface is a no–OTN bidirectional optical interface providing the connection of a single wave-
length of the client network with the User module.
The client interface is a XFP module with APD detector. It is an optical transceivers enabling the building
of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
The following XFP modules are supported (see also Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 61. on page 139):
– B&W I64.1/10G Base–L and S64.2b/10GBase–E, providing SDH STM–64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE
LAN, OTN
– B&W 10GBase–S, providing SDH STM–64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN
The Client optical interface is made up of LC/PC connectors. The XFP module can be extracted/inserted
via the front panel without removing the board.
The following B&W signals are managed:
– 9.953Gbps (ITU–T G.957 STM–64/OC–192, 10GbE WAN)
– 10.31Gbps (10GbE LAN).
A Variable Optical Attenuators (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx and another one is placed before the
WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input.
By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm
and control unit are present on the board.
SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 313 / 554
554
The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit.


• line (remote) loop–back pass–through (in and out)
• local loop–back
The alarm and control unit performs the following functions:

• Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through...)
• optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the
transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength.
The channel/wavelength is written on the card support.
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board.
The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus.
The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus.
The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is
– supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel
– supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (for future release).
4.1.5.4 OCC10_E configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 314 / 554
554
4.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card for CWDM (OCC10_XFP_CWDM)
This board is the CWDM version for 10Gbps line.
It is based on OCC10_E without VOA at transmitter side as well as at receiver. The available wavelength
fits in 1530 nm and 1550 nm CWDM channels.
Refer to the block diagram of Figure 237. on page 312.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 315 / 554
554
4.1.7 Wavelength adapter 2 (WLA2M)

CWDM OPTICAL

8X8 B&W or CWDM
MODULE – SFP MATRIX OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP
CWDM B&W CLIENT
125Mbps 125Mbps
CWDM1 to 2.7Gbps to 2.7Gbps USER1
CWDM B&W CLIENT

OUTPUT WDM Tx CDR RX INPUT
CWDM OPTICAL B&W or CWDM

MODULE – SFP OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP
CWDM B&W CLIENT
CWDM2 125Mbps 125Mbps USER2

to 2.7Gbps to 2.7Gbps
CWDM B&W CLIENT

SDH
PERFORMANCE
MONITORING
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
Figure 238. WLA2M unit block diagram
3 connectors are green, but the fiber connectors to use are PC, not APC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 316 / 554
554
4.1.7.1 Description

The WLA2M (wavelength adapter) is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps –> 2.67 Gbps) transponders
supporting two independent optical channels, in the 1470 nm –> 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced.
The main function of this board is to convert (for each one of the two channels) the User optical signal into
a CWDM coloured optical signal and viceversa.
User side, a CWDM SFP module can also be plugged in allowing the board to be used as a regenerator.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides, and performance monitoring for SDH.
The two User transceivers and the two CWDM transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that
they can be alternated according to the different applications, in the 100Mbps–>2.67Gbps bit rate range.
Refer to para. 4.1.12 on page 346 and Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP description, Table 8. for SFP list.
Each Line/CWDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
a coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multi-
plexed into a single fiber and sent to the network.
The CWDM interfaces are multirate pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type.
The bit rate is the same of the client bit rate, in the corresponding wavelength.
Each Client interface provides the connection to the client of the network.
The optical receiver performs the optical–to–electrical conversion and viceversa the optical transmitter.
The Client/User interfaces are SFP modules. They are optical transceivers enabling the building of a trans-
ponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
B&W and CWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:
1550nm
– B&W GbE–SX / GbE–LX / GbE–ZX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850nm / 1310 nm / 1550nm
– B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) / 2 Fiber Channel (2.125GHz) at 850nm / 1310nm
– CWDM: multirate (125 Mbps–>2.67 Gbps) CWDM modules with APD or PIN detector
– OC–48 (2.488 Gbps)
– GbE (1.250 Gbps), FE (125Mbps)
– FC and 2FC (1.065Gbps / 2.125Gbps)
The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps–>2.666Gbps,
but only a set of discrete bit rates is supported by the card as mentioned below.
The Client (and WDM too) optical interfaces are LC/PC connectors. The SFP module can be extracted/in-
serted via the front panel without removing the board.
Optical measurements are not supported by WLA2M (use WLA3CD)
The multi–rate CDR, located before the transmitter both on B&W and CWDM sides, ensures the 3R regen-
eration of all the signals. CWDM side the CDR can lock automatically onto the proper bit rate.
The supported bit rates are: 125Mbps, 155.52Mbps, 200Mbps, 270Mbps, 622.08Mbps, 1.0625Gbps,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1.24416Gbps, 1.25Gbps, 2.125Gbps, 2.48832Gbps, 2.5Gbps, 2.67Gbps.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 317 / 554
554
The 8X8 electrical matrix enables the following channel configuration and additive features:
– Add and Drop
– Local loopback, Remote loopback, Local–Remote loopback
– flexible transmission performance monitoring data path connection

The Alarms & Control unit provides
– unit configuration operations
– alarms collection and interface to ESC
– remote inventory and additional data information
– 8X8 matrix configuration
– management of CDRs and bit rate information of incoming signals
– optical modules monitoring
– optical channel protection check: E–SNCP = re–configuration of the matrix
– management of performance monitoring information
Performance monitoring are performed on SDH signal on two ports: the User and CWDM ports of the
same channel (CH1 or CH2) simultaneously. SDH PM are calculated on B1 byte.
4.1.7.3 Boards behavior depending on APSD status
Ports on WLA2 is never in APSD enable state.

Force ON and Force OFF commands are not available.
The LOS propagation is described in the following:
– When the alarm PORT2_RX_LOS occurs, PORT1 TX is shut down
– When the alarm PORT1_RX_LOS occurs, PORT2TX is shut down
– When the alarm PORT3_RX_LOS occurs, PORT4 TX is shut down.
4.1.7.4 Configurations
For each channel there are four kinds of independent configurations:

– Add/Drop
– Local loopback
– Remote loopback
– Local–Remote loopback.
In Add/Drop configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is dropped on to the user network, i.e.
sent to the user transmitter, as the same traffic received from the user receiver is added on to the CWDM
line via CWDM transmitter.
In Local loopback configuration the traffic received on User receiver is sent to the corresponding User
transmitter in order to be tested. In such way, users can receive traffic sent by themselves.
In Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is sent to the corresponding
CWDM transmitter in order to be tested.
In Local–Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from (User and CWDM) receiver is sent to
the corresponding (User and CWDM) transmitter in order to be tested.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
All the possible board configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 318 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.1 Add/Drop configuration (default configuration)
See Figure 239. This configuration is applied when both channels of the unit are used in Add/Drop mode.
The configuration without any monitoring implemented is the default one.
All transmitters can be turned ON or OFF manually (it has the highest priority). If the FORCETXCON is
not active the transmitter will obey the rules of Table 38.
Table 38. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms Actions
CWDM_RX1_LOS Shutdown USER TX1
USER_RX1_LOS Shutdown CWDM TX1
INPUT OUTPUT
User RX 1 CDR3 CWDM TX1
USER 1
User TX 1 CDR1 CWDM RX1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
User TX 2 CDR2 CWDM RX 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 239. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.2 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 240. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side.
Table 39. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX2
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 240. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 319 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.3 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 241. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.


Table 40. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 241. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.4 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 242. The Local–Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User and
CWDM sides simultaneously (on the same channel).
Alarms Actions
USER_RX2_LOS Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM_RX2_LOS Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 242. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 320 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.5 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration
Table 42. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
USER RX1 LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 243. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.6 Channel 1 and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
Table 43. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
USER RX1 LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 244. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 321 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.7 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 245. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Re-
mote loopback is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.


Table 44. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
USER RX1 LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 245. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.8 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 246. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Local–
Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 45. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
USER RX1 LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 246. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 322 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.9 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration
Table 46. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
CWDM RX1 LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 247. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.10 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 248. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Re-
mote loopback is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.
Table 47. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
CWDM RX1 LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 248. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 323 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.11 Channel 1 and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration


Table 48. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
CWDM RX1 LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 249. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.12 CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 250. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side and the
Local–Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 49. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
CWDM RX1 LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 250. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 324 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.13 CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Table 50. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
Alarms Actions
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 251. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.14 Channel 1 in Local–Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 246. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Local–
Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 51. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX2
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 252. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 325 / 554
554
4.1.7.4.15 CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 253. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side and the
Local–Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.


Table 52. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 253. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.16 CH1 and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
See Figure 254. The Local–Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides
simultaneously (on the same channel).
Table 53. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
INPUT OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT INPUT
8X8
INPUT MATRIX OUTPUT
USER 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 254. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 326 / 554
554
4.1.8 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD)
CWDM or DWDM
8X8 B&W or CWDM or

OPTICAL MATRIX DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP MODULE – SFP
WDM B&W CLIENT
125Mbps 125Mbps
CWDM1 to 2.7Gbps to 2.7Gbps USER1
WDM B&W CLIENT

CWDM or DWDM B&W or CWDM or

OPTICAL DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP
MODULE – SFP
WDM B&W CLIENT
125Mbps 125Mbps
CWDM2 USER2
WDM B&W CLIENT

SDH
PERFORMANCE
MONITORING
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
Figure 255. WLA3CD unit block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 327 / 554
554
4.1.8.1 Description

The WLA3CD (wavelength adapter) is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps –> 2.67 Gbps) transponders

supporting

– two independent CWDM optical channels, in the 1470 nm –> 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced or
– two independent DWDM optical channels, in the 1529.55 nm –> 1561.42 nm range, 100 GHz spaced.
The main function of this board is to convert (for each one of the two channels) the User optical signal into
a WDM (CWDM or DWDM, according to the SFP used) coloured optical signal and viceversa.
User side, a CWDM or DWDM SFP module can also be plugged in allowing the board to be used as a
regenerator. All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides, and performance monitoring for SDH.
The two User transceivers and the two WDM transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that
Each Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The WDM interfaces can be
– multirate CWDM pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type
– multirate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.
B&W, CWDM and DWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:
1550nm
– DWDM: multirate (125 Mbps–>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
– OC–48 (2.488 Gbps)
The C/DWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps–>2.666Gbps,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Optical measurements are supported by WLA3CD (Laser Bias, Optical Received Power and Optical
Transmitted Power on all SFPs with DDM).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 328 / 554
554
The multi–rate CDR, located before the transmitter both on B&W and WDM sides, ensures the 3R regen-
eration of all the signals. WDM side the CDR can lock automatically onto the proper bit rate.
– Add and Drop
– E–SNCP (future rel.)
– flexible transmission performance monitoring data path connection

– optical channel protection check: E–SNCP = re–configuration of the matrix
– management of performance monitoring information
Performance monitoring are performed on SDH signal on two ports: the User and CWDM ports of the
same channel (CH1 or CH2) simultaneously. SDH PM are calculated on B1 byte.
Ports on WLA3 is never in APSD enable state.

Force ON and Force OFF commands are not available.
The LOS propagation is described in the following:
– When the alarm PORT1_RX_LOS occurs, PORT2TX is shut down
– When the alarm PORT3_RX_LOS occurs, PORT4 TX is shut down.
The allowed configurations are the same as WLA2M, refer to para. 4.1.7.4 on page 318
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 329 / 554
554
4.1.9 Wavelength adapter 2 with O–SNCP (WLA2M_OP)
TO

USER

optical
splitter
CWDM OPTICAL 8X8 B&W or CWDM

MODULE – SFP MATRIX OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP
CWDM B&W CLIENT
INPUT WDM Rx CDR TX
OUTPUT
125Mbps 125Mbps
WDM1 to 2.7Gbps to 2.7Gbps USER1
CWDM B&W CLIENT

OUTPUT WDM Tx CDR RX
INPUT
CWDM OPTICAL B&W or CWDM

MODULE – SFP OPTICAL
MODULE – SFP
CWDM B&W CLIENT
INPUT WDM Rx CDR TX
OUTPUT
WDM2 125Mbps 125Mbps USER2

CWDM B&W CLIENT

INPUT
optical
coupler
FROM
USER
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
Figure 256. WLA2M_OP unit block diagram
3 connectors are green, but the fiber connectors to use are PC, not APC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 330 / 554
554
4.1.9.1 Description

The WLA2M_OP (wavelength adapter) is only used for protection purpose. It is equipped with two multi-
rate (125 Mbps –> 2.67 Gbps) transponders, one optical splitter and one optical coupler allowing to support
one protected optical channel (O–SNCP), in the 1470 nm –> 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced.
The optical splitter is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to trans-
mit the client signal on both the paths (main/protected and spare/protecting).
The optical coupler is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to select
the signal according to the failure conditions: the main path is selected if it is not affected by fault, the spare
one (if OK) is selected if the main signal is faulty.
The main functions of this board are to provide O–SNCP and to convert (for each one of the two channels)
the User optical signal into a CWDM coloured optical signal and viceversa.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and CWDM sides.
Each Line/CWDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The CWDM interfaces are multirate pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type.
B&W and CWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:
1550nm
– OC–48 (2.488 Gbps)
The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps–>2.666Gbps,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Connectors are green, but it is still LC/PC connectors that must be used. Do not plug LC/APC
connectors in WLA2 boards
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 331 / 554
554

– Add and Drop

– optical channel protection check: O–SNCP = switch control (turn ON/OFF User B&W TX)
For each channel there are four kinds of independent configurations:

– Add/Drop
– Local loopback
– Remote loopback
– Local–Remote loopback.
In Add/Drop configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is dropped on to the user network, i.e.
sent to the user transmitter, as the same traffic received from the user receiver is added on to the CWDM
line via CWDM transmitter. When the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop, O–SNCP is provided.
In Local loopback configuration the traffic received on User receiver is sent to the corresponding User
transmitter in order to be tested. In such way, users can receive traffic sent by themselves.
In Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is sent to the corresponding
CWDM transmitter in order to be tested.
In Local–Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from (User and CWDM) receiver is sent to
the corresponding (User and CWDM) transmitter in order to be tested.
All the possible board configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 332 / 554
554
4.1.9.4.1 Add/Drop configuration (default configuration)
See Figure 257. The WLA2M_OP provides the O–SNCP function (described in para. 4.1.9.5 on page
337) when the Matrix is configured as Add/Drop.
This board accepts 2 kinds of operation modes in O–SNCP protection: force and auto.
In force mode, the system can enable or disable the user TX1 or user TX2 unconditionally.
In auto mode, the system can enable or disable the user TX1 and user TX2 automatically, as in Table 54.
Table 54. Alarms and action usage for O–SNCP with auto mode
CWDM_RX1_LOS CWDM_RX2_LOS Action

1 1 Disable USER TX1, Disable USER TX2
1 0 Disable USER TX1, Enable USER TX2
0 1 Disable USER TX2, Enable USER TX1
0 0 No action
Table 55. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop (O–SNCP configuration)
Alarms Actions
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler
Output User TX 2 CDR2 CWDM RX2
Figure 257. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop (O–SNCP configutration)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 333 / 554
554
4.1.9.4.2 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration


Table 56. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
No condition Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler
Figure 258. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback
4.1.9.4.3 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration
Table 57. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX2
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 259. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 334 / 554
554
4.1.9.4.4 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local–Remote loopback configuration
Alarms Actions
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler
Figure 260. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local–Remote loopback
4.1.9.4.5 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration
Table 59. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
USER RX1 LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 261. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 335 / 554
554
4.1.9.4.6 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration


Table 60. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
CWDM RX1 LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler
Figure 262. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.9.4.7 CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
See Figure 263. The Local–Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 61. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms Actions
Input Splitter
8X8
USER MATRIX
Coupler

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 263. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local–Remote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 336 / 554
554
4.1.9.5 Optical–SNCP
The O–SNCP is provided when the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop mode on both the channels. This is
the default configuration, described in para. 4.1.9.4.1 on page 333.
The O–SNCP protection is based on the “parallel transmit and best one receive“ strategy at optical level.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted to the two arms of the ring or point–to–point link, and the
available signal is selected at the receive side, according to the failure conditions of the two signals.
The splitter and the coupler are used to route optical signals in this application, as shown in Figure 257.
on page 333.
The two involved CWDM transponders are placed in the same WLA board: one has to be configured as
main (CH1), the other being spare (CH2).
The system implements protection actions according to the alarms and status information of both CWDM
receivers.
O–SNCP rules:
– only one channel can be configured as loop–back mode at same time
– the unit must be configured in “O–SNCP auto switch“ mode before loop–back operation
– should any loop–back been configured, the O–SNCP function is not available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 337 / 554
554
4.1.10 Wavelength adapter 3 with O–SNCP (WLA3CDOP)
TO

USER

optical
splitter
CWDM or DWDM 8X8 B&W or CWDM or

OPTICAL MATRIX DWDM OPTICAL
CWDM B&W CLIENT
INPUT WDM Rx CDR TX
OUTPUT
125Mbps 125Mbps
WDM1 to 2.7Gbps to 2.7Gbps USER1
CWDM B&W CLIENT

INPUT
CWDM or DWDM B&W or CWDM or

OPTICAL DWDM OPTICAL
CWDM B&W CLIENT
INPUT WDM Rx CDR TX
OUTPUT
WDM2 125Mbps 125Mbps USER2

CWDM B&W CLIENT

INPUT
optical
coupler
FROM
USER
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
Figure 264. WLA3CDOP unit block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 338 / 554
554
4.1.10.1 Description

The WLA3CDOP (wavelength adapter) is only used for protection purpose. It is equipped with two multi-
rate (125 Mbps –> 2.67 Gbps) transponders, one optical splitter and one optical coupler supporting
– one protected CWDM optical channel (O–SNCP), in the 1470nm–>1610nm range, 20nm spaced or
– one protected DWDM optical channel, in the 1529.55 nm –> 1561.42 nm range, 100 GHz spaced.
The optical splitter is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to trans-
mit the client signal on both the paths (main/protected and spare/protecting).
The optical coupler is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to select
the signal according to the failure conditions: the main signal is selected if it is not affected by fault, the
spare one (if OK) is selected if the main signal is faulty.
The main functions of this board are to provide O–SNCP and to convert (for each one of the two channels)
the User optical signal into a WDM (CWDM or DWDM, according to the SFP used) coloured optical signal
and viceversa.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides.
Each Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The WDM interfaces can be
– multirate CWDM pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type
– multirate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.
B&W, CWDM and DWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:
1550nm
– DWDM: multirate (125 Mbps–>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
– OC–48 (2.488 Gbps)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The C/DWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps–>2.666Gbps,
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 339 / 554
554
Optical measurements are supported by WLA3CD (Laser Bias, Optical Received Power and Optical

Transmitted Power on all SFPs with DDM).

– Add and Drop

– optical channel protection check: O–SNCP = switch control (turn ON/OFF User B&W TX)
The allowed configurations are the same as WLA3CDOP, refer to para. 4.1.9.4 on page 332.
4.1.10.5 Optical–SNCP
The O–SNCP is provided when the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop mode on both the channels. This is
the default configuration, described in para. 4.1.9.4.1 on page 333.
The O–SNCP protection is based on the “parallel transmit and best one receive“ strategy at optical level.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted to the two arms of the ring or point–to–point link, and the
available signal is selected at the receive side, according to the failure conditions of the two signals.
The splitter and the coupler are used to route optical signals in this application, as shown in Figure 257.
on page 333.
The two involved CWDM transponders are placed in the same WLA board: one has to be configured as
main (CH1), the other being spare (CH2).
The system implements protection actions according to the alarms and status information of both CWDM
receivers.
O–SNCP rules:
– only one channel can be configured as loop–back mode at same time
– the unit must be configured in “O–SNCP auto switch“ mode before loop–back operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– should any loop–back been configured, the O–SNCP function is not available.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 340 / 554
554
4.1.11 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards
TDM concentrators are able to multiplex in the time domain up to 4 ”low bit–rate” (”client”) signals into a
2.5 Gbps B&W WDM signal. The multiplexed client signals are listed below:
• 4 x Fast Ethernet
• 4 x FDDI
• 4 x ESCON
• 4 x Digital Video
• 4 x STM1
• 3 x STM4
• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
• 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
• some mixes are also possible:
– 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4
– 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4
– 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
– 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
– 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
The following type of boards are provided:
– the 4xANY board with an I–16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.1. It allows
to cover a 2 Km distance approx
– the 4xANY_S board with a S–16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.3. It al-
lows to cover a 15 Km distance approx. This functionality enables to use a 4XANY board without the
need of a transponder to have the necessary optical budget to launch the 1310 nm signal on the fiber.
It is then possible to use a 4XANY_S board alone in a 1696MS_C (for example) thus emitting only
one 1310 nm wavelength.
– the 4xANY_P board with a 2.5 Gbps pluggable optical module, aggregate side, hosting a B&W I–16.1
or B&W S–16.1 or CWDM (PIN or APD) or DWDM (APD) transceiver (transmitter + receiver) has
been introduced in R.2.0. The transceiver is included into a SFP module.
The CWDM wavelenght range is 1470–>1610nm and one wavelength per module is accessible.
The DWDM wavelenght range is 1561.42–>1529.55nm and one wavelength per SFP is accessible.
The architecture of the TDM concentrator board is based on the concept of virtual concatenation, and on
the mapping of SDH on OTN:
• the data traffic is packet into VC–4 structures virtually concatenated. Virtually concatenated
means that any VC–4 can follow an indpendent path crossing any SDH/SONET network (in-
cluded legacy ADM). Each VC4 is then concatenated again in the remote 4xANY.
• the VC–4s are groomed into a STM–16 structure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 341 / 554
554
In Figure 265. on page 343 is shown the block diagram.
The board is divided into:

• one mother board

• one daughter board

• 1 to 4 (client) drawers plugged on the mother or daughter board (2 on each one).
• a 1310 nm B&W transceiver for 4xAny and 4xANY_S
• a 1310 nm B&W or CWDM or DWDM pluggable transceiver for 4xANY_P only.
The board consists essentially in:

• 4 slots for bi–directional client optical interfaces
• One 2.5 Gbps transceiver (or CWDM or DWDM SFP transceiver for 4xANY_P).
The 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P unit interfaces with

• the MCC board via the B&W 2.5 Gbps transceiver (STM–16 SFP)
• CWDM Mux/Demux via the CWDM SFP
• DWDM Mux/Demux / OADM via the DWDM SFP.
Receivers and transmitters can be locked either on the received clock or the local clock:
• Default configuration : Tx locked to local clock and Rx locked to the received clock.
• Loop–back configuration. LoopBack and Continue managed.
From R.2.2 the B1 performance monitoring is enabled consisting in monitoring the B1 byte of the aggre-
gate signal received (WDM Rx).
It is also provided the 4xANY 1+1 protection consisting in protecting each client individually.
4 X ANY supports concentration of Fast Ethernet and GbE Jumbo frames including 9000 bytes frames.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 342 / 554
554
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Rx CDR
Client
signal drawer #1
Tx
Rx CDR
E/O STM–16*
STM–16 Regenerator
Client
drawer #3
signal
CONCENTRATOR
Tx
STM–16 mapper
corresponding
Tx
transponder
2.5 Gb/s
to/from
CDR
Client
Rx
Rx
signal drawer #2 SFP pluggable module
Tx
for 4xANY_P
Client Rx CDR
signal drawer #4
Tx
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Alarm & Control
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ unit
CardÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
2
presence
* a CWDM or DWDM SFP module can also be plugged on 4xANY_P
Figure 265. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 343 / 554
554
Configuration
Client side, three different kinds of drawers are provided:

• high frequency 1310 nm optical interfaces drawers (Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel), which

can be plugged only on the ports #3 et #4 (HF_1310_DRAWER).

• STM1/4 drawers, which can be plugged on any slots. But, STM_4 Bit rate can only be set for
ports #3 and #4 (SDH–SONET_1310_DRAWER).
Particular Case: For the 3 x STM4 configuration, the slot #1 is exceptionally occupied by a
STM–4 bit rate.
• Low frequency drawers (Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, Digital Video) with 1310 nm optical inter-
faces, which can be plugged in any slots (LF_1310_DRAWER).
• Low frequency drawers equipped with 1310 nm detector and laser. The optical interfaces are
have better jitter figures. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed
by the low frequency nature of the drawer (LF_1310_2_DRAWER).
• High frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the high frequency nature of the drawer
(HF_850_DRAWER).
• Low frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the low frequency nature of the drawer
(LF_850_DRAWER).
Furthermore, a limited number of configurations of drawers can be provided. Rules must be followed :
• If High Frequency drawer in ports #3, the port #1 must be non provisioned
• If High Frequency drawer in ports #4, the port #2 must be non provisioned
The following table lists the allowed configurations.
Table 62. Allowed drawers association
Drawer #1 Drawer #3 Drawer #2 Drawer #4
Not provisioned High Frequency Not provisioned High Frequency
Low Frequency / STM–1 Low Frequency / STM–1 Low Frequency / STM–1 Low Frequency / STM–1
/ STM–4 / STM–4
Not provisioned High Frequency / Low Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM–1
Frequency / STM–1 / / STM–4
STM–4
Low Frequency / STM–1 Low Frequency / STM–1 Not provisioned High Frequency / Low
/ STM–4 Frequency / STM–1 /
STM–4
STM–4 STM–4 Not provisioned STM–4
Any couple (DRW#1 ; DRW#3) can be associated to any couple (DRW#2 ; DRW#4) except for the last
line (3 x STM–4 configuration is fixed for the 4 drawers).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 344 / 554
554

In the following table is described the 4xANY loss propagation
Table 63. Summary of the way of working. Drop insert
Alarm Shown To User To STM–16 signal

ILOS#i X Pk–AIS
LOS X All SSF_U MS–RDI and Pk–RDI
LOF X All SSF_U MS–RDI and Pk–RDI
MS–AIS All SSF_U MS–RDI and Pk–RDI
SSF_U X SD Pk–RDI
AU_AIS SSF_U Pk–RDI
AU_LOP SSF_U Pk–RDI
PLM SSF_U Pk–RDI
SQM SSF_U Pk–RDI
LOM SSF_U Pk–RDI
LOA SSF_U Pk–RDI
UNEQ SSF_U Pk–RDI
Pk–AIS SD Pk–RDI
Pk–RDI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 345 / 554
554
4.1.12 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules
Refer to Figure 266.

The SFP modules are the optical physical accesses for:

– client side of the MCC3

– aggregate side of the 4xANY_P
– WDM and client sides of the WLA2 and WLA3 boards.
The following (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) SFP modules are supported (also refer to Figure 60. on page 138
and Table 8. )
– B&W STM–1 : S–1.1/L–1.1/L–1.2; STM–1 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L–1.2) 1550nm
– B&W STM–4 : S–4.1 / L–4.1 / L–4.2; STM–4 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L–4.2) 1550nm
– B&W STM–16 : I–16.1/S–16.1/L–16.1/L–16.2; STM–16 Inter–office/Short/Long reach at 1310nm
and (L–16.2) 1550nm
– B&W STM–16 multirate: S–16.1 multirate/multiformat (up to 2.666Gbps) at 1310 nm
– B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) and 2 Fiber Channel (2.125GHz) at 850nm / 1310nm
– CWDM : multirate (125 Mbps–>2.6 Gbps) CWDM modules with APD or PIN detector
– DWDM : multirate (125 Mbps–>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
Each module contains on transmitter side an automatic optical output power control circuit, a laser driver
and a laser diode module.
The transmitter is based on an uncooled DFB laser.
The laser safety class for the complete integrated module is CLASS 1 according to IEC 60825 2001 Edition.
It can manage command for TX disable and provides TX Fault alarm.
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
– a single mode fiber (9/125 μm) or
– multi mode fiber (50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm)
with standard LC optical connector.
TX Fault indicates a laser fault of some kind. The Transmitter is not disabled when TX Fault signal is active.
Tx Disable is an input that is used to shut down the transmitter optical output.
On receiver side each module contains a PIN or APD photodetector for light to electrical current conver-
sion and a limiting amplifier.
The photo detected current is amplified by a an electrical circuit which delivers two complementary data
signals.
The module provides LOS alarm (Loss of input Power Signal alarm). This output signal indicates the re-
ceived optical power is below the worst–case receiver sensitivity (as defined by the standard in use).
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
– a single mode fiber (9/125 μm) or
– multi mode fiber (50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm)
with standard LC optical connector.
The Transceiver has an EEPROM inside to provide Remote Inventory, containing information about trans-
ceiver capabilities, standard interfaces, manufacturer... The serial interface uses the 2–wire serial CMOS
EEPROM protocol defined for the ATMEL AT24C01A/02/04 family of components.
The digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) is an SFP function supporting analog parameters measurements
as temperature, laser bias, laser power. It is an optional feature: the availability information is present in
the SFP remote inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 346 / 554
554
To board B&W or WDM interface
(MCC3 or 4xANY_P to/from
or WLA2 or WLA3) MCC3 client or
processing CWDM or DWDM
TRANSMITTER mux/demux–OADM
LC
PIN Laser
diode Optical output
DATA+
LASER
Electrical DATA DRIVER
DATA–
APC TX Fault
TX Disable
Remote Inventory / DDM

EEPROM
μP
RECEIVER
DATA+ LC
Main PRE PIN*
Electrical DATA Amplifier Optical input
DATA–
LOS
SFP Optical Module
* PIN or APD, according to the SFP type
Figure 266. SFP modules general block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 347 / 554
554
4.1.13 XFP optical modules
The SFP optical modules are the optical physical access for the client side of the OCC10_E unit.

The following B&W XFP modules are supported (also refer to Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 61. on page
139):
– 10GBase–S for SDH STM–64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN signals, in 1st window
– I64.1/10G Base–L for SDH STM–64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN, OTN signals, in 2nd window
– S64.2b/10GBase–E for SDH STM–64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN, OTN signals, in 3rd window
The module is a 10Gbps serial–to–serial transceiver, made up of one optical transmitter and one optical
receiver.
The transmitter
– gets the electrical data input through the 30–position pluggable edge connector
– performs 3R regeneration via a CDR
– converts the regenerated signal in the optical data output using a Laser.
The receiver
– detects the optical data input via a Photo Detector
– performs 3R regeneration via a CDR
– sends the regenerated signal through the 30–position pluggable edge connector.
Input and output signals have NRZ format. A block diagram is depicted in Figure 267.
The module is equipped with an I2C bus interface to access the following features implemented in the mod-
ule:
– Monitor signals
– Alarms signals
– Control signals
– Remote inventory (EEPROM)
Alarms and commands:

– LOS XFP: Loss Of Signal
– FAIL XFP: XFP fault
– RESET XFP: module reset
– LASER OFF: the laser sourse is tourned off
– PRES XFP: module physically present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 348 / 554
554
To/from B&W interface
10GbE board to/from client
+5.0V
+3.3V
+1.8V
GND
DATA+ LC
Electrical DATA Equalizer Clock & Data Line Laser Laser
Recovery Driver Driver 10 Gbps
DATA– Optical output
DATA+ LC
Electrical DATA Line Clock & Data Equalizer Photo
Driver Recovery Detector
DATA–
10 Gbps
Optical input
DATA
I2C EEPROM EEPROM

CLOCK
RESET XFP
PRESS XFP
LOS XFP
LASER OFF
FAIL XFP
Figure 267. XFP modules general block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 349 / 554
554
4.1.14 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
The board contains 2 x VOAs (Variable Optical Attenuators). It can be located between the demux and

the mux of an OADM / OMDX. A VOA can be placed between the two stages of an amplifier, too.
Purpose of MVAC is to manually adjust the channel emphasis in order to optimize the transmission.
Coupled with the OSMC board it allows an automatic emphasis (automatic power adjustment).
From: – OADM/OMDX demux
– 1st stage OAC
In1
In2
Alarm &
VOAs Photo- Control
diodes Unit
To: – OADM/OMDX mux
– 2st stage OAC
Out1
– a MCC
Out2
Card presence
2
Front panel PC
Electrical interface
PC Electrical Link
Figure 268. MVAC unit block diagram
In Figure 269. on page 351, some examples of system configuration is given, where MVAC is connected:
– between demux and mux of a multiplexer card (OADM/OMDX)
– at the input of a MCC2 (dropped channel)
– between the first and the second stage of the optical amplifier(s).
MVAC Can be used for any type of equipment connections: looped/expansion/extra/external channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.1.14.2 MVAC optical characteristics
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 350 / 554
554
Bundle pass–through
In1 1 Out1
MVAC
Out2 2 In2
In1 1 Out1
MVAC
Out2 2 In2
Single Channel
In1 1 Out1
MUX MVAC MUX
Out2 2 In2
In1
VOA in MVAC In2

2
Post Emphasis
1
MVAC
Out2
Out1
VOA in MCC2
MCC2 MCC2
In1 1 Out1 M
EXTERNAL
SIGNAL
MVAC U
Out2 2 In2 X
1st stage 2nd stage
VOA in OAC Optical Amplifier

In1 1 Out1
2
MVAC
Optical Amplifier VOA in OAC
Out2 2 In2
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2nd stage 1st stage
Figure 269. Example of MVAC location in the system
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 351 / 554
554
4.2 Multiplexers
4.2.1 DWDM mux/demux : OMDX units

The following Mux/Demux (OMDX) boards are used
– the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter and the SPV couplers : OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
– the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter : OMDX8100_M_L1_X
– the upgrade Mux/Demux: OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2
4.2.1.1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV Monitor Tx out
Optical
Extra Tx in Receiver
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32 MUX
WDM ch 33 WDM
Tx in ch 35 9:1 Line Tx out
ch 36
ch 37 LB/SB
combiner
ch 38
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
Line Rx in WDM ch 33 WDM
1:9 ch 35 Rx out
DEMUX
LB/SB ch 36
splitter ch 37
ch 38
Extra Rx out
Monitor
Rx out SPV Rx out
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
N.B. Monitoring Access: Optical power level at monitoring access is around 20 dB less the mean opti-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
cal power of the line.
Figure 270. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 352 / 554
554
4.2.1.1.1 Description
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the
Long Band) and the signal coming from the extra–input (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second
part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multi-
plexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
At the receive side, a coupler is used to monitor the input signal (power presence and monitoring connec-
tor). Then, a WDM coupler is used to extract the supervisory channel. Then, the Long Band and the Short
Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long Band signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one
that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other channels of the LB.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 353 / 554
554
4.2.1.3 OMDX8100_M_L1_X
OPL
OOPV

Optical

Receiver Monitor Tx out
Extra Tx in
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
WDM
Tx in ch 33 WDM
ch 35 9:1 MUX Line Tx out
ch 36
ch 37 LB/SB
combiner
ch 38
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
SPV filter ch 32
Line Rx in WDM ch 33 WDM
ch 35 Rx out
DEMUX
LB/SB
1:9
ch 36
splitter ch 37
ch 38
Extra Rx out
Monitor Rx out
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Figure 271. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the
Long Band) and the signal coming from the extra–input (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second
part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multi-
plexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
At the receive side, the Long Band and the Short Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long band
signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other LB channels.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2 on page 444.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 354 / 554
554
4.2.1.4 OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2
WDM Tx in
L2 S2 S1
ch 20 42 52
ch 21 43 53
ch 22 44 54
ch 23
ch 25
OR
45
47
OR
55
57
MUX Line Tx out
ch 26 48 58
ch 27 49 59
ch 28 50 60
Extra Tx in
WDM Rx out
L2 S2 S1
ch 20 42 52
ch 21 43 53
ch 22 44 54
Line Rx in DEMUX ch 23
ch 25
OR
45
47
OR
55
57
ch 26 48 58
ch 27 49 59
ch 28 50 60
Extra Rx out
Figure 272. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram
MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals and the signal coming form the extra–
input and multiplexes them into one optical signal, ready to be launched on the WDM line.
DEMUX side
The wavelength demultiplexer component receives the WDM line signal and demultiplexes it into 8 chan-
nel plus one possible extra aggregate signal.
OADM application
Connecting the Extra Rx out access to the Extra Rx in access allows to pass–through the channels that
are not dropped and added. The board works in OADM configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
These boards are supplied in power by the PSC.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2.2 on page 446.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 355 / 554
554
4.2.2 CWDM mux/demux: CMDX2

This board performs both the multiplexing and demultiplexing of 8 CWDM channels/wavelengths, 20 nm

spaced, to/from a fibre.

It also provides the insertion and extraction of the 1310nm supervisory signal (SPV) or another 1310nm
signal (i.e. SDH).
The 8–Channel Multiplexer/DemultipleXer unit with SPV contains

– one 8:1 CWDM multiplexer
– one 1:8 CWDM demultiplexer
– two 1310nm filters, used to insert/extract the 1310nm Supervision wavelength.
MUX side. In transmit direction, the CMDX2 is used to multiplex the 8 wavelengths coming from trans-
ponders, into a single optical signal, to be sent to the line through the 1310nm filter, used to add the 1310nm
SPV wavelength to the aggregate/multiplexed optical signal.
DEMUX side. In receive direction, the CMDX2 firstly drops the 1310nm SPV wavelength from the optical
signal coming from the line and then demultiplexes the aggregate/multiplexed signal (8 wavelengths) into
8 WDM output signals, each one further routed to the appropriate transponder. A 95:5 coupler allows to
monitor the input signal providing power measurements and LOS detection.
1471nm
CH1 IN
1491nm
CH2 IN
WDM Tx in
1511nm
CH3 IN
1531nm
CH4 IN MUX OUT 1310nm
1551nm MUX Line Tx out
CH5 IN SPV filter
1571nm
CH6 IN
1591nm
CH7 IN
1611nm
CH8 IN
SPV Tx IN
1471nm
CH1 OUT
1491nm
CH2 OUT
1511nm
WDM RX out
CH3 OUT
1531nm
CH4 OUT DEMUX IN 1310nm 95:5
1551nm MUX Line Rx in
CH5 OUT SPV filter TAP
1571nm
CH6 OUT
1591nm
CH7 OUT
1611nm
CH8 OUT
LOS
detector
SPV Rx OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 273. CMDX2 block diagram
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 356 / 554
554
4.2.3 DWDM OADM units
4.2.3.1 8 channels OADM unit
The components, MUX and DEMUX used in the OADM boards are the same than those used in the OMDX
boards. Thus, 4 OADM boards are defined:

– OADM8100_M_S2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 42 to 50
– OADM8100_M_S1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 52 to 60
– OADM8100_M_L1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 30 to 38
– OADM8100_M_L2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 20 to 28
1510 nm
filter Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Monitor Rx out
SPV Rx out
ch #1
DEMUX
dropped channels
ch #2
WDM Rx out
ch #3
ch #4
Line Rx in WDM
1–>8 ch #5
1510 nm ch #6
filter
ch #7
ch #8
Extra Rx out
Extra Tx in
ch #1
ch #2
added channels
ch #3
WDM Tx in
ch #4 WDM
8 –> 1 Line Tx out
ch #5
MUX
ch #6
ch #7
ch #8
Optical
OLOS Receiver
OOPV Monitor Tx out
Optical
Receiver
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV
Figure 274. OADM8: block–diagram
The OADM8 unit is used on the west or east side.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The 8 channels are dropped when all the other channels (pass–through) are sent on the extra–output port.
On the transmit side, the 8 concerned channels are added to the pass–through channels via the multiplex-
er and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using a WDM coupler.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 357 / 554
554
The function of the OADM4_x units is to extract and insert 4 channels between the 32 available.

Optical

IPL
Receiver IOPV
1510 nm
filter
Monitor Rx out
SPV Rx out
DEMUX
dropped channels
ch #1
WDM Rx out
Line Rx in WDM ch #2
1–>4 ch #3
ch #4
Extra Rx out
Extra Tx in
added channels
ch #1
WDM Tx in
ch #2 WDM
4–>1
ch #3 Line Tx out
ch #4
MUX
OLOS Optical
OOPV Receiver
SPV Tx in
Monitor Tx out
OPL Optical
OOPV Receiver
Figure 275. OADM4: block–diagram
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The 4 channels are
dropped and sent on a front panel connector. The aggregate of all the other channels (pass–through) is
also sent to a front panel connector to be connected to the multiplex.
On the transmit side, the 4 concerned channels are added to the pass–through channels via the multiplex-
er and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit). The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS,
OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The different possible sets of channels are the following: 20 to 23 – 25 to 28 – 30 to 33 – 35 to 38 – 42
to 45 – 47 to 50 – 52 to 55 – and 57 to 60.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 358 / 554
554
The function of the OADM2100_M_XX_S is to extract and insert 2 channels between the 32 available.
IPL
OOPV
SPV IN Optical
Receiver
OLOS Monitor
OOPV
extra–
input Optical
Receiver
MUX
ch #1
Output
ch #2
extra–
output
ch #2
SPV filter
Input
ch #1
DEMUX
Monitor
Optical
Receiver
SPV OUT
IPL
IOPV
Figure 276. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The two channels are
dropped while all the other channels are sent to a front–panel connector (extra–output).
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (pass–through or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
a coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is giv-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
en to the operator for monitoring purpose too.

Available couple of channels per each OADM2 board: 30-31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 359 / 554
554
4.2.3.4 1 channel OADM unit
The function of the OADM1100_M_XX_S units is to extract and insert 1 channel between the 32 available.

SPV IN
OPL OLOS Monitor

OOPV OOPV
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
MUX
MUX
extra–
input
Output
Add Ch
extra–
output
SPV filter
Monitor
Input
DEMUX Drop Ch
SPV OUT
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Figure 277. OADM1100: block diagram
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The channel is dropped
while all the other channels are sent to a front–panel connector.
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (pass–through or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to the operator for monitoring purpose too.

The available channels are 25, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38 in Long Band and 47, 48, 57 in Short Band.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 360 / 554
554
4.2.4 SPV_F_1310_1550
The function of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit is used to multiplex / demultiplex one 1310 nm channel (for
instance coming from a 4xANY, one 1550 nm multiplexed signal and the SPV channel.
SPV IN
OPL OLOS Monitor

OOPVOOPV
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
COUPLER
1310
Output
1550
1310
SPV filter
Input
SPLITTER 1550
Monitor
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
SPV OUT
Figure 278. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit
4.2.4.1 Description
At demux side, the SPV channel is extracted by a filter while at the mux side, a 95/5 coupler is used.
This board should moreover be able to accomodate whatever channel in the C–Band (and not only a chan-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
nel at 1550 nm).

A 95/5 coupler is used to monitor the signal (power presence and monitoring connector) in both directions.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 361 / 554
554
4.2.5 SPV_F_C
This board is able to insert/extract the OSC channel to/from one 1310 nm channel or one 1550 nm chan-
nel.

Common SPV Filter
Extra
In Out
SPLITTER 10dB
SPV
Out
Optical
Receiver
Optical Input LOS IPL
Power Detection
SPV Coupler Common

Extra
In Out
COUPLER
SPV
In
Optical
10dB Receiver
Optical Output LOS OPL
Power Detection
N.B. For Input power and Output power alarm detection, the optical receiver is calibrated at 1550 nm.
Figure 279. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit
4.2.5.1 Description
The board allows to perform both mux and demux function of two signals which are either C–band WDM
signal or Second window’s signal (B&W or 1310 nm) by extra ports and Supervisory channel (1510 nm)
by SPV ports. The single channel can be extracted or inserted to the multiplexed signal.
2 different channel filterings are available:
– 1310 / 1510 nm
– 1510 / 1550 nm
This compact board can be plugged in slots 28-35 or 38-45 on a 1696MSPAN shelf and in a slots 9–10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
or 11 in the 1696MS_C shelf and sub–shelf.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 362 / 554
554
4.2.5.2 Board location in the system
This board has to take place in both the – 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C shelves. The basic configuration
may be with one wavelength among predefined WDM range or B&W user signal, however it could be set
with a multiplexed signal.

Transponder unit
Transponder unit
SPV_M Transmission Line SPV_M
SPV_F unit SPV_F unit

West Side East Side
Figure 280. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 363 / 554
554
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC)
4.3.1 Description

The Optical Amplifiers are designed to amplify the C band’s wavelengths in WDM transmission system.
This functionality is necessary to extend the transmission capacity of the optical fiber’s network.
They can perform optical amplification through the optical line as a booster, in line, OADM repeater and
pre–amplifier.
The Optical Amplifiers provide up to +17 dBm output power (for 32 wavelengths) in C Band without exter-
nal pump module.
A tunable attenuator (VOA) allows a good gain flatness.
This unit contains two independent stages : a pre–amplifier and a booster.
The board receives electrical data from the Equipment Controller and from the Craft Terminal. It receives
optical data from SPV and from the OADM/OMDX or another optical amplifier.
The aim of this boards is to allow an output Power Per Channel (P/ch) of
– 2 dBm for 32 channels max loading
and to allow a correct behaviour whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of the loss
at the input of the pre–amplifier.
There are four types of optical amplifiers
• OAC1 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.1.1, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
• OAC1_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.0, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
• OAC2 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
• OAC2_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
OAC2 and OAC2_L, the new boards introduced in R.2.2, compared to OAC1 and OAC1_L are designed to
– decrease power consumption.
In the 1696MS_C shelf, only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be used.
Table 64. sums up the main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 364 / 554
554
Table 64. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers
Feature Values
Optical amplifier OAC1 OAC1_L OAC2 OAC2_L

Introduced in re-
R.1.1 R.2.0 R.2.2 R.2.2
lease
Gain block 22/9 28/9 22/9 28/9
Example of Span – 1 span x 21 dB – 1 span x 27 dB – 1 span x 21 dB – 1 span x 27 dB
performance (32 – 1 span x 28 dB – 1 span x 29 dB – 1 span x 28 dB – 1 span x 29 dB
channels x (with double (with double (with double (with double
10Gbps or 2.5
stage amplifier stage amplifier stage amplifier stage amplifier
Gbps)
at IN and OUT at IN and OUT at IN and OUT at IN and OUT
of the node of the node of the node of the node
– up to 7 spans – up to 4 spans x – up to 7 spans – up to 4 spans x
x19 dB 22dB x19 dB 22dB
Pre–amplifier Cooler Cooler
Booster @ 1480 nm @ 980 nm
VOA tuning fail
Managed from R.2.2
alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 365 / 554
554
Block diagram description (see Figure 281. on page 367)
The optical part consists of

• two optical gain block modules, 22/9 for OAC1/OAC2 and 28/9 for OAC1_L/OAC2_L (1st

and 2nd stage; they can be a preamplifier and a booster
• an optical attenuator (VOA) allowing to fix the attenuation before the first stage of the amplifier
and to compensate the variation of the span attenuation. The VOA input and output are accessi-
ble to the operator via front panel connectors.
• four 99/1 couplers for the 1st and 2nd stage signal monitoring (input and output)
• a DEMUX 1550/1510 (SPV filter) for the extraction of the supervisory channel (SPV OUT). It
separates data and supervisory channel
• a 95/5 coupler for the insertion of the supervisory channel (SPV IN). It couples data and super-
visory channel
• monitoring photodiodes (optical recevers).
The electrical part consists of
• two optical gain block modules for regulations, performing
– output optical power regulation : a comparaison is made between the measured optical
output power OOPV and the needed optical output power OPAV which is either calculated
by the FPGA (control unit) or fixed by the user
– temperature regulation: in each gain block a thermistance allows to evaluate the tempera-
ture inside the gain block. Thereafter a comparison is done between a reference voltage
and the thermistance’s voltage to determine the control current
• alarm generation
• card presence indicator
• Remote Inventory
• power supply interface with alarms generation. The board is supplied by –48V voltage from
batteries via backpanel, and by +3.6V voltage from the PSC card. On the board, 3 different vo-
latges are used: +5.5V; –5.5V; +3.6V.
• visual system alarming by means of 5 leds located on front panel (PW, OOS, ABN, APSD,
HW).
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) stored in an EEPROM.

As the maximum power is +17 dBm, the amplifiers operates in safety class 1M.
In the interconnection stage (between the 1st stage output and the 2nd stage input) can be located a DCU
and/or an OADM/OMDX and/or a MVAC board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 366 / 554
554
367 / 554
VOA IN Variable Optical
Attenuator VOA OUT
1st stage
99/1 coupler 99/1 coupler
OUT
2nd
stage IN
Monitor
ILOS1 ILOS2
8DG 17415 AA AA
Optical Optical Monitor
IOPV1 IOPV2
554
Receiver Receiver
1st stage 2nd stage
Figure 281. Amplifier boards block–diagram

SPV filter
99/1 coupler 99/1 coupler 2nd stage
1550 nm
OUT
1
1
2
1st stage 95/5 coupler
1510 nm
IN
Pump Optical OLOS1 Pump Optical OLOS2
laser 1 IOPV1 laser 2 IOPV2
Receiver Receiver
Monitor
Optical
Monitor
EPOPV Receiver
SPV IN
SPV OUT
EXTRA
Alarm & PUMP IN
Control
Restart Button Unit
2
Card
03
presence
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.3.2 Way of working
The way of working is described in the next figure.

P1 P2
INPUT 1 OUTPUT
VOA 1 2
DCU
OADM
DCU
OUTPUT 2 1 INPUT
VOA
P2 P1
Figure 282. Optical amplifiers configuration
In order to use the amplifier with its optimum performances, the output power per channel must be constant
whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of loss of the previous span.
In order to achieve such a requirement, two tuning mechanisms are foreseen:
– Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
– Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss.
4.3.2.1 Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
The VOA attenuation is adjusted manually or semi–automatically according to the previous span attenua-
tion in order to match with the EOL span losses. At the amplifier installation, the VOA is set in order to match
with the foreseen EOL span losses. Then, when the span changes, the VOA is tuned in order to always
match with that EOL span losses.
EOL span losses
P1
Current span losses
VOA 1
1
P2
Local Board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 283. Span variation compensation
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 368 / 554
554
For a given number of channels, when the previous span loss increases (ie. when the total input power
decreases), the total output powers of the 1st and 2nd stage have a tendency to follow the corresponding
linear curve. As a consequence, when the span loss variation becomes greater than 1 dB, the VOA attenu-
ation must be tuned in order to keep the total losses constant.
The range of variation of the interstage attenuation is included between 1 and 15 dB.
Two VOA tuning functions are foreseen:
– manual setting: the operator enters the value of the VOA (VOA_OP).
– semi–automatic setting: the value of the VOA is calculated by the NE via parameters entered by the
operator. This action is not automatic: the operator must command it.
4.3.2.2 Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss
Refer to Figure 284. on page 370.
Two pump tuning functions are foreseen:
– manual setting: the output powers of the 1st and 2nd stages are fixed and set by the operator (inde-
pendently from the input power)
– automatic setting:
• 1st stage: for a given EOL previous span loss, when the number of channels changes, the 1st
stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
• 2st stage: for a given interstage (IT) attenuation, when the number of channels changes, the
2st stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
The output power of the 1st and 2nd stage is adjusted automatically according to the input power of the
corresponding stage:
– 1st stage pump: it is enslaved on the 1st stage output power, which value is given as a function of
the input power and the previous EOL span losses.
For a given EOL previous span loss and for a given IT (interstage) attenuation, when the number of
channels changes (ie. when the total input power changes), the total output power follows the corre-
sponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed
arrows correspond to a number of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than
4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
– 2nd stage: it is enslaved on the 2nd stage output power, which value is given as a function of the input
power of the second stage and the interstage attenuation.
For a given IT attenuation, when the number of channels changes (ie. when the total input power
changes), the total output power of the 2nd stage follows the corresponding linear curve. The full ar-
rows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed arrows correspond to a number
of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st &
2nd stage remains constant.
The nominal operating configuration of the optical amplifiers (Pout = +17dBm) is associated with a 32
channels loading. Consequently, when 32 channels are loaded, the output power per channel is about
2 dBm.
For a given EOL span losses or IT, the range of variation of the total input and output powers is 9 dB (from
32 to 4 channels).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 369 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
+8
+3
+17
+12
Pout 2
Pout 1
03
(dBm)
(dBm)
–12
–23
–9
–20
–6 –3
IT = 15dB SPAN = 31dB
0
first stage tuning pump
–17 –14 –11 –8
3
second stage tuning pump

–5
6
–2
9
554
SPAN = 16dB
8DG 17415 AA AA
2 4
SPAN = 13dB
Figure 284. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant)
Pin 2 (dBm)
Pin 1 (dBm)
370 / 554
4.3.3 Optical characteristics
See para. 5.3.7 on page 455.

4.3.4 Optical safety
“IEC 60825–2, Ed.03: Safety of Laser ptroducts – Part 2: Safety of optical fibre commu-
nication system”: in restricted areas no APSD scheme is required below +21.3 dBm out-
put power (see para. 3.6, 4.5.1, table D.1).
Amplified or not amplified equipment is always well below this limit.

Alcatel recommend the “APSD disable” mode (default mode).
The next table describes the way of working of the optical amplifiers. The boards may be in
– APSD disable state
– APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
– APSD enable state (not available).
The following tables sum up the way of working for each APSD state.
a) APSD disable state
Table 65. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable
alarms
consecutive action
1st stage Input 2nd stage Input
ILOS1 – ShutDown of the 1st stage
ILOS2 – ShutDown of the 2nd stage
b) APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
Table 66. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF
alarms
consecutive action
ILOS1 – 1st stage forced ON / OFF. No action.

ILOS2 – 2nd stage forced ON / OFF. No action.
c) APSD enable state (not available)
N.B. In current Release OAC APSD is always disabled.
Table 67. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable
alarms
consecutive action
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ILOS1 – Shutdown of the 1st stage and 2nd stage of the same
board.
ILOS2 – Shutdown of the 2nd stage.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 371 / 554
554
4.4 Controller
4.4.1 ESC board

The ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) board is the hardware platform designed to support the Equip-
ment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions for the 1696 MSPAN and
1696MS_C equipment from the release 1.3.
The EC functions has in charge of the processing activities concerning the “Virtual Equipment Control Ele-
ment” (VECE) function:
– Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

– Message Communication Function (MCF)
The SC function of ESC has in charge of the processing activities concerning the “Physical Equipment
Control Element” (PECE) function:
– Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

– Basic Process Control Function (BPCF)
It provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and manage-
ment and configuration provisioning.
In an Expansion Shelf, the ESC board needs only to provide a SC functionality. It is the same board, and
its identification is made through ”shelf id” and ”slot id” numbers.
The ESC consists in a double processor board. It is mainly composed of :

– A ESC mother board,
– A daughter board achieving the EC function,
– A daughter board achieving the SC function,
– A non volatile mass storage device PCMCIA 2.1 compatible.
Each of these functions (EC and SC) are realized using a PQSCC daughter board. They are plugged on
the ESC mother board. The PQSCC module is developed in order to provide a common HW (and SW)
platform for different applications requiring a Shelf Controller (SC) function. The processors used are
members of Motorola MPC860 family.
Various kinds of serial communication channels and parallel I/O ports for alarm & status signals are pro-
vided by the ESC card.
Thanks to the ESC board, it is no more necessary to plug a LAN_Q card in each shelf since the ESC is
now able to manage the SPI bus. One only needs to plug a LAN_Q card in the master shelf if one needs
the LAN supervision functionality.
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp
service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
4.4.1.1 EQUICO to ESC Upgrade procedure information
When the system software is upgraded from version 1.1, both EQUICO boards (SC+EC) should be re-
placed by one ESC board in the master shelf, and one ESC board in expansion shelves in slot 1. The up-
grade procedure is perform with the Craft terminal Equipment or OS (1353SH) and for this:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Refer to 3AL 86602 ABAA–PGZZA document.
N.B. The procedure of NE software management is detailled on the Operator Handbook.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 372 / 554
554
4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H)
The ”SPV–M” cards are used for the management of the 1696 supervision and service channels.
The set of service channels managed by the supervision unit is a subset of the section overhead of STM1
frame, as defined in ITU Recommendation G70X (March 1994); the unit will be able to multiplex/demulti-
plex the optical service channels in 2048 kb/s or 4864 kb/s proprietary supervision frames.
In case of a 4864 kb/s supervision data channels, the SPV–M will multiplex/demultiplex them in two 2048
kb/s frames, only one of these contains the supervision information, the other is an extra traffic frames.
Furthermore, others four bi–directional 2048 kb/s user auxiliary data channels are provided for extra traffic
needs. A matrix is used to interconnect these channels.
The supervision units types availabale are: SPVM2 and SPVM_H.
The supervision unit (SPVM) is composed of

– one optical part (SPV channel receiver and transmitter)
– two main electrical blocks:
• a matrix to route the 2 Mbit/s inputs
• an FPGA dedicated to the supervision frames management.
From Rel. 1.3, is available the SPVM + OW (SPVM2) board, able to drop the 2 Mb/s extra channels and
the audio channel.
In Rel. 2.0, has been introduced the SPVM_H board; it provides all the features of the SPVM2 board but
manages only one Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).
In the following is briefly described the block scheme (see Figure 285. on page 374)
The unit is composed of a main board, implementing the larger part of the functionalities, and two daughter
boards (TX–SPV–M) devoted to optical transmitter. The board can be split in three main parts:
– 2/4 Mbps MUX/DEMUX (gate array). It multiplexes/demultiplexes a 4864 kb/s stream into two 2048
kb/s channels. It extracts and inserts from/to these streams three auxiliary service channels.
– Supervision Manager (FPGA); it can be divided in the cited major functions:

• Matrix function between the four users channels at 2048 kb/s, the streams of the supervison
channels processed by the OSC MUXs and two internal streams reserved to the mux/demux
of the service channels contained in the supervision channels. In case of a 2048kb/s supervi-
sion frame it can by–pass the OSC MUXs
• Supervision frames and service channel management extract/insert the slots containing F1, E1,
E2, from the supervision frames. The F1, E1, E2 service channels and those coming from the
OSC MUXs, which is supervision information coming from both sides (EST and WEST), are re–
routed to the ESC board
• OSC MUX configuration: this block function gives the access to the configuration and alarm pins
of the two OSC MUXs via internal registers
• SPI interface which assumes the software interface. Through this interface, the register of the
Supervision Manager is accessible in read and write sequences. It permits the application soft-
ware to configure the SPV–M.
– TX–SPV–M is a daughter board containing the optical unit (transmitter), having in charge of transmit-
ting the SPVM frame on an optical fiber support in both sides (east and west), if required. This function
is realized with two LASERS at 1510 nm wavelenght. The LASERS are supported by two identical
daugter boards (TX–SPV–M), managed by SPV–M.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of the board is available via the SPI bus.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 373 / 554
554
AGGREGATE AGGREGATE AGGREGATE AGGREGATE
SIGNAL (32 CH) OSC (32 CH + OSC) OAC OAC (32 CH + OSC) OSC SIGNAL (32 CH)
ADD/DROP ADD/DROP
1550 NM FROM/TO LINE FROM/TO LINE 1550 NM

1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1–D3; D4–D12) + UDC
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1–D3; D4–D12) + UDC

FRONT PANEL BACK PANEL
TELEPHONE
HANDSET (J1) TO UIC2 TO UIC1 TO ESC
UDC (2 x 2 Mbps)
EOW (E2 at 64K)
Voice Channel
TDM1 (2M)
TDM2 (2M)
TX–SPVM TX–SPVM
OPTICAL OPTICAL
INTERFACE INTERFACE
2Mbps 2Mbps
FRONT FRONT
PANEL OSC OSC PANEL
4Mbps 2/4Mb 2/4Mb 4Mbps
λ/E MUX/ MUX/ E/λ
OSC+UDC DEMUX 2Mbps 2Mbps DEMUX OSC+UDC
UDC UDC
SUPERVISION MANAGER
SPI INTERFACE
Figure 285. SPVM2 block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 374 / 554
554
4.4.2.1 Description of the supported functionalities
The following functionalities are supported:
1) Management of one or two bidirectional supervision streams at 2 048 Kbit/s, one for Line termi-
nal applications and one for each side of the link in back–to–back or OADM applications.
2) Management of Data Communication Channels DCCm and DCCr; four data streams are made
available to the Equipment Controller (EC) via a backpanel bus, and are used for network man-
agement.
3) Management of K1/K2 data stream at 128 Kbit/s; this data stream (terminated in the unit) is
made available to the equipment controller.
4) Management of E2 audio channel: The default configuration enables to drop the audio channel.
It is possible to call a specific NE or to make a conference call. The phone number of the NE
is set with the two front panel coding wheels. dial #00 for a conference call and #XX (with XX
strictly greater than 10 for a specific call).
The Line Terminal or back–to–back terminals and OADM configurations are done by software.
4.4.2.1.1 Functional Description of the configurations
As described on two following figures the data of OSC channel at 1510 nm are sent to the matrix into a
2 Mbit/s signal to the supervision frame management functional block. This block generates one/or two
TDM signals according to the NE configuration.
(daughter board)
Tx1 optical
transmitter
MCC
OMDX,
OSC OADM
WDM Rx
1510 nm
or OAC
Matrix board
Rx1 optical
receiver
Supervision frame
management
SPVM
TDM1
ESC board
Figure 286. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 375 / 554
554
West East
(daughter board) (daughter board)
Tx2 optical Tx1 optical
transmitter transmitter
OMDX,

OMDX, MCC MCC

OADM
OSC 2
WDM Rx
OSC 1 OADM
1510 nm 1510 nm
or OAC or OAC
Matrix board
board Rx2 optical Rx1 optical
receiver receiver
Supervision frame
management
SPVM TDM2 TDM1
ESC board
Figure 287. SPVM board in an OADM or Back–To–Back configuration
N.B. When the network comprises NEs connected in a ring, at least one NE must be configured with
the SPVM board in ”Local Clock” configuration (to avoid clock loop). SPVM board for the others
NE can be configured in ”Remote Clock” configuration.
User channels
The 2Mbps and 64Kbps channels exchanged with UIC, are drop–insert connected by default.
4.4.2.3 Management of two SPVM boards
From the Release 1.3 and in a configuration where a CPE is linked to a 1696MS in a ring, the 1696MS
is able to manage the first SPVM board (East and West of the Ring), plus one SPVM managing the OSC
to/from CPE(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 376 / 554
554
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC)
The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) is used along with the MVAC board as a key element of
the automatic equalization process into the 1696MS system, providing the ITU–T entire C–band monitor-
ing function in terms of channel power and wavelength (no OSNR).

up to 8
monitored
points)
MP1
1x8
fiber– Optical Alarm&
optic Channel Control
switch Monitoring Unit
MP8
electrical interfaces
Front panel PC
card presence
2
PC Electrical Link
OSMC
Figure 288. OMSC block diagram
The purpose of this board is to measure the power per channel at several points of a node.
This board receives its optical input signals from any point of the tranmission path and it measures the
power of each channel.
Up to 8 locations (4 per direction) are possible on monitoring or direct ports (see Figure 289. on page 377)
– before and after first and second stage of an amplifier
– before a demultiplexer
– after a multiplexer.
Rx Tx
1 2
Rx Tx
OSMC
Tx Rx
2 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tx Rx
Figure 289. OSMC connection (measured points)
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 377 / 554
554
The front panel PC electrical interface is used to send the data directly to a PC.
For the absolute channels power measurement, an offset (called calibration factor) must be available in
order to consider the loss of the monitoring splitter. Each power is given before the monitoring splitter.

Functional Description

The 8 x input ports are connected to a 1 x 8 electro mechanical latching fiber optic switch: when the system
wants to select a specific port, it sends an order thru the SPI bus that in turns make the Control Unit to
properly bias the switch command pins by making it switching to the selected position. As soon as the new
position is raised the switch will rest in that position until a new stimuli occurs.
The output WDM signal is then forwarded to the OCM module through a 90/10 TAP coupler, the 10%
branch being devoted to a broadband photo–detection, performed by a PIN photodiode followed by a loga-
ritmic amplification in order to provide system calibration.
The OCM goal is to perform a spectral analisys of the C–band, from 192 THz (ch#20) to 196 THz (ch#60),
every 100 GHz, as regards channel power and wavelength.
The Alarms and Control unit provides a digital interface between peripheral components (OCM, Optical
switch..) the NE needs to get access to and the SPIDER local interface it is connected to. Main functions are
– channel power calibration and board calibration
– OCM interfacing, data post–processing and alarms generation
– optical switch control and monitoring
– photo detection and board temperature digital processing
– OOS led control
The SPI interface terminates the SPI bus used for control and monitoring between OSMC (slave) and ESC.
The two EEPROMs provides Remote Inventory data and board specific parameters (ECID).
The power supply module performs incoming –48V rails filtering, over–voltage and current protections,
board feeding generating the needed voltages (+3.3V, +5V..), alarms monitoring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 378 / 554
554
4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (I–LINK_M)
This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C shelf and allows to manage up to three shelves (one master
shelf and two slave shelves) by using only one ESC board (cost–saving solution).
The I–LINK_M board is located in the master compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with the I–
LINK_S board (slave board) located in each slave shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack up
to three subracks. Hence
– the ESC board has to be plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
– the I–LINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf
– the I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.
The I–LINK_M is mainly dedicated to connect the SPI bus (and the card presence signals) from the ESC
to the slave shelves, where no ESC unit is provided.
The connection between I–LINK_M and each I–LINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between I–LINK_M and other I–LINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
BACK FRONT
+5V
I–Link_M
PANEL PANEL
M1 + +3.3V
Power
48Vdc – +2.5V
supply
VBatt HWF
+3.6V
card pres
sLAVE SHELF 1
RS485 CONNECTOR
Transceiver SPI
M2 M7
SPI Card Presence
Power Interface
Supplies SLOT ID Card Presence
(Spider)
Bus SLAVE 1 sLAVE SHELF 2
BOARD CONNECTOR
REMOTE
DATA
INVENTORY SPI
(ECID)
EEPROM EEPROM M8
Card Presence
Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 2 sLAVE SHELF 3
CONNECTOR
(NOT USED)
SPI
M5
Card Presence Bus M9
Card Card Presence
Presence FPGA RS485
Transceivers Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 3
Figure 290. I–Link_M block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 379 / 554
554
4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (I–LINK_S)
This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C slave shelf giving the possibility to add up to two 1696MS_C
slave shelves to the master shelf.

Using the I–Link_S unit allows to save the cost of the reuse of an ESC unit giving the possibility to link the

SPI bus and the Card Presence signal of each slave shelf to the master shelf, thus connecting these sig-
nals to the ESC boards, only provided in Master shelf.
The I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in each slave compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with
the I–LINK_M board (master board) located in master shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack
up to three subracks (1 master shelf and two slave shelves). Hence
– the I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.
– the I–LINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf
The connection between I–LINK_M and each I–LINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between I–LINK_M and other I–LINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
The I–Link_S unit includes

– SPIDER, Remote Inventory and Data EEPROM (ECID)
– 1 connector for the master shelf.
BACK FRONT
I–Link_S
PANEL +5V PANEL
M1 + +3.3V
Power
48Vdc – supply +2.5V
VBatt HWF
+3.6V
card pres
RS485
Transceiver
M2
SPI
Power Interface
Supplies SLOT ID (Spider)
BOARD
REMOTE sLAVE SHELF
DATA
INVENTORY CONNECTOR
(ECID)
EEPROM EEPROM SPI
M10
Card Presence
Card Presence Bus
M5
Card Presence Bus
Card
Presence FPGA RS485
Transceivers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 291. I–Link_S block diagram
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 380 / 554
554
4.5 General user interfaces
Two main functions are supported by the various small units: provide the power supply to the other units
and provide the electrical interfaces to the operators.
The various functions are divided into small boards plugged in the bottom of the shelf (cf. Figure 292. ).
Each of these boards supports a SPI Bus interface and some card presence wires.
LAN
access

OMDX + EXP + SPV
QB
Matrix Slot
Matrix Slot
OMDX
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
ESC
Power supply B
Power supply A
User Interface
User Interface
L
P A H R U U P
S optical protection units K A optical protection units I I S
N I C C C
C C
FANC
House Keeping
Rack alarms
Figure 292. Electrical access, slot description

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 381 / 554
554
4.5.1 LAN board
IE–LAN INPUT TP – RJ45

ETHERNET
INTERFACE

IE–LAN OUT ADAPTER
COAX TRANSC
hex rotary switches

EQTYPE
SHELF–ID
N.B. If a wire is plugged on J45, BNC is un-
available.
Figure 293. Block diagram of control LAN board
4.5.1.1 Lan board purposes
The purposes of the LAN board are the following:
– to provide the physical layer for the QB interface between the Equipment shelf (ESC board) and an
external supervisor (e.g. 1353SH),.
– to provide the 4 bits Equipment type Codification, necessary to give to the application stored in the
Equuipment Controller.
– to provide the 8 bits Shelf IDentification number (i.e.: MAC address), necessary to build up the IP
address of the shelf where the LAN board is installed.
4.5.1.2 Lan board description
The LAN board has to be plugged in the slot 26 for the Maser shelf (LAN_Q) or slot #8 of 1696MS_C shelf.
It is linked to the ESC board by backpanel link.
A second LAN (LAN_I) in the slot 27 is used to link to the Slave shelf with a LAN board on the slot 27.
The link to an external supervision equipment is ensured by 2 BNC connectors or by one RJ 45 connector.
The Equipment Type Codification is ensured by the hexadecimal rotary switch CW3.
The Shelf IDentification is ensured by the two hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2.
N.B. The LAN_I functionality is not foreseen in a 1696MS_C shelf.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 382 / 554
554
4.5.1.3 Lan board Hardware setting
Equipment Type Codification
The hexadecimal rotary switch CW3 is in charge of setting up the equipment type. The CW3 factory
setting is the value ’5’, for the 1696MSPAN. It must not be changed.
Shelf Identification number
The hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2 are in charge of setting up the shelf Identification
number. The CW1 factory setting is the value ’B’ and the CW2 factory setting is the value ’F’. These
default values are the identification number of the master shelf.
For the different shelves, the switches setting values are:
Shelf Slot Function Switch settings
CW1 CW2 CW3
Master 26 ELAN B F 5
Master 27 ILAN B F 5
Expansion 1 26 ELAN 7 F 5
Expansion 1 27 ILAN 7 F 5
Expansion 2 26 ELAN 3 F 5
Expansion 2 27 ILAN 3 F 5
Expansion 3 26 ELAN E F 5
Expansion 3 27 ILAN E F 5
A B C
CW 1 CW 2 CW 3
D E F
Front Panel Back Panel

Rotary Wheels 6 pins host for jumper
Figure 294. LAN board settings
It is not necessary to configure expansion shelves in this order, but it is necessary to give the corresponding
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
expansion number to the craft Terminal.

For example if only one drop shelf is present, its LAN baord can be configured (3, F, 5) but then to be de-
fined as ”Expansion 2”.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 383 / 554
554
Jumper configuration
For operation with the ESC, 1696 MS R1.3 and later, the jumper setting equipment for all LAN cards is
the same regardless of which slot they are installed in. Only the following jumper settings are permitted:

• No jumper
• Jumper between pins A–D
N.B. During NE upgrade from R1.1, the jumper settings of all installed LAN cards should be checked
and modified as necessary to comply with the above.
For a Compact NE (1696MS_C), the switches setting values are mandatory (B, F, 5).
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK)
8 house–keeping accesses are provided in both direction (8 inputs and 8 outputs).
The HK board is plugged in the slot 36 of the master shelf.
Connector: sub–D 25 pins (see section 2.4.2.1, page 128).
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI)
The RAI board monitors the rack alarms. Each shelf (master and expansion shelf) is equipped with this
card in the slot 37in 1696MSPAN and in slot 9 or 10 in master shelf of 1696MS_C.
1696 MSPAN alarms are analysed either by the Equipment Shelf Controller or directly by the Rack Alarm
Interface board. In function of the importance of these alarms, the ESC generates signals to turn on LEDs
on PDU or TRU card and so to alert the user.
2 ways of working are available:
– for the Interfacing with the PDU

The RAI cards in the same rack are linked to each other as shown on Figure 295. And the RAI
card in the master shelf is linked with the PDU.
– for the Interfacing with the TRU

The same way of working can be proposed, but also a direct link between each shelf and the
TRU (cf. Figure 295. ).
The RAI card inputs are alarms coming from the FAN card, from the PSC, from the shelf just below (if any)
and from the Equipment Controller (for the RAI card in the master shelf). Taking the various inputs into
account the rack lamps are lit on or off.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 384 / 554
554
Rack Alarms
It is used to connect the rack lamps. These lamps differ from the ETSI rack to the ANSI one.
Table 68. PDU Front Panel LED Markings

Marking LED Color DESCRIPTION
CRI red Critical: critical alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MAJ red Major: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MIN yellow Major: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
RACK red Rack Alarm: alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack or in
the PDU
Table 69. TRU Front Panel LED Markings
Marking LED Color DESCRIPTION
URG red Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
NURG yellow Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
ATTD red Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
SIG PRSC green signal presence (power on)
Connectors: (see section 2.4.2.2, page 128).

– SUB–D 9 pins female
– RJ11 6pins female.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 385 / 554
554
OPTINEX RACK
NEBS 2000 RACK

Top rack unit

Power Distribution Unit
Air deflector Air deflector
Slot 37
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 295. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 386 / 554
554
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC)
4.5.4.1 Description
Some user information are carried by the SPV channel: they are extracted from the SPV frame by the
SPVM board and access via dedicated electrical connectors on the User Interfaces cards.
Those small boards have to be plugged under the corresponding SPVM board and in the slot beside.
SPVM
AUXA2
AUXA1
AUXB2
AUXB1
SPI SPI
NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

G703 G703 G703 G703
AUX1, AUX2 AUX1, AUX2
UIC UIC
2Mbps USER ACCESS 2Mbps USER ACCESS
Figure 296. 2 Mbit/s back–panel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit
The E2 analogic voice channel is available through a jack in the front panel of the SPVM board.
Auxiliary Channels Interfaces:

– up to two 2 Mb/s bi–directional links (user 2 Mb/s) – G 703
– one analogic link.
N.B. In default configuration the E2 channel is configured in ”drop/insert” configuration.

In a CPE configuation, auxiliary channels are in a hardware configuration (fixed).
N.B. The UIC possibility is provided for 1696MS and not for 1696MS_C Equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 387 / 554
554
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC)
4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards

4.6.1.1 Description
See Figure 297. on page 389. The purpose of this protection unit is to perform passive OCh protection
(linear configuration), OSNC Protection (ring configuration).
There are five types of Optical Protection Card (OPC), listed in the following:
• Single Mode OPC with jumpers (SM OPC)
• Multi Mode OPC with jumpers (MM OPC)
• Single Mode OPC with connectors (SM OPC FCP)
• Multi Mode OPC with connectors (MM OPC FCP)
• Multi Mode OPC with connectors 850 nm (MM OPC 850)
Only OPC cards with connectors can be used with all interface cards (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY).
The main difference between the Single Mode OPC and the Multi Mode OPC (with connectors and with
jumpers) boards is the 50/50 Rx optical splitter:
• the SM OPCs have a single mode splitter
• the MM OPCs have a multi mode splitter and a higher optical loss.
The OPC board can be connected to

– two transponders (protected channel / protecting channel)
– two drawers of two different 4xANY (_S, _P) boards.
It can be placed in slots 28 to 35 and in slots 38 to 45, just below the two transponders/4xANY.
As an example,
– if the two transponders are plugged in slots 4 and 5, to perform the channel protection the OPC is
plugged in slot 28 or 29
– if the two 4xANY_P are plugged in slots 4,5 and 6,7 to perform the channel protection the up to four
OPCs (MM OPC 850) are plugged in slots 28, 29, 30, 31.
The signal coming from the client is connected on RX input and crosses the board through a 3 dB splitter.
By means of the RX 1&2 OUT OPC cables/connectors, it is then sent to the two transponders (RX user
inputs), placed in the slots just above in the double shelf.
The signal coming from the WDM world is transmitted by the two adjacent transponders (user Tx outputs)
to the inputs of the other splitter of the OCh protection unit (TX1IN and TX2IN). The selected signal is sent
to the client via the Tx OUT port.
On each board are located

– two broadband (1310 nm and 1550 nm) 3 dB splitters/couplers for SM/MM OPC and SM/MM OPC FCP
– two 850 nm 3 dB splitters/couplers for MM OPC 850
Depending on the configuration, are available:
• a single mode splitter on RX line of the SM OPC
• a multi mode splitter on RX line of the MM OPC
• a single mode coupler on TX line of both the SM and MM OPCs.
LOS detection and power measurement are provided on the following input signals
• Rx IN, coming from the client
• Tx 1 IN and Tx 2 IN, coming from the main and spare transponders / 4xANY_P
by means of three 95/5 couplers (one per monitored signal) which extract the 5% of the received optical
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
signals and send each of them to a photodiode (optical receiver) performing LOS detection and measure-
ments. The LOS alarm is sent to the Alarm Interface and then to:
• the two transponders / 4xANY_P via backpanel connections
• the ESC board via the SPI bus.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 388 / 554
554
The selection of the signal is made by the transponders.
The Remote Inventory data are available via the SPI bus.
Two external voltages are supplied by the PSC units. On–board fuse protection and hardware failure con-
trol are available.
to transponders/4xANY_P drawers
3dB optical RX OUT
from client
splitter Channel1
MMF or SMF*
RX IN 95/5 50/50 MMF or SMF*
RX OUT
Channel2
Optical LOS
Receiver**
from transponders/4xANY_P drawers
3dB optical
TX IN 95/5 coupler
Channel1
to client
SMF TX
SMF 50/50
TX IN OUT
95/5
Channel2
towards transponders
Backplane connector
Optical LOS1
Receiver**
Optical LOS2
Receiver**
Alarm
Interface**
2
Card
presence
N.B. * on Multi Mode OPC boards, the RX line is MMF type

on Single Mode OPC boards, the RX line is SMF type.
The TX line is always SMF.
N.B. ** The optical receivers and the alarm interface are not available on SM OPC without connectors board.
Figure 297. OPC block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 389 / 554
554
4.6.2 Optical Multiplex Section Protection: OMSP unit

OMSP is a small board containing an optical splitter and an optical switch, able to select an incoming signal

among two. It performs optical multiplex section protection.

On the transmission side, with the optical splitter, the signal from MUX output is broadcasted on the main/
working fiber and the spare/protecting fiber.
On the receiver side, the optical switch will select to receive the optical signal coming from the main/work-
ing fiber and the spare/protecting fiber under the control of board logic. The optical signal coming out from
the optical switch is sent to DEMUX module of OMDX board.
Both the incoming signals powers are measured thanks to a 95/5 coupler and a photodiode enabling
– to raise a LOS alarm if the actually selected signal power falls
– to know if the spare signal (the incoming signal not selected) is present.
If a LOS appears on the main signal and the spare signal is present, the board switches to the spare signal.
The board commits the order given by the SC: if the SC forces the board to switch, the switch is effective.
The OMSP board can be used on a line that is amplified or not:
– LOS threshold:
• the default value for LOS alarm thresholds for both input lines is –38 dBm
• the LOS alarm threshold is configurable on the board, and is configurable by the operator, but
both lines have the same LOS alarm threshold
– Switch Status:
• the OMSP protection can have two status : Automatic or Forced
• the Forced status can be on the Main line or on the Spare one
• the board commits the order given by the Shelf Controller : if SC forces the board to switch, the
switch is effective. It means that the CPLD on board does not verify that the path on which it is
asked to switch is correct (no LOS). It means that “Manual switch” is not foreseen on this board,
but only “Force switch”
– Measures:
• the OMSP board enables measure of power level of both lines (in dBm).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 390 / 554
554
In point–to–point application, the OMS protection scheme is divided into the following two sorts:
MUX / splitter switch DEMUX

AMPLI / AMPLI
DEMUX switch splitter MUX /

/ AMPLI AMPLI
MUX / splitter switch splitter switch DEMUX

AMLI / AMPLI
OADM
DEMUX switch splitter switch splitter MUX /

/ AMPLI AMPLI
Figure 298. OMSP Application with and without OADM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 391 / 554
554
CH1 out
from Optical
Mux / splitter

Ampli

CH2 out

to 95:5
CH1 in
Demux
Optical
/ Ampli
Optical switch
95:5
switch CH2 in
state
Optical
CPLD switch
driver
LOS2
Optical input
power detection,
measurements,
LOS judgment
Value2
ADC
Value1
Optical input
power detection,
measurements,
LOS1 LOS judgment
SPI Spider
bus
+5.5V
+3.6V
Figure 299. OMSP unit block diagram
4.6.2.1 OMSP optical characteristics

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 392 / 554
554
4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3)
Two power supply units are used: working and protecting.

They are located at each side of the shelf, in the slots 25 and 48.
For the block diagram, refer to Figure 300. on page 393.

The Power Supply Cards are monitored via the SPI bus.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is –36 / –72 V.
Front panel Connector: sub–D 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 128).
LEDs signification
Table 70. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification

HardWare Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2)
This board is the same as PSC and PSC3 but needs to supply less power, because it has been designed
for 1696MS_C, hosting only 13 slots.
PSC2 are used in main and slave compact shelves.
Two power supply units are used: working and protecting. They are located at each side of the shelf, in
the slots 7 and 12, and they are monitored via the SPI bus.
These boards are with the 0V isolation.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The current limit is 6A.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is –36 / –72 V.
Front panel Connector: sub–D 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 128).
The LEDs signification is shown in Table 70.
PSC2
–Batt_A
+Batt
* protection * OR Batt
GND * pre–filter
* EMI/EMC –Batt
+Batt_A * fuse
filter
3.6V * soft start

dual DC/DC * EMI/EMC
5.5V converter filter
* threshold
TO GENERIC BOARD TO GENERIC BOARD
Figure 300. PSC2 block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 393 / 554
554
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU)
The PMU is strictly dedicated to the 1696MS_C.

It is an external shelf able to feed the compact shelf providing the –48 Vdc to the power supply cards.

Hence the 1696MS_C can be fed

– by the classical –48Vdc provided by the telecom rack
– by the –48Vdc provided by the PMU, able to deliver this powering from any alternative voltage source.
The PMU is an external shelf of the same size that the 1696MS_C, which can be installed in 19“, 21“ and
23“ racks. This additional shelf is 1U high (1U = 44.45mm).
The PMU works in a worldwide environment, which applies to the following requirements:
– US requirements : NEBS compliant (115V/ 60Hz),
– Japan requirements (100V/ 50/60Hz),
– Europe requirements (230V/ 50Hz).
PSC boards are connected to the rectifiers of the PMU which provide the power.
PMU Control unit is connected to the FAN_C board and the tw0 PSC/PSC2 to provide alarms to the Net-
work Element since this unit in not managed by the software.
6 12 PSC(2)
–48Vdc (power supply)

5 11
F A N _C
4 10
3 9
2 8
13 1 7 PSC(2)
PMU alarms
in1 in2
CONTROL
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 UNIT
PMU
–48Vdc
from any alternative voltage source (100Vac, 115Vac, 230Vac) from back–up batteries (optional)
Figure 301. PMU cabling scheme
Description
Refer to Figure 302. on page 395. The PMU architecture is made up of:
– 2 VAC inputs
– 2 VDC outputs without fuses
– 1 battery connection
– one cintrol unit
– 2 rectifiers modules
On DC voltage outputs, no fuses are required because the 1696MS_C has on his PSC unit fuses on inputs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The outputs are connected together, so they can protect each all the DC outputs.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 394 / 554
554
Two rectifiers modules are present in one PMU. Each modules is able to supply with power up to 4 stacked
1696MS_C.
One module enables to supply the 4 stacked shelves. If one module fails, the other one can still supply
the 4 shelves.
The Control Unit must be able to provide the following functions

– deliver 2 outputs 48VDC
– transmit alarms to the host (FAN_C board)
– manage the battery
– manage Status Leds.
DC output 1
M1
AC input 1 –
+ M2
M5
DC output 2
AC input 2 –
M6
+
+ Batt
M3
Discarge
– Batt
Protect
To Batt
AC in1 presence
AC in2 presence Control

Unit M4
Batt presence
Alarms
Figure 302. PMU block diagram
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU
Batteries are optional units used with the PMU in order to supply the –48V to the 1696MS_C in case of
power outage of the alternative power source (100V/115V/220V supply).
Battery units are linked to the Control unit of the PMU by cascading the units.
The first battery gives a temperature measurement of the unit to the PMU so as to generate an alarm when
out of the range.
It is possible to add up to three optional batteries. This depends of the current consumption of the shelves
(150W per battery).
Performance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 15 hours with 1 PMU and 1 shelf.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 60 hours with 1 PMU and 4 shelves.
The Battery duration for 150W must be of 3 hours.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 395 / 554
554
Mechanical dimension of each battery: W = 446.02 mm; L = 284 mm; H = 133.35 mm.
Batteries can be inserted in a 19“, 21“ (ETSI) and 23“ (ANSI) rack or put on table.
In Rack Version, the batteries are located below the PMU.

6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
–48Vdc
3 9
2 8
13 1 7 PSC(2)
in1 in2
PMU RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 CONTROL
UNIT
–48Vdc
Battery with
captor of
temperature
Optional
Figure 303. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version
In table version, batteries are located and stacked besides the PMU and 1696MS_C shelves; only this
configuration is supported since a battery is not likely to hold the full stack of batteries, PMU and shelves.
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
2 8 Optional Battery
13 1 7 PSC(2)
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
Optional Battery
–48Vdc
2 8
13 1 7 PSC(2)
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
2 8 Battery with
13 1 7 PSC(2) captor of
temperature
in1 in2 Optional
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 CONTROL
UNIT
PMU
Figure 304. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 396 / 554
554
4.10 FANS unit
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf

As the power consumption of the transponder is high enough (about 20–25 W / unit), fans are necessary
to dissipate the heat.
The fans are located at the bottom of the shelf. The use of fans requires to put an air filter just below. This
is shown on Figure 305.

OMDX + EXP + SPV
OAC (OPTIONAL)
OAC (OPTIONAL)
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
OMDX
ESC
FANS
Air filter
Figure 305. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning
One FAN module is placed at the bottom of the shelf, in the slot 49.
The FANS are monitored via SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the House Keeping/Remote Alarms
module to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.
Max Power dissipation per shelf: 400 W.
New FANC unit for 1696MS shelf
In Rel. 2.2A has been introduced a new FAN board with improved efficienty, because of the high consump-
tion of the new boards.
Main characteristics:
– air flow increase
– FAN speed controlled as a function of the air temperature:
• if temperature is lower than 35°C, the FAN speed is normal
• if temperature is higher than 35°C, the FAN speed increases quickly
– FAN1, FAN2, FAN3 speeds are independednt
– the three front panel LEDs indicate the FAN speed state.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 397 / 554
554
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
Speed detector Speed detector Speed detector

LED
controller
DATA
SPI
Spider RI
bus
ECID
+48V Power
HWF
+3.6V Supply
Figure 306. Block diagram of the new FAN unit
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf
On the 1696MS_C shelf, FAN unit is located on the left side of the compact shelf. The use of fans requires
to put an air filter just below.
Air filter
OOADM1ch+OSCE PSC(2)
OOADM1ch+OSCW Hk
FAN_C
SPV managenement RAI

TRNSPONDER OPC
TRNSPONDER Lan_Q
ESC PSC(2)
Figure 307. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning
FAN_C unit takes place in the left slot of 1696MS_C shelf and is equipped with two fans with speedometer
sensor to dissipate the heat coming from Transponder and 4xANY boards essentially. FAN_C board is
mandatory provided.
FAN_C board enables the link to the Power Management Unit (PMU) which is an external frame containing
the rectifier AC/DC to enable the plugging in the main supply).
The logical alarms generated by the PMU (PMU presence, Minor and Major) are sent to the FAN_C board’s
SPIDER where they are red by the shelf Controller (ESC).
This alarm is used by the software to inhibit or not both others. If the alarm is not raised, (PMU absent),
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the MAJOR and MINOR alarms are inhibited.
MINOR (resp. MAJOR) alarm means that one (resp. two) rectifier is defective or out of the functioning
range.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 398 / 554
554
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics

5.1.1 Main system characteristics
General
Optical bit rate, client side the bit rates indicated with (*) are 3R, the others are 2R (MCC1 only)
– MCC2, MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 any bit rate between 100Mbps and 2.66Gbps (*)
– MCC1 100 Mbps : FDDI

125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI
132.815 Mbps : FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200.00 Mbps : ESCON
265.620 Mbps : FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270 Mbps : Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV
275.176 Mbps : DS4
400.352 Mbps : J5
466.560 Mbps : OC–9
531.250 Mbps : FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
933.120 Mbps : OC–18
1062.5 Mbps : Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
1250 Mbps : Gigabit Ethernet (*)
1866.240 Mbps : OC–36
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC (*)
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48 (*)
2500 Mbps : Infiniband
– 0CC10 9953.28 Mbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN (*)

10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN (*)
– 4xANY 125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI (*)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200.00 Mbps : ESCON (*)
270 Mbps : Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV (*)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
1062.5 Mbps : Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
Optical bit rate, WDM side
– MCC1, MCC2, MCC3, the same of all the clients bit rates, in the correspondent wavelength (λ)
MCC_RGN, WLA2, WLA3
– 4xANY 2488.320 Mbps : STM–16 / OC–48

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– OCC10 10.709 Gbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN + FEC

11.096 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN + FEC
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 399 / 554
554
Type of optical fiber According to ITU–T G.652, G.653, G.654, G.655
Central frequencies and wavelength see Table 72. on page 404
Application types Terminal Multiplexer (LT), back–to–back terminals (HUB), OADM in

protected and unprotected linear links and rings, In Line Amplifier,
CPE
Interfaces types Electrical interfaces: 2Mbps G.703, 64Kbps (user channels)
Optical interfaces: all the client and WDM interfaces above listed
Applied standards
ITU–T Recommendation G.681 Functional characteristics of interoffice and long–haul line systems
using optical amplifiers, including optical multiplexing
ITU–T Recommendation G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
ITU–T Recommendation G.693 Optical interfaces for intra–office–systems
ITU–T Recommendation G.709 Network Node Interface for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU–T Recommendation G.957 Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the syn-
chronous digital hierarchy
ITU–T Recommendation G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for
use on optical fibre cables
ETS 300 232 A1 Transmission and multiplexing; Optical interfaces for equipments
and systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
GR – 253 – CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Com-
mon Generic Criteria, issue 2C
IEEE G.802.3 Gigabit Ethernet specification
ANSI x 3.184 1993 standards FE and FDDI specification
ANSI x 3.320 standard (100–SM–LL–I) FC and FICON specification
IBM SA–0394–03 ESCON specification
ITU–T BT.656–4, BT1363–1, BT1367 Digital Video specification
SMPTE 292M–1998 Television – Bit Serial Digital Interface for High–Definition Television
Systems
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
GR – 63 – CORE Network Equipment – Building System (NEBS) Requirements:
Physical Protection, issue 1
ITU–T Recommendation G.664 Optical Safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
IEC 825 Safety of laser products
EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical
business equipment
GR – 1089 – CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Cri-
teria for Network Telecommunication equipment
pr ETS 300 386–1 Equipment Engineering ; Public telecommunication network equip-
pr ETS 300 386–2–2 ment. Electro–magnetic compatibility requirements:
Part 1 : Product family overview, compliance criteria and test levels
Part 2–2 : Product specific compliance criteria and operating condi-
tions – Transmission equipment, Version : 0.7, 1996.02.29
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ITU–T Recommendation G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the synchronous digital hierarchy to be published
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 400 / 554
554
SMPTE RP184–1996 Specification of Jitter in Bit–Serial Digital Systems
T11/98 – 055 Fiber Channel – Methodologies for Jitter Specification
EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference charac-
teristics of information technology equipment

ETS 300 019–1–1 Equipment Engineering: Environmental conditions and environ-

ETS 300 019–1–2 mental tests for telecommunications equipment. Classification of
ETS 300 019–1–3 environmental conditions (storage/transportation/stationary use)
Add–Drop and Cross–Connect features

Connectivity Tributary to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment
Mux/Demux to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment
Tributary to tributary wavelength assigment
Loopbacks
Protections
Network protections Optical SNCP
Equipment optical protections 1+1 MCC1 / MCC2 / MCC3
1+1 MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected)
1+1 4xANY (each client/drawer can be protected)
1+1 (MCC2 / MCC3) + OAC
1+1 OCC10
1+1 OCC10 + OAC
1+1 the two channels of the WLA2M_OP (not the board)
1+1 the two channels of the WLA3CDOP (not the board)
Powering protections 1+1 Power Supply Card
Management interfaces
Functions provided – Q3 interf with PC (ECT/RECT), 1353SH and 1354RM NMS
(on terminal)
– Station alarms
– Equipment Alarm status (indicated by the front cover LEDs)
– Visual indications for card fail.
Management interfaces supported: – Q3/TL1 to connect a Local or Remote Equipment Craft Termi-
nal
– Ethernet (on LAN_Q board) to connect the OS 1353SH and
other ALCATEL NE’s with ETHERNET Interface
– QECC to connect other Q3 NEs
Local interface: Craft Interface (PC) RS232 SUB–D 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps
Remote interface: Craft Interface (PC) RS232 SUB–D 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps.
It handles up to 32 NEs via DCC (D1D3 and/or
D4D12)
Remote interface: Transmission Management ITU–T G.773 10 base–2 and 10 base–T
Network (TMN) interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Protocol Stack/Informa- Q3/QECC or TL1

tion Model messages
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 401 / 554
554
Operation processes (management interfaces functions)
Configuration and provisioning Equipment, Units; Add–Drop; Cross–connection, Synchronization,
Protection, Alarms status, Maintenance memory for all the equip-

ment events

Software download It is made locally as well as remotely on non volatile memories with-
out traffic interruption
Performance monitoring (on B1 byte) According to ITU–T G.784, G.826, , G.821, M.2101.1
Remote Inventory At rack, subrack and board level
Unit and equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory: Company id, Unit type, Unit part num-
ber, Software part number, CLEI code, Manufacturing Plant, Date
Identifier, Date of construction... For details, refer to the operator’s
handbook
Security Password, operator profile, back up for programs and data
Unit substitution characteristics
For transponders (MCC, OCC10), opti- without traffic interruption in case of Optical SNCP
cal amplifiers and Mux/Demux
For 4xANY without traffic interruption if all 4xANY drawers/clients are protected
Housekeeping (HK)
Number of housekeeping accesses 8 inputs and 8 outputs
Connector SUB–D 25 pins
Output HK signals–CPO (Remote By electronic relay contacts to be connected to the external negative
alarms used for remote control) voltage
– Max. guaranteed current with 50 mA

closed condition
– Max. allowed voltage with open –72 V
condition
– Voltage drop vs ground with –2 V ÷ 0 V
closed condition
Input housekeeping signals (CPI)
– Max. guaranteed current with 3 mA
closed condition
– Max. allowed voltage with open –72 V
condition
– Voltage drop vs ground with –2 V ÷ 0 V
closed condition
Rack Alarms (RAI)
Connector SUB–D 9 pins
Max. guaranteed current with closed 100 mA
condition Voltage difference between Common out and OUT < 2,5 Volts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Resistance of the closed relay = 300 Mohm max

Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 402 / 554
554
Automatic shutdown
According to IEC 825 and ITU–T Rec. G.958 regarding ALS
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) characteristics

Digital signal
Nominal bit rate 4 864 kbit/s (default configuration) => 2Mb for LAPD + 2 Mb for User
Coding asynchr. scrambled (215–1) + synchronous scrambled (27–1) NRZ
SPV Optical Path
Attenuation range 9 ÷ 49 dB
Maximum dispersion 4000 ps/nm
Maximum reflectance 27 dB
Minimum ORL of cable plant at S, 24 dB
including any connector
SPV Receiver specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–9 –50 dBm ÷ –47 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–9 –6 dBm
Maximum receiver reflectance –28 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification
Type of source DFB
Wavelength 151010 nm
Maximum –20 dB width 1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 33 dB
Optical Output power –1 dBm ÷ +4 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB
Clock characteristics
Transponders support 3R regeneration. External clock is not required
Table 71. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Central wavelength (nm) Channel Number Wavelength deviation (nm)

1471 1470 6.5
1491 1490 6.5
1511 1510 6.5
1531 1530 6.5
1551 1550 6.5
1571 1570 6.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1591 1590 6.5

1611 1610 6.5
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 403 / 554
554
Table 72. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Central frequency Central wavelength (nm)

Band Channel Number

(GHz) (CT name) wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL)

192,000 20 1561,42
192,100 21 1560,61
192,200 22 1559,79
192,300 23 1558,98
L2
192,500 25 1557,36
192,600 26 1556,55
192,700 27 1555,75
192,800 28 1554,94
BLUE
BAND
193,000 30 1553,33
193,100 31 1552,52
193,200 32 1551,72
193,300 33 1550,92
L1
193,500 35 1549,32
193,600 36 1548,51
193,700 37 1547,72
193,800 38 1546,92
194,200 42 1543,73
194,300 43 1542,94
194,400 44 1542,14
194,500 45 1541,35
S2
194,700 47 1539,77
194,800 48 1538,98
194,900 49 1538,19
195,000 50 1537,40
RED
BAND
195,200 52 1535,82
195,300 53 1535,04
195,400 54 1534,25
195,500 55 1533,47
S1
195,700 57 1531,90
195,800 58 1531,12
195,900 59 1530,33
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
196,000 60 1529,55
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 404 / 554
554
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism
5.2.1 Electrical safety

Safety status of the connections with TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote alarms,
other equipment Housekeeping (CPO,CPI), Rack lamps (RM) and tributary connec-
tions if K20 protected.
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
5.2.2 Electrical Safety compliance with standardized Norms
Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
• IEC 60950–1 ed. 2001
• EN 60950–1 ed. 2001
• NEBS Level 3 Bellcore GR–63 and GR–1089
5.2.2.1 Electrical Safety Labelling
The labels reproduced in para.2.2.3.1 on page 29 are affixed during factory settings.
5.2.2.2 Electrical Safety instructions
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning concern-
ing precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous voltages, are reported in para. 2.2 on pages 27
thru 34 and more specifically in para.2.2.3.2 on page 29.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 405 / 554
554
5.2.3 Optical safety
5.2.3.1 Optical Safety compliance with European Norms
Compliancy to Optical Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms:

• EN 60825–1 ed.1994 + A11 ed.1996+A2 ed.2001
• IEC 60825–1 ed.1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999)
• EN 60825–2 ed.2000
• IEC 60825–2 ed.2000
5.2.3.2 Hazard Level classification and standards
The HAZARD LEVEL of different ports of the system is widely treated in “UNIT DESCRIPTION” – of this
Technical Handbook (see paragraphs “Automatic shutdown” and “automatic shutdown” for each unit).
HAZARD LEVEL classification:
– HAZARD LEVEL 1M, according to IEC 60825–1 (1998) + Am. 2 (2001), IEC 60825–2 (2000) and
ITU–T Rec. G.664 standards or
– HAZARD LEVEL 3A, according to IEC 60825–1 (1998), IEC 60825–2 (2000)
can be assigned to all ports of the system with the exception of the 4xANY boards, classified as
HAZARD LEVEL 1 laser products.
G.664 standard defines two kinds of optical safety mechanisms :

– Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
– Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of opti-
cal amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
In order to be clearer, in the following paragraphs,
– safety procedure for transponders is called ALS
– safety procedure for amplifiers is called APSD.
5.2.3.3 Equipment classification
The 1696MSPAN equipment is classified as hazard level 1M (optical power in the [10 ÷ 21.3] dBm range).
1696MS_C equipment is also classified as hazard level 1M.
N.B. The classification refers to the IEC 60825–1 and IEC 60825–2 Standards. The OSC alone is
classified as hazard level 1.
5.2.3.4 Location type
The equipment shall be installed in “restricted location” (industrial and commercial premises) or controlled
locations (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 406 / 554
554
5.2.3.5 Optical Safety Labelling
The labeling of the optical sources is compliant with the requirements of the IEC 60825 Standard.
The labels reported below are put during factory settings. The labels are affixed on all front covers that
protect optical connectors located on the front side plate of all the units involved in optical transmission:
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1 the following explanatory label
The following label indicates the presence of a LASER beam. If the laser is a Hazard Level 1 or 1M product,
this label is not compulsory.
Example of EXPLANATORY label.
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to IEC 60825–1 (2001), IEC 60825–2
(2000) and ITU–T Rec. G.664 standards and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A according to IEC 60825–1 (1998), IEC 60825–2
(2000) and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 407 / 554
554
5.2.3.6 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an opposite connector that totally shuts up the laser

radiation.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure is implemented depending on
the location where the fibre break occurred.
ALS procedures are explained in 5.2.3.9, where shutdown and reactivation times are also reported.
5.2.3.7 Optical Safety instructions
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance and safe use including clear warning concerning
precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported on:
– section 2.2.4 on page 30 thru 31, as far as this handbook is concerned
– the appropriate parts of the other handbooks envisaged for this equipment (see section 5.2.3.8).
5.2.3.8 Automatic power shutdown with amplifiers
The APSD procedure for the 1696MS amplifiers is not implemented in current release: according to the
IEC 60825 standard, APSD is not mandatory.
5.2.3.9 Automatic Laser Shutdown at WDM side (ALS_WDM) with transponders
The ALS procedure is compliant with ITU–T G.664 recommendation.
In the 1696MSPAN the ALS procedure is proposed by the transponder cards (MCC and OCC10). The
WDM receiver shuts down the WDM transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects an Input Loss
Of Signal (ILOS, i.e.: optical input power MCC1, MCC2 and OCC10 is too low) or a loss of clock (LOC)
for MCC2 and OCC10.
The shutdown of all the transponders on the affected link is carried within less than 3 s, as required by the
ITU–T Rec. G.664.
It is up to the user to enable or disable the ALS. The default configuration is ALS–disable.
The possible ALS mode are:
– ALS disable with laser ON
– ALS disable with laser OFF
– ALS disable (default configuration)
– ALS enable.
During the ALS procedure, the OSC is still working.
This configuration is done at equipment point of view and can be sent transponder by transponder or for
a set of transponders.
The ALS is implemented in WDM terminal and OADM sites in order to have a safety mechanism indepen-
dent from the host systems. During ALS, the optional OSC is still working.
In case of fiber break, a mechanism is proposed in order to shutdown the transponders in the previous
site, before the fiber break.
In case of regenerators (back–to–back terminals) and OADM, the way of working is the same. The ALS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
procedure is done in the section when the fiber failure occurred. The WDM receiver shutdowns the WDM
transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects a Loss Of Signal (LOS) (MCC1, MCC2, OCC10) or
a Loss Of Clock (LOC) (MCC2, OCC10).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 408 / 554
554
5.2.3.9.1 ALS in non–amplified networks
In point–to–point configuration, ALS is performed in four steps (see Figure 308. ):
(1) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B

and LOC detection at WDM Tx access B (if in pass–through configuration).
(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the terminal B MCC/OCC10 boards of the
opposite transmission direction.
(3) Shutting Down all the Tx WDM access of the terminal B (step (2)), causes an ILOS detection at Rx WDM
access and a LOC detection at WDM Tx access of the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal A (if in pass–
through configuration).
(4) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal
A.
TX RX
T T
WDM D WDM
R M M R
SD U ILOS
A (4) X U LOC A
X
N (1) N
S S
P P
O O
N (3) N
D (2)
D LOC M M D
ILOS U U SD
E RX X X TX E
R WDM WDM R
terminal A terminal B
(16 or 32 ch.) (16 or 32 ch.)
SD stands for ShutDown
ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal
LOC stands for Los Of Clock
Figure 308. ALS mechanism on WDM line in point–to–point configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 409 / 554
554
For a circuit with regeneration/pass–through, ALS is performed in eight steps as described in the following
(see Figure 309. ):
(1) ILOS detection at RX WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B

and LOC detection at WDM Tx access.

(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the same trans-
mission direction and ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of the opposite transmission
direction.
(3) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of all MCC/OCC10 boards of the 16 ch. terminal
or LOC detection at Tx B&W.
(4) Shutting Down on a Tx WDM access and Tx B&W access of the 16 ch. terminal.

pass–trough channels
(2)SD
RX TX RX TX
B&W WDM D WDM WDM
M M M
(4) SD U U (1) ILOS LOC U
X X X
D D
M M
(4) SD (3) ILOS M U
U (2) SD U
X TX RX X
TX RX X
B&W WDM WDM WDM
16 channels terminal pass–trough channels (terminal B))
Figure 309. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in pass–through or in add/drop
The ALS mode for pass–through MCCs/OCC10s must be disabled to insure reliable automatic
restart. Note also that ILOS is propagated through the pass–through MCCs/OCC10s even if the
ALS mode is disable.
ALS and LOS propagation are 2 inpedendant procedures.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 410 / 554
554
The ALS procedure in a ring with OSNC–P, is the same of the previous case (circuit with regeneration/
pass–through) and the SD on the end node generates a (5) protection switch (see Figure 310. ).
TX RX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U (4) SD U
X X
D
M M
U (4) SD (3) ILOS U
X RX TX TX RX X
WDM B&W B&W WDM
protection
(5) request
M
U
U
D
X
X
(1) ILOS
(2) SD
WDM
WDM
RX
TX
LOC
ILOS
WDM
WDM
RX
TX SD
M
U
D
X
M
U
X
TX RX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U SD U
X X
D
M M
U SD ILOS U
X RX TX TX RX X
WDM B&W B&W WDM

ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal protection
LOC stands for Los Of Clock (5) request
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 310. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 411 / 554
554
5.2.3.9.2 ALS in amplified networks
See Figure 311. , Figure 312. and Figure 313.

ALS for transponders is supported in amplified networks. On the contrary, APSD is not supported for ampli-

fiers.

However, in the particular case of point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater, ALS pro-
cedure is enough to provide optical safety thanks to LOS propagation.
Amplifiers must be in APSD disable state.

TX ILOS1 ILOS2 RX
WDM D WDM
M SD1 SD2 M
SD U 1 2
U LOC
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 2 1 U SD
SD2 SD1 X
RX X TX
WDM ILOS2 ILOS1 WDM
Figure 311. ALS procedure in a point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater

TX ILOS1 ILOS2 ILOS1 ILOS2 RX

WDM D WDM
M SD1 SD2 SD1 SD2 M
SD U 1 2 1 2 LOC
U
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 2 1 2 1 U SD
SD2 SD1 SD2 SD1 X
RX X TX
WDM ILOS2 ILOS1 ILOS2 ILOS1 WDM
Figure 312. ALS mechanism with cascaded pre–amplifier and booster

TX ILOS2 ILOS1 RX
WDM D WDM
M SD2 SD1 M
SD U 2 1
U LOC
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 1 2 U SD
RX X SD1 SD2 X TX
WDM ILOS1 ILOS2 WDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 313. ALS mechanism with single pre–amplifier and booster
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 412 / 554
554
5.2.3.9.3 ALS restart concept
After an ALS occurs, one restart mode is available: Automatic restart. The time values and the restart way
of working in the various restart schemes are described in Figure 314. The restart way of working is de-
fined at equipment point of view.

As the ALS is done at MCC/OCC10 unit level, each transponder board will restart independently.
When OAC are used, the restart procedure is done by the amplifier board.
During the switch on and the switch off time, the channel wavelength remains between λ ITU ± 500 pm.
Start
Section in
operation
ALS_WDM enable
Yes Receive signal

from far end?
No
No Loss of received signal

for more than 500 ms ?
Yes
Automatic Power Shut Down
Automatic restart
Delay time
18020 s
Tx on for (200.5) s
Figure 314. Restart algorithm
The figures of the ALS timing are compliant with the ITU–T Rec.G.664. The standard recommends a pulse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
length of 2s except in the case of amplified network where the pulse length can be greater (§ 6.3 of the
standard).
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 413 / 554
554
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics

5.3.1.1 Multirate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2, MCC3, MCC_RGN) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side (MCC_RGN doesn’t have B&W interfaces)
Common optical interfaces specification, user side
Bit rate, client side with MCC2 and MCC3 using, all the bit rates are 3R
with MCC1 using, (*) indicates the 3R bit rates
100 Mbps : FDDI
132.815 Mbps : FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200 Mbps : ESCON
265.620 Mbps : FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270 Mbps : Digital Video
466.560 Mbps : OC–9
531.250 Mbps : FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
933.120 Mbps : OC–18
1062.5 Mbps : FICON (*), Fiber Channel (*)
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
1866.120 Mbps : OC–36
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC (*)
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48 (*)
2500 Mbps : INFINIBAND
2666 Mbps : NNI (MCC3 only)
Wavelength range 1260 –> 1360 nm
1470 –> 1610 nm for CWDM
User interface type S–16.1
Connector type MU horizontal for MCC1, MCC2
LC (on SFP module) for MCC3
User Rx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2 MCC3
Fiber type Multi–mode (MMF) 62.5 / 125 um
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 including path penaltly –19 dBm / 0.125 –> 1.125Gbps rate
–17 dBm / 1.125 –> 2.5 Gbps rate see para.
5.3.1.9
5 3 1 9 on
Overload @ BER = 10–10 0 dBm 0 dBm
page 426
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB –27 dB
User Tx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2 MCC3
Fiber type Single–mode (SMF)
Maximum –20 dB width 1 nm 1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB see para.
Optical Output power –5 dBm –> 0 dBm –5 dBm–> 0 dBm 5.3.1.9 on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB page 426

Shutdown time < 5 ms < 5 ms
Re–activation time < 30 ms < 30 ms
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 414 / 554
554
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side
Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side
Interface type L–16.2

Wavelength specification ITU–T G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing
Wavelength tunability tunable over 2 wavelengths
Transmitter wavelength range 1528 –> 1565 nm
Connector type MU horizontal
Center frequency 19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 72. on page 404
and para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Bit rate, WDM side transparent (output bit rate equals input bit rate)
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 (OSNR = 19 dB), includ- –27 dBm / 0.125 –> 1.125 Gbps rate
ing path penalty –26 dBm / 1.125 –> 2.5 Gbps rate
Overload @ BER = 10–10 –8 dBm –8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty (over 1800 ps/nm) 2 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (up to 3200 ps/nm) 2 dB
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB –27 dB
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Dispersion accommodation 1800 ps/nm 3200 ps/nm
Maximum –20 dB width with modulation 0.1 nm 0.1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB
Optical Output power typ : 6.5 dBm

min : 5 dBm
max : 8 dBm
Optical power at board output w/ minimum VOA – typ : 5.7 dBm

– min : 4 dBm
– max : 7.5 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Maximum EOL Center Frequency Deviation 12.3 GHz 12.3 GHz
N.B. the values are given for EOL characteristics

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 415 / 554
554
5.3.1.2 WaveLength Adapter 2 (WLA2M) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side

Common optical interfaces specification
Fiber type 9/125 μm SMF

(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426) 50/125 μm MMF
62.5/125 μm MMF
Connector type LC/PC (on SFP modules)

Bit rate, client side all the bit rates are 3R
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3
200 Mbps : ESCON
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12
1062.5 Mbps : FICON, Fiber Channel
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
1250 Mbps : Gigabit Ethernet
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48
2666 Mbps : NNI
Wavelength range 1st window for FC and GbE–SX
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426) 3rd window for L–1.2, L–4.2, L–16.2, GbE–ZX
2nd window for all the others B&W SFP
3rd window for CWDM (1470 –> 1610 nm)
User interface type S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426) S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2
I–16.1, S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2
S–16.1 multi–rate multiformat
GbE–SX, GbE–LX, GbE–ZX
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
Other User interface characteristics see para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
Optical interfaces specification, WDM side

Bit rate, WDM side transparent (CWDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Wavelength range 3rd window (1470 –> 1611nm)
WDM interface type CWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): CWA1xx
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426) CWDM interface for short haul (PIN detector): CWP1xx
Other WDM interface characteristics refer to CWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 416 / 554
554
5.3.1.3 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD) characteristics


62.5/125 μm MMF

155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3
200 Mbps : ESCON
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48
2666 Mbps : NNI
3rd window for DWDM (1529.55 –> 1561.42 nm)
I–16.1, S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
DWDM (APD)

Bit rate, WDM side transparent (WDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): DWAxxx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Other WDM interface (C/DWDM) characteristics refer to CWDM and DWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on
page 426
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 417 / 554
554
5.3.1.4 Wavelength adapter 2 with O–SNCP (WLA2M_OP) characteristics


62.5/125 μm MMF

155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3
200 Mbps : ESCON
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48
2666 Mbps : NNI
I–16.1, S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
Coupler/Splitter insertion loss 4 dB

Bit rate, WDM side transparent (CWDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Other WDM interface characteristics refer to CWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 418 / 554
554
5.3.1.5 Wavelength adapter 3 with O–SNCP (WLA3CDOP) characteristics


62.5/125 μm MMF

155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3
200 Mbps : ESCON
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48
2666 Mbps : NNI
3rd window for DWDM (1529.55 –> 1561.42 nm)
I–16.1, S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
DWDM (APD)
Coupler/Splitter insertion loss 4 dB

Bit rate, WDM side transparent (WDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): DWAxxx

Other WDM interface (C/DWDM) characteristics refer to CWDM and DWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on
page 426
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 419 / 554
554
5.3.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) characteristics

Bit rate, client side 9953.28 Mbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN

10.709 Gbps :(STM–64/OC–192/10GBEWAN)+FEC
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN
User interface type VSR2000–2R1 standard (similar to I–64.1)
User Rx : optical interfaces specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–12 including path penalty –14 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB
User Tx : optical interfaces specification
Optical Output power min : –6 dBm

max : –1 dBm
Transmission length 20 Km
Minimum Extinction Ratio 6 dB
Shutdown time < 5 ms
Re–activation time < 30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 420 / 554
554
WDM interface type L–64.2

Wavelength specification ITU–T G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing.

The board is tunable over 1 wavelength
Bit rate, WDM side 10709 Mbps

11.096 Gbps (10 GBE LAN + FEC)
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification (board input)
Type of Receiver PIN
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–12 after FEC correction in- –13 dBm

cluding PP and OSNR = 19 dB
VOA dynamic range 20 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (over –500 up to 2 dB

1600 ps/nm)
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification (board output)
In order to provide a wide range chromatic dispersion tolerance, two operating points corresponding to high
chromatic dispersion and to low chromatic dispersion.
NDC configuration NDC0 NDC1
Max EOL center frequency deviation 100 pm
Dispersion (NDC not configurable in R.2.0)

• OSNR = 19 dB 200 –> 1200 ps/nm –500 –> +800 ps/nm
• OSNR = 21 dB 0 –> +1600 ps/nm
Maximum –20 dB width 0.5 nm
Optical Output power (VOA at min) –4 –>+1 dBm –2 –>+3 dBm
VOA dynamic range (configurable) 20 dB, step 1
N.B. All the figures are EOL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 421 / 554
554
5.3.1.7 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E) characteristics


62.5/125 μm MMF

9.95328 Gbps : STM–64/OC–192, 10GbE WAN
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GbE LAN
10.709 Gbps : NNI (future rel.)
Wavelength range 1st window for 10GBase–S
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.10 on page 434) 2nd window for XI641
3rd window for XS642B
User interface type 10GBASE–S
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.10 on page 434) I–64.1 / 10GBASE–L
S–64.2b / 10GBASE–E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 422 / 554
554
WDM interface type L–64.2; DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector)

Wavelength range 3rd window (1528 –> 1565 nm)
Bit rate 10.709 Gbps
Type of Receiver APD

Sensitivity including path penalty and for
BER = 10–12) and overload:
– with optical noise –19 dBm to – 9 dBm
– without optical noise –23 dBm to –5 dBm
Max. receiver reflectance –27 dB
NDC configuration NDC0 NDC1

Max. EOL center frequency deviation 100 pm
Dispersion
– No OSNR margin 0 –> +1300ps/nm –500 –> +800ps/nm
– 2 dB OSNR margin 0 –> +1600ps/nm
Max. –20 dB width 0.5 nm
Pout (VOA at min.) –4.0 –> +7.0 dBm –2.5 –> +7.0 dBm
VOA dynamic range (configurable) 20 dB step 1
Minimum Extintion Ratio 8.2 dB
(*) Contact Alcatel for design with negative chromatic dispersion

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 423 / 554
554
5.3.1.8 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10_NA) characteristics

Bit rate, client side 9953.28 Mbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN

10.709 Gbps :(STM–64/OC–192/10GBEWAN)+FEC
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN
User interface type VSR2000–2R1 standard (similar to I–64.1)
User Rx : optical interfaces specification
Wavelength range 1531 nm, 1551 nm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–12 including path penalty –14 dBm
User Tx : optical interfaces specification
Wavelength range 1531 nm, 1551 nm

max : –1 dBm
Transmission length 20 Km

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 424 / 554
554
WDM interface type L–64.2


Bit rate, WDM side 10709 Mbps

Type of Receiver APD
Sensitivity including path penalty and for –23 dBm to –5 dBm (no optical noise)
BER = 10–12) and overload:
Max EOL center frequency deviation 100 pm
Dispersion 0 to –>1600ps/nm
Maximum –20 dB width 0.5 nm
Optical Output power (VOA at min) +1.5 –> +7.0 dBm
VOA dynamic range (configurable) 20 dB, step 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 425 / 554
554
5.3.1.9 SPF modules optical characteristics
STM–1 SFP (S–1.1, FE, STM–1 SFP S–1.1

SFP module type
FDDI, 100BaseLX) W/DDM

Addressed wavelength (nm) 1261 –> 1360 1261 –> 1360
Min. launched power (dBm) –15 –15
Max launched power (dBm) –8 –8
Allowed bitrates 100 Mbps –> 155.52 Mbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 8.2
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) NA NA
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 7.7 7.7
Minimum SMSR (dB) NA NA
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) –100 –> +100 –100 –> +100
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–10 –28 –28
Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8
Max optic. path penalty (dB) 1 1
Max receiver reflect. (dB) –14 –14
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC LC
Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type S–1.1 / S–1.1 S–1.1DDM / S–1.1
SFP module type STM–1 SFP L–1.1 STM–1 SFP L–1.2

Max launched power (dBm) 0 0
Allowed bitrates 2.048 Mbps –> 155.52 Mbps 155.52 Mbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 10 10
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) 1 1
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 3 NA
Minimum SMSR (dB) 30 if DFB laser 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) –250 –> +250 1900
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fiber type SMF SMF

Acronym / Interface type L–1.1 / L–1.1 L–1.2 / L–1.2
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 426 / 554
554
STM–4 SFP S–4.1
SFP module type STM–4 SFP S–4.1
W/DDM

Allowed bitrates 622.080 Mbps 622.080 Mbps
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 2.5 2.5
Fiber type SMF SMF

Max launched power (dBm) +2 +2
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) NA NA
Minimum SMSR (dB) 30 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) –250 –> +250 1900
Fiber type SMF SMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 427 / 554
554
SFP module type STM–16 SFP I–16.1 STM–16 SFP I–16.1 W/DDM

Allowed bitrates 2.48832 Gbps
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 4 4
Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type I–16.1 / I–16.1 I–16.1DDM / I–16.1
STM–16 SFP (S–16.1,

SFP module type STM–16 SFP S–16.1 W/DDM
2FC stop gap)
Allowed bitrates 2.125 Gbps; 2.48832 Gbps
Spectral width
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 0
Fiber type SMF SMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 428 / 554
554
Max launched power (dBm) +3 +3

Spectral width
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) –250 –> +250 +1600
Fiber type SMF SMF
STM–16 SFP S–16.1

SFP module type
multirate multiformat W/DDM
Addressed wavelength (nm) 1290 –> 1330
Min. launched power (dBm) –5
Max launched power (dBm) 0
Allowed bitrates 100 Mbps –> 2.7 Gbps
for bit rates > 2.125Gbps = 8.2
Min. extinction ratio (dB)
for bit rates < 2.125Gbps = 9
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) 1
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) NA
Minimum SMSR (dB) 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) –100 –> +100
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–10,
–18
for all bit rates and patterns
Minimum overload (dBm) 0
Max optic. path penalty (dB) 1
Max receiver reflect. (dB) –27
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fiber type SMF

Acronym / Interface type S–16–AnyDDM / S–16–1 multirate multiformat
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 429 / 554
554
SFP module type FE/FDDI SFP 100 Base LX
Min. launched power (dBm) –15

Max launched power (dBm) –8
Allowed bitrates 125 Mbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 5
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) NA
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 7.7
Minimum SMSR (dB) NA
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) NA
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–12 –26
Minimum overload (dBm) –8
Max optic. path penalty (dB) NA
Fiber type SMF
Acronym / Interface type 100B LX / 100BASE–L
1.25GbE SFP 1.25GbE SFP 1.25GbE SFP

SFP module type
GbE1000SX GbE1000SX W/DDM GbE1000ZX
Addressed wavelength (nm) 820 –> 860 820 –> 860 1540 –> 1570
Min. launched power (dBm) –9.5 –9.5 0
Max launched power (dBm) –4 –4 +5
Allowed bitrates 1.25 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 1.25 Gbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 9 9 9
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) NA NA 1
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 0.85 0.85 NA
Minimum SMSR (dB) NA NA 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) – – 1200
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–12 –17 –17 –24
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 0 0
Max optic. path penalty (dB) – – 2
Max receiver reflect. (dB) –12 –12 –12
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC LC LC
Fiber type MMF MMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type 1GbESX / 1GbESXDDM / 1GbEZX /
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1000BASE–S 1000BASE–S 1000BASE–Z
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 430 / 554
554
1.25GbE SFP 1.25GbE SFP GbE 1000LX/
SFP module type
GbE1000LX/LH LH W/DDM

Allowed bitrates 1.25 Gbps 1.25 Gbps
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) 4 4
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) – –
Max optic. path penalty (dB) – –
Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type 1GbELX / 1000BASE–L 1GbELXDDM / 1000BASE–L
1.25GbE SFP 1.25GbE SFP GbE

SFP module type
GbE1000SX BASIC 1000LX/LH BASIC
Min. launched power (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max launched power (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Allowed bitrates 1.25 Gbps 1.25 Gbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Spectral width
Max. RMS width (nm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Minimum SMSR (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–12 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Minimum overload (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max optic. path penalty (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max receiver reflect. (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fiber type SMF SMF

Acronym / Interface type
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 431 / 554
554
SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm
SFP module type
W/DDM W/DDM
Addressed wavelength (nm) 830 –>–860 1265 –> 1370

Min. launched power (dBm) –10 –9.5
Allowed bitrates 1.0625 Gbps; 2.125 Gbps
Spectral Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) NA NA

width Max. RMS width (nm) 0.85 see 1
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) – –
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) with fiber, 1.0625 Gbps = –17
–20
@ BER=1E–12 2.125 Gbps = –15
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 –3
Max optic. path penalty (dB) – –
Fiber type MMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type FC/2FCmm / FC/2FCmm FC/2FCsm / FC/2FCsm
1. See figure 18 and figure 19 of the “Physical interfaces FC–PI–2 Rev. 30, 2002” (FC/2FC standard)
SFP module type APD CWDM (Silver) PIN CWDM (Bronze)

Addressed wavelength (nm) 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
Min. launched power (dBm) 0 0
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) 1600 @ 1610nm 1000 @ 1610nm
1100 @ 1470nm 700 @ 1470nm
Minimum sensitivity (dBm),
–28 –18
@ BER=1E–12
Minimum overload (dBm) –9 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type CWA147 –> CWA161 / APD CWDM CWP147 –> CWP161 / PIN CWDM
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 432 / 554
554
SFP module type APD CWDM (Silver) BASIC PIN CWDM (Bronze) BASIC
Addressed wavelength (nm) 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
Min. launched power (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max launched power (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel

Min. extinction ratio (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Minimum SMSR (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Minimum sensitivity (dBm),
contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
@ BER=1E–12
Minimum overload (dBm) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max optic. path penalty (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max receiver reflect. (dB) contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
SFP module type APD DWDM

Addressed wavelength (nm) 1527,99 to 1563,86 nm
Min. launched power (dBm) 0
Max launched power (dBm) 4
Maximum wavelength deviation EOL (pm) 100
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) 0.5
Minimum SMSR (dB) 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) 1800 / 2400 (Note 1)
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–10 –28
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ 1310nm –20
Minimum overload (dBm) –8
Max optic. path penalty (dB) 2 / 3 depending on dispersion (Note 1)
Fiber type SMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Acronym / Interface type DWA200 –> DWA600 / APD DWDM
Note 1 : 2 dB path penalty corresponds to a dispersion of 1800 ps/nm/km, 3 dB to 2400 ps/nm/km.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 433 / 554
554
5.3.1.10 XFP modules optical characteristics
XFP module type I–64.1/10GbE Base L S–642b/10GbE Base E


Max launched power (dBm) –1 +2
Allowed bitrates 9.95328Gbps; 10.3125 Gbps; 10.709 Gbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 62 8.2
Spectral width: max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) 1 0.25
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) 60 800
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E–12 –11 14
Minimum overload (dBm) 0.5 –1
Max receiver reflect. (dB) 14 27
Fiber type SMF SMF
Acronym / Interface type XI641 / I–64.1/10GBASE–L XS642 / S–64.2b/10GBASE–E
XFP module type 10GbE Base S

Min. launched power (dBm) –7.3
Max launched power (dBm) –1
Allowed bitrates 9.95328Gbps; 10.3125 Gbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 3
See IEEE 802.3ae Triple
Spectral width: max. –20dB bandwidth (nm)
Tradeoff Curves (TTC)
Minimum sensitivity with fibre (dBm), @
–11
BER=1E–12
Minimum overload (dBm) 9.9
Max receiver reflect. (dB) 12
Fiber type MMF
Acronym / Interface type X10GBASES / 10GBASE–S
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 434 / 554
554
5.3.1.11 4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4xANY_P TDM Concentrators characteristics
Drawers Rx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Multi–mode 62.5 / 125 μm (MMF)
Optical connector type LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 125 Mbps (100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI

200 Mbps (100ppm) : ESCON
270 Mbps (100ppm) : Digital Video
Operating wavelength 1270 –> 1380 nm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 -28 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–10 -8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty NA
Maximum receiver reflectance 12.5 dB
Drawer Rx : STM–1, STM–4 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–1

622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–4
Maximum receiver reflectance –
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 1025 Gbps (100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet

1062.5 Gbps (100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel
Maximum receiver reflectance 12 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 435 / 554
554
Drawers Tx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Single–mode 9 / 125 μm (SMF)

Laser type Class 1 Laser Safety
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification
Central wavelength 1270 –> 1356 nm
Maximum RMS width 2.5 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio NA dB
max : –8 dBm
Drawer Tx : STM–1, STM–4 1310 nm cartridge specification
Data rate 155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–1
622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–4
Maximum RMS width 2.5 nm
max : –8 dBm
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification
Maximum RMS width 4 nm
max : –3 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 436 / 554
554
Drawers Rx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Rx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Operating wavelength 770 860 nm
Overload @ BER = 10–10 0 dBm
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 437 / 554
554
Drawers Tx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification


Laser type Class 1 Laser Safety
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Minimum side mode suppression ratio NA
Optical Output power min : –9.5 dBm

max : –1.5 dBm
Shutdown time < 0.5 ms
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Minimum side mode suppression ratio NA
Optical Output power min : –9.5 dBm

max : –1.5 dBm
Shutdown time < 0.5 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 438 / 554
554
4XANY Digital Video electrical drawer interfaces specification
Common electrical interfaces specification
Connector type BNC

Bit rate 270 Mbps
Drawer Rx : electrical cartridge specification
Terminating impedance (RL > 15 dB) 75 OHMs
Maximum path 40 dB
Interference rejection d.c. : 2.5V

below 1KHz : 2.5V
1 KHz to 5 MHz : 0.1V
above 5 MHz : 0.04V
Drawer Tx : electrical cartridge specification
Output impedance (RL > 15 dB) 75 OHMs
Signal amplitude (peak–to–peak) 800 mV 10%
d.c. offset 0.5 V
Rise and fall times (between 20% and 80%) 0.75 –> 1.25 ns
The Digital Video cartridge is a Low Frequency drawer dedicated to the Digital Video signal. It is used as
the other Low Frequency drawers.
This drawer is equipped with a BNC socket in place of the SFF optics in the other (optical) version.
This is the only difference with the other optical low frequency drawers.
All the 4xANY features provided by the other drivers are supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 439 / 554
554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY)
Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification

User interface type I–16.1

Operating wavelength range 1266 –> 1360 nm
Data rate 2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
Input power –18 –> –3 dBm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 –18 dBm
Agregate side Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification
User interface type I–16.1
Optical Output power –10 –> –3 dBm
Shutdown time <5 ms
Re–activation time <30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 440 / 554
554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_S)
Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification

Input power –18 –> 0 dBm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 –18 dBm
Agregate Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification
Optical Output power –5 –> 0 dBm
Shutdown time <5 ms
Re–activation time <30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 441 / 554
554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, aggregate side (4 x ANY_P)

The following interfaces (SFP modules) are used with 4xANY_P, aggregate side
– STM–16 SFP (Intra–office and Short haul interface)
– PIN (Bronze) and APD (Silver) CWDM SFP
– APD DWDM SFP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 442 / 554
554
5.3.1.12 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) optical characteristics
MVAC optical interfaces specification

Fiber type Single mode (SMF)
Optical connector type MU horizontal
Insertion losses (IL) 3 dB
Attenuation dynamic range including IL 3 –> 20 dB ; step = 0.5 dB

(on each VOA input)
Attenuation accuracy 0.5 dB
Response time < 5 ms
Output measurement –50 –> +17 dBm
Optical ports levels
Optical input power (on both In1 & In2 inputs) –32 –> +17 dBm
Optical output power (on both Out1 & Out2 outputs) –52 –> +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 443 / 554
554
5.3.2 DWDM Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics
5.3.2.1 L1 band Mux/Demux with expansion + supervision (OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) and with ex-
pansion (OMDX8100_M_L1_X)

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS optical characteristics
MUX side specification OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power:
– single channels – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– extra–input – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– expansion input – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– supervision input – 1 –> +1 dBm –
Insertion loss (max.)
– single channels 5.35 dB 4.95 dB
– extra–input 3.1 dB 2.7 dB
– expansion 1.7 dB 1.3 dB
– supervision 15 dB –
Isolation (adjacent channels) – min 15 dB 15 dB
Output power – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
Monitoring Output Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power lev-

el measurement
table continue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 444 / 554
554
DEMUX side specification OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm

Monitoring Input Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power lev-

el measurement
– single channels 5.55 dB 4.95 dB
– extra–output 3.3 dB 2.7 dB
– expansion 1.9 dB 1.3 dB
– supervision 2.5 dB 2.5 dB
Output power
– single channels – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– extra–output – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– expansion output – 32 –> +17 dBm – 32 –> +17 dBm
– supervision output – 53 –> –14 dBm –
Isolation (adjacent channels) – min 22 dB 22 dB
Isolation (non adjacent channels), min 30 dB 35 dB
General characteristics OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
L1 band channels 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38
L1 band channels central wavelenght 1553.33 nm (ch 30); 1552.52 nm (ch 31);
1551.72 nm (ch 32); 1550.92 nm (ch 33);
1549.32 nm (ch 35); 1548.51 nm (ch 36);
1547.72 nm (ch 37);1546.92 nm (ch 38)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm 0.25 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm 0.3 nm
end–to–end IL (max) 9.7 dB 8.7 dB
Isolation (LB vs SB) – min 15 dB 15 dB
PMD 0.15 ps 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB 0.25 dB
connector type MU horizontal MU horizontal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 445 / 554
554
5.3.2.2 L2 and S1 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_L2 and OMDX8100_M_S1 optical characteristics

MUX side specification
Input power:
– single channels – 32 –> +17 dBm
– extra–input – 32 –> +17 dBm
– single channels 3.75 dB
– extra–input 1.5 dB
Output power – 32 –> +17 dBm
DEMUX side specification
Input power – 32 –> +17 dBm
– extra–output 1.5 dB
Output power
– extra–output – 32 –> +17 dBm
General characteristics
L2 band channels and central wavelenght 1561.42 nm (ch 20); 1560.61 nm (ch 21);
1559.79 nm (ch 22); 1558.98 nm (ch 23);
1557.36 nm (ch 25); 1556.55 nm (ch 26);
1555.75 nm (ch 27);1554.94 nm (ch 28)
S1 band channels and central wavelenght 1535.82 nm (ch 52); 1535.04 nm (ch 53);
1534.25 nm (ch 54); 1533.47 nm (ch 55);
1531.90 nm (ch 57); 1531.12 nm (ch 58);
1530.33 nm (ch 59);1529.55 nm (ch 60)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm
end–to–end IL (global) (max) 6.3 dB
rejection of dropped channels extra–port (min) 12 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
connector type MU horizontal
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 446 / 554
554
5.3.2.3 S2 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_S2 optical characteristics

Input power:
Output power
S2 band channels 42; 43; 44; 45; 47; 48; 49; 50
S2 band channels central wavelenght 1543.73 nm (ch 42); 1542.94 nm (ch 43);
1542.14 nm (ch 44); 1541.35 nm (ch 45);
1539.77 nm (ch 47); 1538.98 nm (ch 48);
1538.19 nm (ch 49);1537.40 nm (ch 50)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm
end–to–end IL (w/OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) (max) 6.3 dB
rejection of dropped channels extra–port (min) 12 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 447 / 554
554
5.3.3 CWDM Multiplexer units (CMDX) optical characteristics
CMDX2 optical characteristics

Input power:
– single channels tbd dBm
– OSC (SPV) channel tbd dBm
– OSC (SPV) channel 1 dB
Channel passband at –0.5 dB (includes channel 14 dB

centre wavelength in –6 –> +8 range)
Input power tbd dBm
– single channels 4 dB
– OSC (SPV) channel 1.5 dB
Channel passband at –0.5 dB (includes channel 14 dB

centre wavelength in –6 –> +8 range)
Fiber 9/125 μm SMF
Isolation (adjacent channels) – min 30 dB
Isolation (non adjacent channels) – min 40 dB
end–to–end IL (max) 5.7 dB
PDL 0.25 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 448 / 554
554
5.3.4 DWDM Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics
5.3.4.1 8 channels OADM with supervision

OADM8100_M_L1(L2/S1/S2)_S optical characteristics


Input power (SPV + 1530 1560 nm) – 32 –> +17 dBm
Monitoring Input Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power
level measurement
Output power
– supervision output – 53 –> –14 dBm
Insertion loss
el measurement
Input power:
– supervision input – 1 –> +1 dBm
Insertion loss
Isolation
in–band (dropped vs added channels) >24 dB
8 dropped channels isolation
– adjacent channels >22 dB
– non adjacent channels >35 dB
Supervision
Rx side IL 2.3 dB
Tx side IL 2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side) >28 dB
L1, L2, S1, S2 band channels and central wave- see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
lenght 446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 449 / 554
554
OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S optical characteristics


el measurement
Output power
Insertion loss
– extra–output 2 dB
el measurement
Input power:
Insertion loss
Isolation
in–band (dropped vs added channels) >24 dB
4 dropped channels isolation
– adjacent channels >22 dB
– non adjacent channels >35 dB

Supervision
Rx side IL 2.3 dB
Tx side IL 2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side) >28 dB
Channels range per board 20–>23; 25–>28; 30–>33; 35–>38; 42–>45;
47–>50; 52–>55; 57–>60
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 450 / 554
554
OADM2100_M_chxx–yy_S optical characteristics


Input power:
Insertion loss (max.):

Rejection of added channels 13.5 dB
Isolation (adjacent channels) 22 dB

el measurement

el measurement

Output power
Rejection of dropped channels 13.5 dB
Channels range per board 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444 and 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Channel passband at –0.5 dB 0.25 nm
Channel passband at –3 dB 0.3 nm
End–to–end IL (max) 6.1 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 451 / 554
554
5.3.4.4 1 channel OADM with supervision
OADM1100_M_xx_S optical characteristics


Input power:
– single channel – 32 –> +17 dBm

Rejection of added channels 13.5 dB
Monitoring Output – 49 –> 0 dBm; typically 18 dB below the associated op-

tical power level measurement

el measurement

Output power
Rejection of dropped channels 13.5 dB
Channels range per board 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444 and 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Channel passband at –0.5 dB 0.25 nm
Channel passband at –3 dB 0.3 nm
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 452 / 554
554
5.3.5 Mux/Demux 1310–1550 + supervision unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_1310_1550 optical characteristics


Input power:
– SPV channel – 1 –> +1 dBm
– 1310 nm input – 20 –> 0 dBm
– 1550 nm input – 32 –> +17 dBm
– SPV channel 14.6 dB
– 1310 nm channel 2 dB
– 1550 nm channel 2 dB
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min 30 dB

el measurement

el measurement

– 1310 nm channel 2.2 dB
– 1550 nm channel 2.2 dB
Output power
– SPV channel – 53 –> –14 dBm
– 1310 nm input – 20 –> 0 dBm
– 1550 nm input – 32 –> +17 dBm
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min 30 dB
Channel passband at 1550 nm 1528 –>1560 nm
End–to–end IL (max) at 1310 nm 4.2 dB
End–to–end IL (max) at 1550 nm 4.2 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 453 / 554
554
5.3.6 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_C optical characteristics

Input power:
– SPV channel – 1 –> +1 dBm
– extra input – 32 –> +17 dBm
– extra input 1.2 dB

el measurement

el measurement
Output power
– SPV channel – 50 –> –14 dBm
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 454 / 554
554
5.3.7 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics
Optical Amplifier Card optical interfaces specification

Parameter Symbol Min Typ Max Unit

Wavelength range λs 1529.1 1561.8 nm

(32 channels) OAC1 and OAC2 optical characteristics
1st stage output power (EOL) OOPV1 12 dBm
2nd stage output power OOPV2 17 dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) ΔG 4 4.5 dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) ΔG1 2 2.2 dB
Noise figure (2) NF 6.8 dB
(1): With an input signal power of –5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of –11 to –5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(32 channels) OAC1_L and OAC2_L optical characteristics
1st stage output power (EOL) OOPV1 12 dBm
2nd stage output power OOPV2 17 dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) ΔG 4 5 dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) ΔG1 2 2.2 dB
Noise figure (2) NF 6 dB
(1): With an input signal power of –11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of –17 to –11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
Optical ports specification

Fiber type single mode (SMF)
Optical connector type MU/PC ; MU/APC for extra pump
I/O Function OAC1, OAC2 level OAC1_L, OAC2_L level
VOA attenuation range 1 15 dB 1 –> 15 dB
I VOA input –24.5 +6.5 dBm –32 –> +17 dBm
O VOA output –26 +5 dBm –47 –> +17 dBm
I 1st stage input –26 +5 dBm –47 –> +17 dBm
O 1st stage output –3 +12 dBm –3 –> +12 dBm
I 2nd stage input –18 +9 dBm –32 –> +17 dBm
O 2nd stage output +2 +17 dBm +2 –> +17 dBm
I SPV extraction
O SPV insertion
O 1st stage input monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 1st stage output monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 2nd stage input monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 2nd stage output monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 455 / 554
554
5.3.8 SPV–M + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics
SPVM2 and SPVM_H optical characteristics

SPV Receiver specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–9 –50 dBm to –47 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–9 –6 dbm
Maximum receiver reflectance –28 dbm
N.B. The 1510 nm receiver has a specified sensibility of –50 dBm. If the incident power is lower than
that value, the OSC BER is higher, but the supervision LAP–D protocol corrects the errors so
that the supervision is correctly transmitted down to a power value of –53 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification
Type of source DFB
Wavelength 151010 nm

max : +1 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 456 / 554
554
5.3.9 OSMC optical characteristics
OSMC optical characteristics

OSMC specification
Selectable input ports (switch) 8
Wavelength range 1529.55 to 1561.42 nm
OCM channel power dynamic range –51 to –3 dBm
Total input power –52 to +17 dBm
OCM power channel power accuracy 1 dB
OCM power repeatability 0.25 dB
OCM absolute wavelength accuracy 100 pm
OCM acquisition time 1s
OSMC optical ports
Port_p input ; p = [1 8] –52 to +17 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 457 / 554
554
5.3.10 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics
SM/MM OPC BOARDS WIT/WITHOUT CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION

TX side SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with
jumpers jumpers connectors connectors
Connector type MU MU MU MU
Fiber type SMF SMF SMF SMF
Max. insertion loss 4.4 dB 4.4 dB 4.4 dB 4.4 dB
Optical level at TX–IN Ch. 1&2 –15 –>+8 dBm –15 –>+8 dBm –15 –>+8 dBm –15 –>+8dBm
RX side SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with

jumpers jumpers connectors connectors
Connector type MU MU MU MU
Fiber type SMF MMF MMF SMF
Max. insertion loss 4.4 dB 6 dB 6 dB 4.4 dB
Optical level at RX–IN –24 –> 0 dBm –24 –> 0 dBm –24 –> 0 dBm –24 –> 0 dBm
TX side MM OPC 850

with connect.
Connector type MU
Fiber type MMF
Max. insertion loss 5 dB
Optical level at TX–IN Ch. 1&2 –15 –> +8dBm
RX side MM OPC 850

with connect.
Connector type MU
Fiber type MMF
Max. insertion loss 5 dB
Optical level at RX–IN –28 –> 0 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 458 / 554
554
5.3.11 OMSP optical characteristics
OSMC optical characteristics

Tx side specification
Input power max. +17 dBm
Insertion loss max. 3.8 dB
Rx side specification
Input power max. +17 dBm
Insertion loss max. 1 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 459 / 554
554
5.4 Alarm characteristics
Units Alarms:

Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor (green/red) or three–color (green/

yellow/red) HardWare Failure LED on the front coverplate.
This LED indicates:
– when red, internal failure

– when green, in service unit
– when yellow, board in firmware download state (only for MCC, OCC10, WLA3, 4xANY, SPVM).
Centralized Equipment Alarms:
All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the ESC unit which will deliver centralized optical
indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically:
• Red LED “URG“: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR OR CRITICAL) alarm
• Red LED ”NRG”: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm
• Yellow LED ”ABN”: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,
forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
• Yellow LED ”IND”: detection of an INDICATIVE (WARNING) alarm
• Yellow LED ”ATD”: alarm condition ATTENDED
Refer to para. 2.5, page 129, where the front view of each unit and the LED locations are illustrated.
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the rela-
tion between this two terminology is explained in Table 73. on page 460.
Table 73. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity ter-
minology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU).
Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S. Alarm severity terminology used for ESC leds
and for TRU in the rack
CRITICAL or MAJOR URG, T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used) ––

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 460 / 554
554
Rack Alarms:
Some equipment alarms are carried to a connector and used to light–up alarm rack–lamps. Rack alarms
are physically available on the RAI board connectors.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
The available alarms are the following:
PDU Front Panel LED Markings (ANSI):
• CRI: critical alarm from one of the shelves in the rack

• MAJ: major alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
• MIN: minor alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
• RACK: alarm storing from one of the shelves in the rack
TRU Front Panel LED Markings (ETSI):
• URG: Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
• NURG: Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
• ATTD: Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
• SIG PRES: signal presence (power on)
HouseKeeping Alarms/Commands:
A set of housekeeping contacts are available, located on the 25 poles connector of the housekeeping
board.
Alarm Attending:
The detected units alarm condition can be stored through the ACO (Alarms Cut Off) push–button on the
ESC unit (Attended).
This operation will turn OFF the general red LED “URG” and will light up the “ATD” yellow LED on the
ESC unit (Attended); the attended command is also sent to the rack lamps (if present) through the RAI
board.
Trouble–shooting:
This equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) for service, activation and
trouble–shooting purpose.
Trouble–shooting procedure for the equipment and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indica-
tions are described in the Operator’s Handbook.
Connection with the PC is achieved through the 9 poles connector (F interface) on the ESC board.
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
Characteristics of the cited rack alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted in
Chapter 5.1 on page 399.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 461 / 554
554
5.4.1 Equipment domain alarms
This section lists all the alarms that can be physically detected by each rack, subrack or any kind of board.
We give some maintenance indications for each problem with a test order to follow if necessary . The alarm

seen on the CT view are shown between brackets in the probable cause column.

5.4.1.1 Generic alarms for all the boards
The following table shows the equipment alarms common to all the boards (and sub–boards like SFP or
XFP modules) implemented in the 1696MS. We do not detail them for each card and we will only give their
specific events.
Table 74. Generic alarms common to all boards
Probable cause De-

HW–syst
Alarm type fault Severity (SA/ Meaning and remarks Maintenance
name
NSA)
repleacableUnitPro- Access failure to boards due to 1. Plug and replug the
Hardware
HWF blem (RUP) – SPI bus failure board
failure
Maj / Min – SPIDER failure 2. Replace the board
replaceableUnitMis- The corresponding board is
Hardware Plug the missing
C_ABS sing (RUM) missing: the board is provi-
failure board.
Maj / Min sioned but not equipped.
repleacableUnitTy- A wrong element has been Check the board
Hardware
C_TYPE peMismatch (RUTM) equipped or provisioned (the plugged in the slot and
failure
Maj / Min expected CID is wrong) the one provisioned.
Mainte- unconfiguredEquip- An element has been
Provision the new
ABNOR nance mentPresent (UEP) equipped: the element board
board.
Indication Warn / Warn is present but not declared.
N.B. While the generic alarms are raised no firmware download nor configuration of the board can
be done.
N.B. Generic alarms are detected by the SC and raised on the corresponding board.
5.4.1.2 ESC–EC board
All the generic alarms except C_ABS (RUM), C_TYPE (RUTM) and ABNOR (UEP).
Table 75. ESC–EC board specific alarms.
Probable cause
HW–syst Meaning and re-
Alarm type Default Severity Maintenance
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit– OBPS or EEPROM or 1– Deplug and replug
Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) disk or flash memory the board
failure
Maj / Min or FPGA or LAN failure 2– replace the board
Loss of Q link. SH is Check LAN card Check
LAN_ALARM Hardware lanFailure (LF)
declared but not con- link between 1696 NE
(Note 1) failure Min / Min
nected and manager (OS)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Note 1 : Supported only if ESC provisioned in slot #1
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 462 / 554
554
5.4.1.3 ESC–SC board
All the generic alarms except C_ABS (RUM), C_TYPE (RUTM) and ABNOR (UEP).
Table 76. ESC–SC board specific alarms.

Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
1– Deplug and replug the
serialCommunication- Communication
C_FAIL Hardware board
Problem (SCP) problem between
(Note 1) failure 2– Check LAN card
Maj / Maj EC and SC.
3– Check both PSC presence
A wrong software 1– Deplug and replug
S_TYPE versionMismatch (VM)
SW failure version was ap- the board
(Note 2) Maj / Min
plied to the card. 2–Do the software download
Note 1 : this alarm is raised by EC but is relevant from the SC when provisioned in an expansion shelf or
a master shelf.
Note 2 : this alarm is raised by EC but is relevant from the SC when provisioned in an expansion shelf.
5.4.1.4 ESC–FC board (ESC in slot #24)
All the generic alarms except HWF (RUP).
5.4.1.5 PSC / PSC2 / PSC3
All the generic alarms except C_TYPE (RUTM).
Table 77. PSC board specific alarms.
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit– 1– Deplug and replug
Hardware OBPS generation fail-
HWF Problem (RUP) the board
failure ure
Maj / Min 2– replace the card
5.4.1.6 House–Keeping board
All the generic alarms.
Table 78. HK board specific alarms.
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit– 1– Deplug and re-
Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) OBPS failure plug the board
failure
Maj / Min 2– replace the board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 463 / 554
554
5.4.1.7 RAI board
Table 79. RAI board specific alarms.

Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) OBPS failure the board
failure
5.4.1.8 LAN_Q / LAN_IS Access board
Table 80. LAN board specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
failure
5.4.1.9 Intershelf link Master (I–LINK_M) board
All the generic card alarms.
Table 81. I–LINK–M board specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware External power sup-
failure ply failure
5.4.1.10 Intershelf link Slave (I–LINK_S) board
All the generic card alarms except C_TYPE (RUTM).
Table 82. I–LINK–S board specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 464 / 554
554
5.4.1.11 User Interface board
Table 83. UIC board specific alarms

Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
failure
5.4.1.12 FAN board
Table 84. FAN board specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware OBPS failure or FAN
failure component failure
5.4.1.13 FAN_C board
Table 85. FAN_C board specific alarms
Probable cause
HW–syst
Alarm type Default Severity Meaning and remarks Maintenance
name
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit– 1– Deplug and replug the
Hardware OBPS failure or FAN
HWF Problem (RUP) board
failure component failure
MINOR_ Hardware batteryFailure Minor alarm on PMU.
Replace the defective rec-
ALARM degradation (BF) One rectifier has failed in
tifier module.
(Note 1) (tbc) Min / Min the PMU
Major alarm on PMU. 1 – Check 220V power
MAJOR_ powerProblem Both rectifiers have supply
Hardware
ALARM (PP) failed or the fan rectifiers 2– Check fans of rectifiers
failure
(Note 1) Maj / Min have failed or the 220V 3– Replace both defective
power supply is down rectifiers
Note 1 : These alarms are related to the PMU that is not managed. The rectifiers module allow to provide
the –48V from alternative voltage source.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 465 / 554
554
5.4.1.14 OPC board
Table 86. OPC board specific alarms

Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware External power supply
failure failure
5.4.1.15 OMSP board
Table 87. OMSP board specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
failure failure
5.4.1.16 OAC1, L_OAC1, OAC2 and L_OAC2 boards
Figure 315. OAC block diagram.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 466 / 554
554
Table 88. OAC board specific alarms.
Probable cause
Alarm type Default Severity Maintenance Rel
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit– 1– Deplug and re-

Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) OBPS plug the board 1.1
failure
Optical safety cover is
opticalConnector–
Hardware removed (automatic
CVR CoverOpen (OCCO) 1.1
failure shutdown of the OAC
Maj / Min
)
One of the pump la-
transmitterDegraded
PUD1 Hardware sers may be nearing Plan to change the
(TD) 1.1
PUD2 degradation its end of life: efficien- board.
Min / Min
cy lower than 70%
Optical input power of 1. Check the input
inputPowerLoss
the 1st stage has fall- connections.
ILOS1 Signal failure (IPL) 1.1
en belowthe accept- 2. Clean up the con-
Maj / Min
able signal level. nectors.
Optical input power of 1. Check the input
inputPowerLoss
the 2nd stage has fall- connections.
ILOS2 Signal failure (IPL) 1.1
en belowthe accept- 2. Clean up the con-
Maj / Min
able signal level. nectors
outputPowerLoss Optical output power
1. Deplug and plug
Hardware (OPL) output 1st of the 1st stage is be-
OLOS1 the board. 1.1
failure stage low the acceptable
2. Replace the board
Maj / Min signal level
outputPowerLoss Optical output power
1. Deplug and plug
Hardware (OPL) output 2nd of the 2nd stage is be-
OLOS2 the board. 1.1
failure stage low the acceptable
2. Replace the board
Maj / Min signal level
Input or Output power Check span, IT value
out of range (span or entered by operator.
configurationOr–
IT has been modfied). Check other alarms
OOR1 Signal degra- CustomizationError
1st stage or 2nd stage within board (ILOS, 2.0
OOR2 dation (COCE)
or VOA doesn’t work PUD, OLOS).
Warn / Warn
properly. The tuning Check OAC in pre-
cannot be performed vious NE
Input or Output power Check span, IT value
out of range (span or entered by operator.
configurationOr–
IT has been modfied). Check other alarms
OOR_ Maintenance CustomizationError
1st stage or 2nd stage within board (ILOS, 2.0
VOA indication (COCE)
or VOA doesn’t work PUD, OLOS).
Warn / Warn
properly. The tuning Check OAC in pre-
cannot be performed vious NE.
The tuning cannot be
configurationOr– Check alarms within
VOA_ performed because
Maintenance CustomizationError board (HWF,
TUNING_ the functionalities of 2.2
indication (COCE) C_ABS,
FAILS the board are not ac-
Warn / Warn C_NOT_ACC)
cessible
Other alarms: All the generic card alarms.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 467 / 554
554
5.4.1.17 SPVM board
Table 89. SPVM specific alarms

Probable cause

name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnitPro- 1– Deplug and re-
Hardware
HWF blem (RUP) OBPS plug the board 1.0
failure
The optical output
SUP_T power of the board is
OutputPower 1– Deplug and re-
X1_elec Hardware below the acceptable
Loss (OPL) plug the board 1.0
SUP_T failure loss threshold.
X2_elec Tx laser or Tx moni-
toring diode down
SUP_T The optical output
transmitterDegraded
X1_opt Hardware power of the board is 1. Plan to change
(TD) 2.0
SUP_T degradation below the minimum the board
Min / Min
X2_opt threshold (–3dBm)
5.4.1.18 SPV_F_C board
Table 90. SPV_F_C specific alarms
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit- 1– Deplug and replug the
failure failure
– Check optical path be-
tween this card and
Optical output power
outputPower– 1310nm OR 1550nm chan-
of the Mux output is
OLOS Signal failure Loss (OPL) nel
belowthe acceptable
Maj / Min – Check 1310nm OR
signal level
1510nm channel
– Check monitoring diode
Optical input power of
inputPowerLoss Check SPV_F_C in pre-
the Demux input is
ILOS Signal failure (IPL) vious NE or monitoring
below the acceptable
Maj / Min diode
signal level
Other alarms : All the generic board alarms.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 468 / 554
554
5.4.1.19 SPV_F_1310_1550 board
Table 91. SPV_F_1310_1550 board specific alarms

Probable cause
HW–syst
name
(SA/NSA)
failure failure
– Check optical path be-
Optical output power of tween this card and 1310nm
outputPower–
Signal fail- the Mux output is be- and 1550nm channel
OLOS Loss (OPL)
ure lowthe acceptable signal – Check 1310nm and
Maj / Min
level 1510nm channel
– Check monitoring diode
inputPowerLoss Optical input power of the Check SPV_F_1310_ 1550
Signal fail-
ILOS (IPL) Demux input is below the in previous NE or monitoring
ure
Maj / Min acceptable signal level diode
5.4.1.20 MCC boards
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on :

– MCC1_SDH, MCC1_ASY, MCC1_SYN
– MCC2_SDH, MCC2_SYN
– MCC3_SDH_SONET, MCC3_SYN. In this case, some more alarms can be raised on SFP module.
Table 92. MCC specific alarms.
Probable cause De-

Alarm type fault Severity (SA/ Maintenance Rel
name marks
NSA)
1– Deplug and re-
replaceableUnitPro-
Hardware plug the board
HWF blem (RUP) OBPS failure 1.0
failure 2– replace the
Maj / Min
board
B&W receiver alarms
There is no equipment alarm on the B&W receiver but only Transmission ones.
WDM emitter alarms
One of the following
LOS_
component is in
WDM_
Hardware transmitterFailure (TF) failure:
Tx Replace the board 2.2
failure Min / Min – WDM Tx
(only
– VOA
MCC3)
– 8x8 matrix
DEG_ transmitterDegraded WDM laser may be
Hardware Plan to change the
OUT_ (TD) nearing its end of 1.0
degradation board
WDM Min / Min life
transmitterDegraded The WDM laser
Hardware Plan to change the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TOR_WDM (TD) temperature is out 1.0

degradation board
Min / Min of range
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 469 / 554
554
OORVOA configurationOrCusto- Check VOA value.
Status indi- The VOA is out of
(except mizationError (COCE) Check if span has 2.2
cation range
MCC1) Warn / Warn been modified
WDM receiver alarms

There is no equipment alarm on the WDM receiver but only Transmission ones.
B&W emitter alarms
DEG_OUT_ transmitterDegraded
Hardware Degraded B&W la- Plan to change the
user (except (TD) 1.0
degradation ser board
MCC3) Min / Min
LOC_U replaceableUnitPro-
Hardware The 8x8 matrix is
ser_Tx blem (RUP) Replace the board 2.2
failure down
(only MCC3) Maj / Min
transmitterDegraded User optical trans-
DEG_ SFP Hardware Plan to replace the
(TD) mitter degradation 2.2
(only MCC3) degradation SFP module
Min / Min of SFP
PROTECT_ replaceableUnitPro-
Hardware switch problem with Plan to change the
FAIL blem (RUP) 1.0
failure O–SNCP board
(SW alarm) Maj / Min
5.4.1.21 SFP modules
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on all SFP modules:
Table 93. SFP specific alarms.
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUni-
Unit not SFP plugged not Plan to replace the
RUU tUnknown (RUU) 2.2a
known ALCATEL SFP module
Warn / Warn
Receiver alarms
Emitter alarms
transmitterDe- User optical
Hardware Plan to replace the
DEG_SFP graded (TD) transmitter deg- 2.2a
degradation SFP module
Min / Min radation of SFP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 470 / 554
554
5.4.1.22 WLA2 boards
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on:
– WLA2M
– WLA2M_OP.
Table 94. WLA2 specific alarms.
HW–syst Alarm type Probable cause De- Meaning and re- Maintenance Rel
name fault Severity (SA/ marks
NSA)
HWF Hardware replaceableUnitPro- OBPS failure 1– Deplug and replug 2.2a
failure blem (RUP) the board
Port #U (U=1..4) receiver alarms
Alarms are raised by SFP module
Port #U (U=1..4) emitter alarms
Alarms are raised by SFP module 2.2a

– WLA3CD
– WLA3CDOP.
Table 95. WLA3CD specific alarms.
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
HWF blem (RUP) OBPS failure plug the board 2.2a
failure
Port #U (U=1..4) receiver alarms
Port #U (U=1..4) emitter alarms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 471 / 554
554
5.4.1.24 OCC10 boards
Table 96. OCC10, OCC10_LAN and OCC10_E specific alarms

Probable cause

name marks
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit- 1– Deplug and replug
Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) OBPS failure the board 2.0
failure
B&W receiver alarms
WDM emitter alarms
TransmitterDe-
DEG_OUT_ Hardware WDMlasermay be Plan to replace the
graded (TD) 2.0
WDM_Tx degradation nearing its end of life board
Min / Min
transmitterDe- TheWDMlaser tem-
TOR_ Hardware Plan to replace the
graded (TD) perature is out of 2.0
WDM_Tx degradation board
Min / Min range
replaceableUnit- One of the following
Problem (RUP) component is in fail- 2.0
Maj / Min ure:
LOS_ Hardware Replace the board
– WDM Tx
WDM_Tx failure transmitterFailure – VOA
(TF) – 8x8 matrix 2.2
Maj / Min – FEC chip
Input power out of
configuration– range (span has
Check VOA value.
VOA_OOR_ Status indi- OrCustomization- been modified). VOA
Check if span has 2.2
WDM_Tx cation Error (COCE) doesn’t work proper-
been modified
Warn / Warn ly. The tuning cannot
be performed (TBC)
WDM receiver alarms
There is no equipment alarm on the WDM receiver but only Transmission ones.
B&W emitter alarms
transmitterDe-
DEG_OUT_ Hardware Plan to replace the
graded (TD) Degraded B&W laser 2.0
user_Tx degradation board
Min / Min
PROTECT_ replaceableUnit-
Hardware switch problem with Plan to replace the
FAIL Problem (RUP) 2.0
failure O–SNCP board
(SW alarm) Maj / Min

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 472 / 554
554
5.4.1.25 4xANY board.
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on:
– 4xANY
– 4xANY_S
– 4xANY_P.
Table 97. 4xANY main board specific alarms
HW–syst Alarm type Probable cause Meaning and re- Maintenance

name Default Severity marks
(SA/NSA)
HWF Hardware replaceableUnit– OBPS failure 1– Deplug and replug
failure Problem (RUP) the board
5.4.1.26 4xANY drawers.
Table 98. 4xANY drawer specific alarms
Probable cause
Meaning and re-
HW–syst name Alarm type Default Severi- Maintenance Rel
marks
ty (SA/NSA)
Link_Fail- replaceableUnit- No link between 1– Deplug and replug
Hardware
ure_DRWU Problem (RUP) mother board and the drawer 1.3
failure
(”U“= 1,2,3 or 4) Maj / Min drawer U 2– replace the drawer
SFP alarms
Alarms are raised on SFP module
PROTECT_
FAIL_DRW_U Hardware switch problem
Problem (RUP) the board 2.2
(”U“= 1,2,3 or 4) failure with O–SNCP
(SW alarm)
Other alarms : All the generic alarms except HWF.
5.4.1.27 Multiplexer / Demultiplexer board
a) OMDX8100_M_##
b) OMDX8100_M_xx_XS and OADMn100

• OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_NOSPV, OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_SPV1, OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_SPV2,
OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards
• OADM4100 boards
• OADM2100 boards
• OADM1100 boards.
These alarms are not raised with OMDX8100_M_L2, OMDX8100_M_S1 and

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OMDX8100_M_S2.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 473 / 554
554
Table 99. OMDX/OADM specific alarms.
Probable cause
HW–syst

name
(SA/NSA)

Hardware External power supply fail-
failure ure
outputPower– Optical output power of Check optical path be-
Signal fail-
OLOS Loss (OPL) the Mux output is below fore transponders or
ure
Maj / Min the acceptable signal level monitoring diode
ILOS(for inputPowerLoss Optical input power of the Check previous cas-
Signal fail-
cascaded- (IPL) Demux input is below the caded Demux or moni-
ure
Demux only) Maj / Min acceptable signal level toring diode
c) CMDX2
Table 100. CMDX2 specific alarms
Probable cause
HW–syst
name
(SA/NSA)
HWF blem (RUP) plug the board
failure failure
InputPower – Loss Optical input power of the Check CWDMnet-
ILOS Signal failure (IPL) DeMux input is below the work or monitoring
Maj / Min acceptable signal level diode
5.4.1.28 Optical Spectrum Measurement Card (OSMC)
Table 101. OSMC specific alarms
Probable cause
HW–syst
name
(SA/NSA)
Hardware
HWF Problem (RUP) OBPS failure board
failure
1. Check OSMC is correctly
connected to monitored
configurationOr-
Cal_portP_O Calibration Factor of board via monitoring ports or
Signal deg- CustomizationEr-
OR port P is out of the passing thru attenuator
radation ror (COCE)
(1 P 8) range [0;40] dB 2. Check optical power at-
Warn / Warn
monitored port of the moni-
tored board is correct
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 474 / 554
554
1. Check that the OSMC,
MVAC or monitored boards
configurationOr- (OAC, OAC_L, Mux/Demux)
Mainte-
Auto_Equ_ CustomizationEr- Automatic equalization do not raise the following
nance indi-
Stop ror (COCE) stopped alarms : HWF, C_Type, AB-

cation
Warn / Warn NOR, C_ABS,C_NOT_ACC.

2. Check there is no
ILOS_PortP_Total on OSMC
1. Check that OSMC and
monitored board (OAC,
configurationOr-
Mainte- OADM, OMDX) do not raise
Auto_Cal_ CustomizationEr- Automatic calibration
nance indi- the generic alarms.
Stop ror (COCE) stopped
cation 2. Check if there is no ILOS
Warn / Warn
or OLOS on OSMC moni-
tored board
ILOS_PortP_ Loss of total input pow-
total (note 1) er at port P (1 P 8) 1. Check path between each
Signal fail
fail- monitored port and OSMC
N/A Loss of channel x (1
ILOS_PortP_ ure inputs.
x 32) at port P (1 2. Clean connectors
chx (note 1)
P 8)
Note 1 : these events can be raised when the operator is asking for spectrumacquisition or pre–equaliza-
tion.
They are only measurement and are not in the AS.
5.4.1.29 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
Table 102. MVAC specific alarms.
Probable cause De-

Alarm type fault Severity (SA/ Maintenance Rel
name marks
NSA)
Hardware
HWF blem (RUP) OBPS failure plug the board 2.0
failure
OOR_VOA_ Mainte- configurationOrCusto- 1. Check path before
The VOA is out of
PortP nance mizationError (COCE) MVAC port P 2.2
range
(1 P 2) indication Warn / Warn 2. Clean connectors
1. Check path before
outputPower– Loss of output MVAC port P
OLOS_PortP Signal fail-
Loss (OPL) power at port 2. Clean connectors 2.0
(1 P 2) ure
Maj / Min P (1 P 2) 3. Check attenuator
is working properly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 475 / 554
554
5.4.2 Optical transmission domain alarms
This section lists all the alarms that can be generated in the Optical Transmission domain to control the
transport quality of the system. The alarm seen on the CRAFT view are shown between brackets in the

probable cause column.

5.4.2.1 URU
URU alarmis raised on OGPI, OTS,OSPI and GMAU Trail termination when a RUP, RUTM or RUM prob-
able cause is detected on the supported board.
5.4.2.2 SSF
SSF alarm is a software correlation of previously raised alarms.
SSF is not suitable for maintenance. See primarily raised alarms.
5.4.2.3 SPVM board
For each row, the column “Trail Termination / Adaptation“ is split so as to show the objects for both following
cases:
– SPVM board in slot#23 for 1696MS and slot#4 for 1696MS_C. This configuration corresponds to the
supervision of the OTS
– SPVM board in different from slot#23 for 1696MS and different from slot#4 for 1696MS_C. Those
cells are greyed. This configuration corresponds to the supervision of a CPE.
In this table, the letter “U“ stands for the port to take into account.
Table 103. SPVM board transmission alarms
Probable cause Trail ter-

HW–syst Alarm Meaning and re-
Default Severity mination / Maintenance
name type marks
(SA/NSA) Adaptation
The signal frame can-
lossOfSuperviso- OTS_TT
not be recovered from
ry–Channel-
ry Channel
LOF_U Signal the output of the re-
Frame (LOSCF) OGPI_TT
U=1,2 failure ceiver. This alarm is
or Check input fiber.
not raised when a
Maj / Min OSPI_TT Check SPVM rere-
LOSC is detected.
ceiver or remote
lossOfSuperviso
lossOfSuperviso- OTS_TT lev- SPVM emitter.
Optical input power lev
SUP_RXU Signal ry–Channel OGPI_TT el of the SPV channel
U=1,2 failure (LOSC) or has fallen below the ac-
Maj / Min OSPI_TT ceptable signal level
communication- Check input fiber.
RS_LAPD OTS_TT The LAPD commu-
Signal SubsystemFai- Check SPV receiver
_ FAIL_U nication has failed.
failure lure (CSF) (check URU on OTS)
OTS).
U=1,2 RS DCC (D1–D3) in
(tbc) not used Check fiber break or
(Note 1) failure in port#U
Min / Min failure in previous NE
OMS_TT Check input fiber.
MS_LAPD Signal communication
communication- The LAPD commu
commu-
Check SPV receiver
_ FAIL_U failure SubsystemFai- OGPI_TT nication has failed. MS
(check URU on OMS)
U=1,2 (tbc) lure (CSF) or DCC (D4–D12) in fail-
Check fiber break or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(Note 1) Min / Min OSPI_TT ure in port#U

failure in previous NE
Note 1 : these alarms are raised by the EC.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 476 / 554
554
5.4.2.4 UIC board
none
5.4.2.5 OMSP board

Table 104. OMSP boards transmission alarms
Probable
Trail termina-
HW–syst cause Default Meaning and
Alarm type tion / Adapta- Maintenance
name Severity (SA/ remarks
tion
NSA)
ILOS2 Loss of Signal Signal loss on input port #2
Signal failure (LOS)
ILOS3 Maj / Min Signal loss on input port #3
5.4.2.6 OAC boards
The following alarm concerns OAC1, L_OAC1, OAC2 and L_OAC2 boards.
Table 105. OAC boards transmission alarms
Probable cause
HW–syst Alarm Trail termination Meaning and re- Mainte-
Default Severi-
name type / Adaptation marks nance
ty (SA/NSA)
lossOfMulti- Optical input power
Check fiber
plexSection level of the first stage
Signal break or fail-
ILOS1 (LOMS) OTS/OMS_A_Sk of the amplifier has
failure ure in pre-
fallen below the ac-
vious NEs
Maj / Min ceptable signal level
5.4.2.7 OMDX boards
The following alarm concerns only OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards. No trans-
mission alarms are associated to OMDX8100_M_L2, OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2 boards.
Table 106. OMDX boards transmission alarms
Probable cause Trail termina-

Alarm type Default Severity tion / Adapta- Maintenance
name marks
(SA/NSA) tion
Optical input
lossOfMulti- power level of
plexSection the first stage of Check fiber
Signal fail-
ILOS (LOMS) OTS/OMS_A_Sk the demux input break or failure
ure
has fallen below in previous NEs
Maj / Min the acceptable
signal level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 477 / 554
554
5.4.2.8 MCC boards
The following alarms concern the following boards :

– MCC1_SDH, MCC1_SYN, MCC1_ASY,

– MCC2_SDH, MCC2_SYN,

– MCC3_SDH_SONET and MCC3_SYN. In this case, some more alarms are raised by SFP module.
except LBER alarm not managed in MCC1.
Table 107. MCC boards transmission alarms

HW–syst Meaning and
Alarm type Default Severi- tion / Adapta- Maintenance
name remarks
ty (SA/NSA) tion
User optical
signal input
power has fall-
Check the opti-
ILOS_user for en below the
lossOfSignal cal path be-
MCC3 it is a Signal fail- acceptable sig-
(LOS) OGPI_TT tween user and
“OR“ with ure nal level, or
Maj / Min 1696MS Check
LOC_User_Rx loss of clock of
receiver
user incoming
signal (only for
MCC3)..
Signal deg- lowBER (LBER) Transmission
LBER_user (1) RS_TT
radation Maj / Min degradation
Check the opti-
The signal
cal path be-
frame cannot
lossOfFrame tween SDH and
LOF_SDH_use Signal fail- OGPI/ be recovered
(LOF) 1696MS.
r (2) ure RS_A_Sk from the output
Maj / Min Check trans-
of the B&W re-
mitted signal in
ceiver
client NE
Check the cab-
ling between
The WDM in- MCC and OAC.
lossOfWave-
OMS/ coming signal Check the
length (LOW)
OCH_A_Sk power is below WDM line.
ILOS_WDM Maj / Min
the acceptable Might not be
and for MCC3: Signal fail- raised with the
signal level, or
plus ure use of amplifier
loss of clock of
LOC WDM Rx
LOC_WDM_Rx
WDM incoming Check the opti-
lossOfSignal signal (only for cal path be-
(LOS) OGPI_TT MCC3).. tween CPE and
(>R1.1 only) (MCC remote)
1696MS.
Maj / Min
Check receive
LBER_WDM Signal deg- lowBER (LBER) Transmission
RS_TT
(1) radation Maj / Min degradation
The signal
frame cannot
lossOfFrame Check WDM
LOF_SDH_WD Signal fail- be recovered
(LOF) OCH/RS_A_Sk path for the
M (2) ure from the output
Maj / Min channel
of the WDM re-
ceiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 478 / 554
554
The signal
frame onWDM
Tx cannot be
recovered. In Check adjacent
MCC for the
OMS/ pass–through
channel, or
OCH_A_So configuration,
for am– Check user receiver,
adjacent MCC or user path.
transmitFailure for the channel,
LOC_WDM (1) Signal fail-
(TTF) or user receiv-
(Not for MCC3) ure
Maj / Min er or user path
er, path.
OGPI/
OCH_A_So
OGPI/ (MCC remote) CheckWDMline
OCH_A_So figuration, am- or previous
(MCC remote) plified net- NEs
works, this can
means a loss of
signal
OGPI/
RS_A_So
serverSignal– Alarm synthe-
Signal fail- (MCC_SDH) see primary
SSF_User_Rx Failure (SSF) sis of previous
ure OGPI/ alarms
Maj / Min raised alarms
GDT_A_So
(other MCC)
OGPI/
OCH_A_So
serverSignal– Alarm synthe-
Signal fail- (MCC_SDH) see primary
SSF_WDM_Rx Failure (SSF) sis of previous
ure OCH/ alarms
GDT_A_So
(other MCC)
(1) not managed in MCC1_ASY.
(2) this alarm is raised only if Trail Monitor has been created.
5.4.2.9 SFP modules
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on all SFP modules :
Table 108. SFP specific alarms.

name marks
(SA/NSA) tion
Check the optical
lossOfSignal Input optical pow-
path between
(LOS) er has fallen be-
ILOS Signal failure OGPI_TT user and
low the accept-
1696MS.
Maj / Min able signal level
Check receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 479 / 554
554

– WLA2M board

– WLA2M_OP.

Table 109. WLA2 boards transmission alarms

name marks
(SA/NSA) tion
The signal frame
LOF_SDH_ losOfFrame cannot be recov-
signal fail- Check path for
PORT_U (LOF) OGPI/RS_A_Sk ered from the
ure the channel
(U=1..4) Maj / Min output of the
WDM receiver

– WLA3CDboard
– WLA3CDOP board.
Table 110. WLA3CD boards transmission alarms

Alarm type Default Severi- tion / Adapta- Maintenance
name remarks
ty (SA/NSA) tion
The signal
LOF_SDH_ losOfFrame frame cannot be
signal fail- Check path for
PORT_U (LOF) OGPI/GDC recovered from
ure the channel
(U=1..4) Maj / Min the output of the
WDM receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 480 / 554
554
5.4.2.12 OCC10 board
Table 111. OCC10 boards transmission alarms

probable–
Cause Trail ter-

HW–syst Alarm Meaning and
Default Severi- mination / Maintenance Rel
name type remarks
ty (SA/ Adaptation
NSA)
User optical sig-
Check the opti-
nal input power
LOF_SDH_ lossOfSignal cal path be-
Signal has fallen below
POR T_U (LOS) OGPI_TT tween user and 2.0
failure the acceptable
(U=1..4) Maj / Min 1696MS Check
loss of signal
receiver
level
Signal
LBER_User lowBER (LBER) Transmission
degrada- RS_TT 2.0
_Rx Maj / Min degradation
tion
Signal
LBER_WD lowBER (LBER) Transmission
degrada- RS_TT 2.0
M_Rx Maj / Min degradation
tion
Check the opti-
The signal
cal path be-
frame cannot be
lossOfFrame tween SDH and
LOF_SDH_ Signal OGPI/ recovered
(LOF) 1696MS. 2.0
User _Rx failure RS_A_Sk fromthe output
Maj / Min Check trans-
of the B&W re-
mitted signal in
ceiver
client NE
Check the cab-
ling between
lossOfWave- MCC and OAC.
length OMS/ Check the WDM
TheWDM in- 2.0
(LOW) OCH_A_Sk line. Might not
Maj / Min coming signal be raised with
LOS_WDM Signal input power is the use of am-
_Rx failure below the ac- plifier
ceptable signal
level Check the opti-
lossOfSignal OGPI_TT cal path be-
(LOS) (OCC10 re- tween CPE 2.2
Maj / Min mote) and 1696MS.
Check receiver.
OMS/
lowThreshold- OCH_A_Sk
Signal Error rate has
CorrectedError-
CorrectedError
LTCER_W OGPI/ fallen below
degrada- Rate 2.2
DM_Rx OCH_A_Sk Low threshold
tion (LTCER)
(OCC10 re- limit
Min / Min
mote)
highThreshold- OMS/
Correcshold-
Correcshold OCH_A_Sk
Signal Error rate has
HTCER_W CorrectedError- OGPI/
degrada- reached High 2.2
DM_Rx Rate OCH_A_Sk
tion threshold limit
(HTCER) (OCC10 re-
Maj / Min mote)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 481 / 554
554
OMS/ The signal
OCH_A_Sk frame cannot be
LOF_OTN_ Signal OGPI/ recovered
(LOF) path for the 2.2
WDM_Rx failure OCH_A_Sk fromthe output
Maj / Min channel

(OCC10 re- of the WDM re-

mote) ceiver
The SDH signal
LOF_SDH_ Signal OCH/ frame cannot be
(LOF) path for the 2.0
WDM_Rx failure RS_A_Sk recovered from
Maj / Min channel
the FEC chip
OMS/ The signal mul-
lossOfMulti
lossOfMulti- OCH_A_Sk titi–frame
frame cannot
Check WDM
LOM_OTN Signal Frame OGPI/ be recovered
path for the 2.2
_WDM_Rx failure (LOMF) OCH_A_Sk from the output
channel.
Maj / Min (OCC10 re- of the WDM re-
mote) ceiver
serverSignal– Alarm synthesis
SSF_User_ Signal OGPI/
Failure (SSF) of previous see HW alarms 2.0
Rx Failure RS_A_Sk
serverSignal– Alarm synthesis
SSF_WDM Signal OGPI/
Failure (SSF) of previous see HW alarms 2.0
_Rx Failure OCH_A_Sk
Payload PayloadType
PTM Type Mismatch 2.2a
Mismatch Warn / Warn
5.4.2.13 OADM boards
The following alarm concerns OADM1, OADM2, OADM4 and OADM8 boards.
Table 112. OADM boards transmission alarms

name marks
(SA/NSA) tion
Optical input pow-
lossOfMulti- er level of the first Check fiber
Signal fail- plexSection OTS/ stage of the demux break or fail-
ILOS
ure (LOMS) OMS_A_Sk input has fallen be- ure in pre-
Maj / Min low the acceptable vious NEs
signal level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 482 / 554
554
5.4.2.14 4xANY boards

– 4xANY
– 4xANY_S
– 4xANY_P. In this case, some more alarms are raised by SFP module.
Table 113. 4xANY boards transmission alarms
probable–
Trail termina-
HW–syst Alarm Cause Meaning and
tion / Adapta- Maintenance Rel
name type Default Sever- remarks
tion
ity (SA/NSA)
optical signal in-
LOS Check the opti-
put power from
(not in lossOfSignal cal path be-
Signal NE has fallen
the (LOS) OSPI_TT tween NE and 1.1
failure below the ac-
4xANY_P Maj / Min 4xANY(_S).
ceptable signal
case) Check receiver
level
The signal frame
Check the opti-
lossOfFrame cannot be recov-
Signal cal path be-
LOF (LOF) OSPI/RS_A_Sk ered from the 1.1
failure tween 4xANY
Maj / Min output of the
and MCC
STM16 receiver
Signal lowBER
Transmission
LBER degrada- (LBER) RS_TT 1.1
degradation
tion Maj / Min
MS–RDI has
been generated
by remote corre-
farEndReceiv- sponding 4xANY Check trans-
Mainte-
er– Failure due to network ponder link, or
MS–RDI nance RS_TT 1.3
(FERF) failure on physi- SONET SDH/
indication
Warn / Warn cal or RS or MS WDM network
layers, or to the
loss of trans-
ponder link
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 483 / 554
554
5.4.2.15 All 4xANY drawers
The following alarms concern the HF_DRAWER, LF_DRAWER and SDH_DRAWER drawers.
Table 114. SDH_DRAWER, HF_DRAWER and LF_DRAWER drawers transmission alarms

probable–
Cause Trail termina-
Alarm type Default Se- tion / Maintenance Rel
name remarks
verity (SA/ Adaptation
NSA)
Optical signal Check the op-
input power tical path be-
ILOS_U lossOfSignal
has fallen before 4xANY
(”U“= 1,2,3 or Signal failure (LOS) GMAU_TT 1.1
low the ac- user.
4) Maj / Min
ceptable sig- Check receiv-
nal level er
OR wired of
SDH alarms :
serverSignal-
SSF_U LOS, LOF,
Failure
(”U”= 1,2,3 or Signal failure GMAU_TT MS–AIS, AU– 2.2
(SSF)
4) AIS, AU–LOP,
Maj / Min
PLM, SQM,
LOM, LOA
Loss of a cli- Check optical
Pk––AIS_U
aIS (AIS) GMAU/ ent path before
(”U”= 1,2,3 or Signal failure 2.2
Maj / Min GDC_A_So in remote client of re-
4)
4xANY mote 4xANY
Pk–RDI has
been gener- Find the origin
farEndReceiv-
Pk––RDI_U ated in re- of Pk_AIS
Maintenance erFailure
(”U”= 1,2,3 or GMAU_TT mote 4xANY and refer to 2.2
indication (FERF)
4) due to the Pk_AIS main-
Warn / Warn
detection of a tenance
Pk_AIS
5.4.2.16 Optical Spectrum Measurement Card (OSMC)
None.
5.4.2.17 Optical Protection Card (OPC)
Table 115. OPC transmission alarms.
Probable cause
name marks
(SA/NSA)
SSF–i serverSignal– Alarmsynthesis of
Signal failure See primary
Failure (SSF) previous raised
SSF–e alarms
Maj / Min alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 484 / 554
554
5.5 Power supply characteristics
Input Voltage range (from station batteries) – 40,5 V – 48 V – 57,0 V
– 50,0 V – 60 V – 72,0 V
DC/DC Power supply units’ output voltages + 3.6 V 3%

– 5.5 V 3%
+ 5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
Input current Compact shelf = 4 A max
1696MS shelf = 15 A max
Power supply interface according to ETS 300132–2
5.5.1 Power consumption
This product is designed for low power consumption. Developing new components with very high integra-
tion density and low voltage supply leads to a significant reduction of power consumption.
If necessary several configurations can be taken into account; depending on the number and type of cards
of the deployed configuration, the power consumption may vary in a wide range.
Estimated max 1696MS power consumption 450W – a fully equipped shelf with 16 transponders
Estimated max 1696MS_C power consumption 150W – 4 channels line terminal (1 shelf)
Max power consumption per rack 1650W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 485 / 554
554
5.5.2 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units
Unit Maximum power consumption [W]

OMDX8100_M_xx, OADM1/2/4/8 0.5

CMDX2 3

ESC 9.3
MCC1/ MCC2 16.8
MCC3 13.9
OCC10 22.6
WLA2M, WLA2M_OP 26
WLA3CD, WLA3CDOP 19
4xANY(_S/_P) without drawers 20
4xANY(_S/__P) with 4 drawers 32
Drawer 3 (each)
OAC1 and OAC1_L 23.5
OAC2 and OAC2_L 18.5
SPV_F_C_1310_1550, SPV_F_C 0.5
SPVM, SPVM2 12
SPVM_H 11
MVAC 2
OSMC 9.7
OPC 0,5
OMSP 7.5
LAN 2.4
PSC 0.4 + Psec (*)
PSC2 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4x2)
PSC3 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4)
HK 2.5
RAI 2
UIC 2.6
FAN 20
FAN_C 9.6
(*) For each PSC board, Psec = 1/2(Pshelf 5V + Pshelf 3.3V)(1–0.85).

Pshelf 5V is the power consumption of the 5V feed.
Pshelf 3.3V is the power consumption of the 3.3V.
Abnormal service range
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at –48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the follow-
ing voltage range : 0 V to –40,5 V and –57 V to –60 V.
When the equipment operates at –60 V the voltage range becomes: 0 V to –50 V and –72 V to –75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 486 / 554
554
5.6 Mechanical characteristics
Rack mechanical compatibility ETSI ETS/E3, NEBS2000, Optinex compatible

1696MS subrack size 534 W x 270 D x 443 H mm

1696MS_C subrack size 446 W x 270 D (with cover) x 132 H mm

Boards size 285 mm high, 2–slot wide (8 TE) (4xANY)
285 mm high, 1–slot wide (4 TE)
88 mm high, 1–slot wide (4 TE)
1696MS Subrack weight 8.5 Kg for an empty Central Office shelf and
36.0 Kg for a fully populated Central Office shelf
with transponders, optical amplifiers, mux/demux
and common cards
1696MS_C Subrack weight 5.5 Kg for an empty Compact shelf and
12.5 Kg for a fully populated Compact shelf with
transponders, mux/demux and common cards
Cooling Fans located at the bottom of the shelf
Rack cabling Vertical between rack and subrack front access
Electrical Connectors IEC 603/DIN 41612
IEC 807 (Sub–D)
IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)
BNC 50 Ω
BNC 75 Ω
RJ45
RJ11
Back–to–back installation Yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 487 / 554
554
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units
Unit Weight [Kg]

OMDX8100_M_xx 1.1

CMDX2 1.1

OADM4, OADM8 1.1
OADM1, OADM2 0.9
ESC 0.85
MCC/ MCC2 0.9
MCC3 1.0
OCC10 0.93
WLA2M, WLA2M_OP 1.2
WLA3CD, WLA3CDOP 1.2
4xANY(_S/_P) without drawers 1.25
4x ANY(_S/_P) with 4 drawers 1.65
Drawer 0.1 (each)
OAC 1.14
SPV_F_C_1310_1550 0.9
SPV_F_C 0.21
SPVM, SPVM2 0.79
MVAC 0.9
OSMC 1.1
OPC 0.18
OMSP 0.3
LAN 0.13
PSC, PSC2, PSC3 0.28
HK 0.13
RAI 0.12
UIC 0.12
FAN 2.2 (Fan module +filter)
FAN_C 0.330
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 488 / 554
554
5.7 Environmental characteristics
Main environmental aspects of Alcatel products are:

– energy consumption during manufacturing and use,

– materials harmfulness and recyclability,
– emissions to air, water or soil related to the manufacturing and the use of the product,
– electromagnetic (EM) emissions,
– value recovery at the product end of life.
The 1696MSPAN is designed to be compliant to both ETSI and ANSI standards.
The technical data of this chapter are referred to ITU–T Recommendations, ETSI Standards or Telcordia
(former Bellcore) standard.
5.7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ETSI compliancy
The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
• 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:
– by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992
– by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to the above Directives is declared, when the equipment is installed as for the manifacturer
handbooks, according to the following European Norms:
• EN 300 386 V1.3.2 (2003–05), environment “Telecommunication Center”
WARNING
This is a class A product EN55022. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this prod-
uct may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Compliancy Class of Compact shelf on table configuration: B
5.7.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ANSI compliancy
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR – 1089 (see note).
The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located section 3–1 & 3–2.
N.B. GR – 1089 – CORE

Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network Telecommu-
nication equipment
issue 2, December 1997
5.7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) condition

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
For the EMC condition see also paragraph 3.1 on page 35.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 489 / 554
554
5.7.4 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
The marking printed on the subrack (refer to Figure 1. on page 39 and Table 7. on page 38) denotes

compliancy with the Directive 2002/96/EC On Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

The general principle is the producer responsibility in the management of the products he puts on the mar-
ket when discarded by the owner. The producer responsibility now covers the end of life of the products
sold.
The European directive is effective in a country once transposed. The starting date for the producer re-
sponsibility for the European text is 13th August 2005.
All Alcatel products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/ EC)
i.e. ”IT and Telecommunication equipment” under item ”other products transmitting sound, images or other
information by telecommunications.”
Alcatel products fall under WEEE directive name: ”Other product or equipment of transmitting sound, im-
ages or other information by telecommunications” in Annex 1B.
This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.
5.7.5 Acoustical noise
The acoustical noise level of the product complies with:
• ETS 300 753 Environmental Class 3.1 for attended telecommunication equipment rooms (max-
imum sound level 7.2 bels)
The measurements have been performed according to the standards: ISO 3745 and ISO 7779
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 490 / 554
554
5.7.6 Environmental constraints
5.7.6.1 ETSI compliancy
The technical data of this chapter are, where it is possible, referred to ITU–T Recommendations or ETSI
Standards.
The system is designed for indoor operation with controlled air temperature. The complete environmental
conditions, including climatic, atmospheric and mechanical conditions are specified in the ETS 300 019.
The following environmental hazard levels of this standard is applied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 491 / 554
554
5.7.6.1.1 Storage
The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. Storage:
ETS 300 019–1–2 : 1992, hazard level 1.2

hazard level 1.2 : weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage location.
This hazard level applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown in Figure 316. on page 494.
This hazard level applies to storage locations :
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may
also be subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area, and/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this hazard level may occur in :
– unattended buildings ;
– some entrances of buildings ;
– some garages and shacks.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 492 / 554
554
Table 116. Main climatic conditions
Environmental parameter Unit Value

Low air temperature °C –25
High air temperature °C 55
Low relative humidity % 10
High relative humidity % 100
Low absolute humidity g/m3 0,5
High absolute humidity g/m3 29
Rain intensity mm/min no
Rate of change of temperature °C/min 0,5
Low air pressure kPa 70
High air pressure kPa 106
Solar radiation W/m2 1120
Movement of the surrounding air m/s 30
Condition of condensation – yes
Condition of precipitation – yes, wind–driven

precipitation
Condition of icing and frosting – yes
Climatogram 2 (ETS 300

019–1–1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 493 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
03
0
–40
–30
–20
–10
10
20
30
40
50
60
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %

80
90
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
100
20
0.5
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

Figure 316. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
494 / 554
5.7.6.1.2 Transportation
The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :
ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, hazard level 2.2 (Careful transportation).

This hazard level applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low tem-
perature and handling.
hazard level 2.2 covers the condition of hazard level 2.1. In addition hazard level 2.2 includes transporta-
tion in all types of lorries and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shock–reducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.
High air temperature, air in unventilated enclosures °C 70
High air temperature, air in ventilated enclosures or outdoor air °C 40
Relative humidity % 95
Absolute humidity g/m3 60
Rain intensity mm/min 6
Heat radiation W/m2 600

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 495 / 554
554
5.7.6.1.3 Climatic for operating conditions
The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.
The functionality of the Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :

ETS 300 019–1–3 :1992 , hazard level 3.2.
hazard level 3.2: Partly temperature–controlled locations.
This hazard level applies to locations :
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open win-
dows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to negligible vibrations.
The conditions of this hazard level may be found in:
– entrances and staircases of buildings;
– garages;
– cellars;
– certain workshops;
– buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
– unattended equipment stations;
– certain telecommunication buildings;
– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 496 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
03
–5
0
–40
–30
–20
–10
10
20
30
40
45
50
60
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %

80
90
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
100
1
20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

Figure 317. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations
497 / 554

High air temperature °C 45
Low relative humidity % 5
High relative humidity % 95
Low absolute humidity g/m3 1
High absolute humidity g/m3 29
Rate of change of temperature °C/min 0,5
High air pressure kPa 106
Heat radiation W/m2 600
Condition of wind–driven rain, snow,... – no
Condition of icing – yes
Climatogram 2 (ETS 300

019–1–3)
5.7.6.2 ANSI compliancy
The environmental constraints requirements for the system are also compliant with the GR – 63 (see note).
N.B. GR – 63 – CORE
Network Equipment – Building System (NEBS) Requirements : Physical Protection
issue 1, October 1995
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 498 / 554
554
6 HARDWARE SETTINGS
This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
Each paragraph is dedicated to a single unit/sub–unit or to a group of unit/sub–unit with the same hardware
settings.
Each paragraph contains:
• one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the setting
options to make
• the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
In case of hardware setting modification in the same unit, all the different options are presented in the same
paragraph.
Details about identification Part Number and Change Status are defined in next paragraph.
N.B.
SZ1 IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF THE COMPONENT
N.B. When necessary to make “TC” Hardware Settings fitted on the rear side of the board, remove
the protective cover plate present on the same rear side and replace it at the end of the opera-
tion.
The setting options described in this chapter must be used according to the document presented in
Figure 318. on page 503 , which shows the “ON” (CLOSED) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should never
be modified.
The Hardware Settings can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to a unit and
by using the presetting indication presented in this chapter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 499 / 554
554
6.1 Part Number and Change Status identification
Each unit or sub–unit is distinguished by:

• a Part Number: ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xxyy) (NOTE)

The last two ANV-P/N letters (yy, in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible alterna-
tive”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compatible.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA” are function-
ally compatible and, as regards the hardware settings, the hardware settings paragraph (de-
scribed hereafter) is applicable for both.
• a design & production series (change status): ICS,
The following table shows an example of evolution of ”ANV P/N + ICS”
Table 119. Example of ANV Part Number + ICS evolution
ANV CODE
P/N ICS
3AL 34422 AA AA 01
3AL 34422 AA AB 01
3AL 34422 AA AC 01
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified by the ’suffix + ICS’ in the
ANV code.
Some of the possible positions of the labels indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
in para. 3.4 on page 38.
As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same Part Number) but with different
ICS, each hardware settings paragraph describes with possible different parts the different setting options,
according to all the possible P/N + ICSs. For this purpose, when more than one setting versions are
present, a table at the beginning of the paragraph indicates the part to be used according to the corre-
sponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:
– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting op-
tions;
– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a handbook change;
– the SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
• from specified SUFFIX or ICS (included)
• to next SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 500 / 554
554
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
Taking into account the same unit of Table 119. on page 500:
Supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
Part in the paragraph ANV P/N
FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
1 ––AA 01
2 ––AC 01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
ANV CODE
P/N ICS
3AL 34422 AAAA 01
3AL 34422 AAAB 01
you will use the Part 1 of the paragraph for 3AL 34422 AAAA
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
ANV CODE
P/N ICS
3AL 34422 AAAC 01
3AL 34422 AAAD 01
you will use Part 2 of the paragraph for 3AL 34422 AAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 501 / 554
554
6.2 General safety rules and warnings
WARNING EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
3.1.3 ON PAGE 36
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical con-
nections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
A TNV–2 (battery) voltage could be present on “R/M interface connector” (cable

side); do not touch the pins when unplugged.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-im-

pedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye
damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para. 2.2.4.2 on page 31.
GENERAL RULES
ESD connector protections, etc)
• In order to reduce the risk of damaging the electrostatic sensitive devices, it is mandatory to use
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
when touching the equipment.
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws)
into the subrack must be:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 502 / 554
554
6.3 Microswitches “ON” position
The following figure shows all the available switch types front view and relevant meaning.
Figure 318. Microswitch front view and meaning

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 503 / 554
554
6.4 OMDX, OADM and SPV_F hardware settings
These units contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are re-
ported in the following figures and in Table 120.

The sub–unit (METRO OAMDX CONTROL BOARD) P/N is 3AL 86638 AA––.
This unit belongs to (see Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list)
– all the OMDX8100 board types
– all the OADM8100 / 4100 / 2100 / 1100 board types
– the SPV_F_1310_1550 board types.
For details about the use of this hardware setting refer to the Maintenance Handbook.
FRONT VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 504 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
REAR SIDE VIEW
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
505 / 554

Table 120. OMDX, OADM and SPV_F presetting table

I DIP switches I2 e I3 sono usati per predisporre il numero di CID (identificazione di unità)
in funzione del tipo di board
I2 and I3 DIP switches are used to set CID (card identification) number in function of the board type
(OMDX_8100_M_xx, OADM_8100_M_x_S or OMDX_4100_M_chxx_yy_S)
The HW setting are:

When the METRO OAMDX CONTROL board
(3AL 86638 AAAA) is part of an: I2 I3
1 2 1 2 3 4
OMDX_8100_M_xx On Off On On On On
OADM_8100_M_x_S On Off Off On Off On
Off
OADM_4100_M_chxx–yy_S Off On Off Off Off Off
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 506 / 554
554
6.5 ESC hardware settings
This unit contains hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are re-
ported in Figure 319. and in para. 6.5.1
The sub–unit (EQUIPMENT AND SHELF CONTROLLER) P/N is 3AL 86662 AA––.
FRONT VIEW
Figure 319. ESC hardware settings
6.5.1 ESC Presetting table
Refer to correct SW Release of the operator’s handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 507 / 554
554
6.6 SPVM2 and SPVM_H hardware settings
These units contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are re-
ported in the following figures and in Table 121.

The sub–unit (PBA–CONTROL SPV–M) P/N is 3AL 86612 AA––.
– SPVM2 board
– SPVM_H board.
FRONT SIDE VIEW

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 508 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
REAR SIDE VIEW
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
509 / 554
Table 121. SPVM2 and SPVM_H presetting table

Il DIP switch I1 è usato per settare il modo operativo dell’unità : NORMAL o TEST
E’ usata solo la prima posizione.
I1 DIP switch is used to set the operating mode of the board: NORMAL or TEST.
Only the first position is used
– Off: NORMAL mode
– On: TEST mode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 510 / 554
554
6.7 LANC (LAN access card) hardware settings
This unit contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are re-
ported in Figure 320. and in Table 122.
The sub–unit (PBA–CONTROL LANC – LAN ACCESS CARD) P/N is 3AL 86617 AA––.
– LAN_Q board
– LAN_I board.
FRONT SIDE VIEW
Figure 320. LAN_Q and LAN_I hardware settings

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 511 / 554
554
Table 122. Presetting table

*= FACTORY PRESETTINGS
hardware setting
Shelf Type CM2
CM1
Master shelf B F
First drop shelf 7 F
Second drop shelf 3 F
Third drop shelf E F
Fourth drop shelf A F
Fifth drop shelf 6 F
and so on...
Per l’uso di CM1, CM2, CM3 vedi anche il Manuale Tecnico & Operatore
For CM1, CM2, CM3 see also Technical & Operator’s Hanbook
L’unità LANC installata nel Drop Shelf nello slot 27 dell’apparato OCP deve
avere connesso i punti 2 e 3 del TC15
A LANC board installed in a drop shelf, at the slot 27, of OCP equipment must
have the points 2 and 3 of TC15 connected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 512 / 554
554
6.8 MCC3 hardware settings
The sub–unit (PBA–MCC3 CONTROL BOARD) P/N is 3AL 95152 AA––.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the MCC3 boards P/N.
Figure 321. MCC3 hardware settings
Table 123. MCC3 presetting table
Switch position (I1) Operation

1 = OFF 2 = OFF 3 = OFF 4 = ON MCC3
1 = OFF 2 = OFF 3 = OFF 4 = OFF MCC2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 513 / 554
554
6.9 OCC10 hardware settings

The sub–unit (PBA–OCC10 CONTROL) P/N is 3AL 86785 AA––.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the OCC10 boards P/N.
STM–64 / 2
10GbE WAN
3
10 GbE LAN
4
Figure 322. OCC10 hardware settings
Table 124. OCC10 presetting table
M10 state Operation

3–4 linked by means of a jumper 10 GbE LAN
2–3 linked by means of a jumper STM–64 / 10 GbE WAN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 514 / 554
554
6.10 OCC10_E hardware settings
The sub–unit (PBA–OCC10 XFP CONTROL) P/N is 3AL 95229 AA––.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the OCC10_E boards P/N.
Figure 323. OCC10_E hardware settings
Table 125. OCC10_E presetting table
Switch position (I1) Operation

1 = ON 2 = OFF 3 = OFF 4 = OFF 10 GbE LAN
1 = OFF 2 = OFF 3 = OFF 4 = OFF STM–64 / 10 GbE WAN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 515 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
516 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
MAINTENANCE
517 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
518 / 554
7 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
3.1.3 ON PAGE 36
7.1 Maintenance introduction
7.1.1 General safety rules
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical con-
nections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.2.2.4.2 on page 31.
7.1.2 General rules
ESD connector protections, etc)
• In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
during the touching of the equipment
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 519 / 554
554
7.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.

Maintenance is classified as:
• ROUTINE (PREVENTIVE)
Routine (preventive) maintenance consists in carrying out a number of periodic operations to

minimize the risk of a failure on a link.
These operations can be scheduled or initiated by the equipment supervision system.
• CORRECTIVE
Corrective maintenance consists in carrying out a minimum number of operations to repair a

fault as rapidly as possible.
These operations are initiated by the equipment supervision system and limited to replacement
of boards.
Definition of the technical level of the maintenance agent:
It is mandatory for the technicians in charge of the equipment maintenance to be familiar with the
measurement techniques used on equipment fitted with optical connectors.
7.1.4 Instruments And Accessories
There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operator’s handbook.
Where TMN is implemented, an Operation System displays alarms and manages all the connected Equip-
ments of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
The need of special tools and accessories to perform possible routine and corrective maintenance proce-
dures is described inside the procedures themselves.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 520 / 554
554
7.2 Preventive maintenance
The ALCATEL1696MSPAN or 1696MS–C equipment requires no systematic preventive maintenance.

Only a routine maintenance is performed on the fans Equipment.
7.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months
It is suggested to carry out the following operations every six months:
• no–dust filter cleaning (ETSI rack) / substitution (ANSI rack)
7.2.1.1 No–dust filter cleaning / substitution
NO–DUST FILTER CLEANING / SUBSTITUTION
WARNING: BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE NO–DUST FILTER, CHECK

THAT THE PROTECTIVE ADHESIVE FILM HAS BEEN REMOVED.
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by rotat-

ing fans.
Every six months is has to be performed the following operations
• ETSI rack: cleaning the no–dust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
• ANSI rack: substitute the no–dust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
Note: the period of one year is only indicative; according to the environmental conditions could be neces-
sary to reduce this period.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 521 / 554
554
See Figure 324. on page 522. Only on FAN_C no–dust filter, it is necessary to pull out the FAN_C unit
following the procedure below described:
• unscrew the two screws (1) ensuring the FAN_C to the compact shelf

• insert the extractor in (2) and pull out to extract the FAN_C from the shelf
• unscrew the screw (3) ensuring the no–dust filter to the FAN_C and extract the no–dust filter
(4).
To re–insert the FAN_C into the shelf
• insert the no–dust filter (4) to the FAN_C
• screw the screw (3) to ensure the no–dust filter into the FAN_C
• properly insert the FAN_C into the shelf
• screw the two screws (1) to ensure the FAN_C to the compact shelf
1 3 EXT FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

PMU
FAN 4 no–dust filter

FIL-
TER
Figure 324. FAN_C: no–dast filter extraction

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 522 / 554
554
7.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:

• power cables check

7.2.2.1 Power cables check
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
– Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
– Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding
(the rack is connected to the station ground).
7.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years
It is suggested the replacement of each FANS unit (FAN and FAN_C) after five years of working.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 523 / 554
554
7.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)
Since the Troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the use of the Craft Terminal , please refer ,for
details, to the Maintenance Section of the Operator’s Handbook.

FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into
the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
The following paragraph can be used as an help during corrective actions.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 524 / 554
554
7.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication
This chapter guides you to localize the defaults occurring on the NE. Starting from an alarm indication,
it helps you to find the cause of the default and decide what has to be done to correct it.
Fault location can be performed by following simple rules. First, transmission domain alarms have to be
checked to locate the degraded NE. Then, when the faulty NE is identified, equipment domain alarms are
checked to locate degraded board or the faulty optical connection.
To give the operator the possibility to localize the faults, a few alarms are available:
– in a terminal:
• on each transponder MCC (no OCh–overhead):
– Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
– Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)
– Laser degradation (WDM or user side)
• LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
• LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)
ILOS LOC LDG
RX TX
B&W WDM
M
U
X SPV OLOS
LB
SB
TX RX M
B&W WDM U
X
LDG LOC ILOS
D
M
U
X LB
SB
D
M
U
X
SPV ILOS
Figure 325. position of the alarms in a terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 525 / 554
554
– in an OADM:
• on each transponder MCC (no OCh–overhead):
– Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
– Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)

– Laser degradation (WDM or user side)

– LBER at user Rx (based on B1 calculation – only for SDH/SONET signals)
• LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
• LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)
pass–through channels
SPV & ILOS ILOS LOC LDG ILOS LOC LDG

SPV OLOS
RX TX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U U
X X
D
M M
U U
X X
TX RX TX RX
WDM B&W B&W WDM
OLOS SPV SPV & ILOS
LDG LOC ILOS LDG LOC ILOS
pass–through channels
Figure 326. position of the alarms in an OADM
Alarms on transponders are described in the corresponding chapter (4.1).

Alarms on terminals input/output and on OADM output are described with OMDX and OADM units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 526 / 554
554
7.4 Set of spare parts
7.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–in
unit (see unit list in paragraph 2.2.3 on page 85).
7.4.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g.
, gas);
– if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make
sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one. For the presettings procedures see section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMEN-
TATION.
7.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management
Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different ver-
sions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare part
stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the unit
(program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must
be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the equip-
ment it refers to.
7.5 Repair Form
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 327. on
page 528.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 527 / 554
554
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER

SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 327. Repair form
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 528 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
529 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
530 / 554
8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
8.1 WEEE general information

According to the European directive (2002/96/EC) Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment, from August
13th 2005 the ”producer” of the equipment being sold, unless otherwise specified in the contract with the
Customer, is resposible for collecting and treating Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Equipment put on the market after August 13th 2005 have a label (refer to paragraph 3.4 on page 38) af-
fixed on the product. The presence of the black label indicates the product has been put on the market
after after August 13th 2005.
In next paragraphs is given a description example of how to disassemble an equipment; the same principle
can be applied to all the subracks and units composing the equipment.
The unit chosen for disassembly is one of the most complex.
– Paragraph 8.2 describes the equipment disassembly; in detail:
• paragraph 8.2.1 on page 532 lists the tools necessary for disassembly
• paragraph 8.2.2 on page 533 describes the subrack disassembly
• paragraph 8.2.3 on page 540 describes the unit disassembly
• paragraph 8.2.4 on page 550 describes the procedure to apply in order to manage Hazardous
materials and components (example battery)
– Paragraph 8.3 on page 552 reports the ECO declaration info.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 531 / 554
554
8.2 How to disassembly equipment
This equipment is designed for easy disassembly, by using screws and rivets for mechanical assembly
of subracks and modules. The variety of screw types is minimized.

Tools necessary for subrack and units disassembly are reported in paragraph 8.2.1.
The disassembly process depends on the respective recycling methods and can be derived from the deliv-
ered assembly instructions of the product.
These guidelinesare not mandatory.

They are given in order to optimize the disassembling process and material recovery as whole.
8.2.1 Tools necessary for disassembly
The following tools are necessary for unit disassembly:
– # T9 TORX screw driver
– # T20 TORX screw driver
– Crosshead screwdriver
– Wrench #
– Scissors
– Protection gloves
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 532 / 554
554
8.2.2 Subrack disassembly
In Figure 328. on page 533 is shown an example of subrack.
The same rules can be applied to the specific equipment to be dismantled.

In order to disassemble the subrack first remove the boards eventually present, included termination bus.
SUBRACK FRONT VIEW SUBRACK REAR VIEW
Figure 328. Subrack front and rear view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 533 / 554
554
Procedure:
– Remove the two screws (A) in order to disassemble the handle as reported in Figure 329. on page
534.

– Repeat the same procedure on the other handle.
– Separate the two plastic blocks of the handle as reported in Figure 329. on page 534.
plastic block
plastic block
Figure 329. Handle removing and disassembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 534 / 554
554
– Unscrew all the screws present on rear cover as reported in Figure 330. (dashed lines) on page 535.
– Remove the rear cover in order to access the subrack Back Panel.
Figure 330. Rear cover removing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 535 / 554
554
– Unscrew all the screws fastening the Back Panel to the mechanical structure of the subrack as indi-
cated in Figure 331. on page 536 (dashed line).
– Remove the Back Panel from the subrack mechanical structure.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 331. Back Panel removing
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 536 / 554
554
– Remove the upper and lower guides from the subrack access area by unscrewing the relevant
screws as indicated in Figure 332. on page 537.
Upper and Lower guides

ACCESS AREA
BASIC AREA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 332. Upper and lower guides plane removing
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 537 / 554
554
– Remove the side wall by unscrewing the relevant screw as indicated in Figure 333. on page 538.
– Remove the two contact springs from the side wall as indicated in Figure 334. on page 539 (refer to
paragraph 8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 333. Side wall removing
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 538 / 554
554
– Remove the two guides of the “basic area” and the two optical fiber ducts by pulling them out as indi-
cated in Figure 334. on page 539.
– Unscrew all the screws present on the other “side wall” in order to complete the subrack disassembly.
Optical fiber duct

Optical fiber duct
guides guides
contact spring
contact spring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 334. Optical fiber duct, guides and contact spring removing
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 539 / 554
554
8.2.3 Unit disassembly
Procedure:

– Remove twe two screws (A) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 335. on page 540.
Figure 335. Side coverplate removal
– Remove the screws (B) that fix the two levers and subsequently pull out them from the front plate
as indicated in Figure 336. on page 541.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 540 / 554
554
B
Figure 336. Levers removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Unscrew and extract the two optical connectors (C) as indicated Figure 337. on page 542.
– Remove the screw (D) fixing the connectors support as indicated in Figure 337. on page 542.
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 541 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
542.
03
C
D
Figure 337. Optical connectors support removal
554
E
8DG 17415 AA AA
Rotate the connectors support (E) and pull it sidely to be removed as indicated Figure 337. on page
542 / 554
– Remove the two screws (F) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543.
– Extract from the top the contact spring (G) as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543 (refer to para-
graph 8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
– Extract the fibers from the cavity (H) as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543.
F
G
H
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 338. Side coverplate and contact spring removal
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 543 / 554
554
– Disconnect the two flat cables (M) as indicated in Figure 339. on page 544.
– Unscrew (L) connectors with the aid of a wrench as indicated Figure 339. on page 544.
– Remove the fibers (N) from supports pulling them out Figure 339. on page 544.

– Remove the two screws (O) on the other side of the board that fixes the dissipator to the Printed Cir-
cuit Board (PCB) as indicated in Figure 340. on page 545.
– The dissipator can now be removed (refer to Figure 341. on page 546).
L L L L L
M L
N
N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 339. Internal connectors removal
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 544 / 554
554
Figure 340. Dissipator removal
– Remove the screws (P) from dissipator as indicated in Figure 341. on page 546.
– Now the two modules on the other side of the dissipator are free to be removed (refer to Figure 343.
on page 547);
Pay attention during modules removal because of white conductive paste (refer to paragraph
8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
– Remove the plastic part (X) in Figure 342. on page 546 by unscrewing the screw present on the rear
side of the dissipator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 545 / 554
554
P P

P
P
P
P P
P
Figure 341. Modules removal from dissipator
– Remove the screws (Q) and (R) that fix the daugther board and pull it out from the mother board (refer
to Figure 342. on page 546).
MOTHER BOARD R
DAUGHTER BOARD
Q
Q
X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 342. Daughter boad removal
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 546 / 554
554
– Cutaway golded connector (S) from daughter board (refer to Figure 343. on page 547)
Figure 343. Gold connector removal
– Remove all internal cables as indicated in Figure 344. on page 548. To remove cables it is enough
to pull them out from their support.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 547 / 554
554
Figure 344. Internal cables removal
– Remove screws (T) that fix the metal support to the mother board as indicated in Figure 345. on page
549.
– Remove the metal support.
– Cutaway the golded connector (U) from mother board.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 548 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
T
T
T
Metal support
Figure 345. Connector metal support removal
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
U
549 / 554
8.2.4 Hazardous materials and components
Table 126. on page 550 lists the presence or not of hazardous substance/components.
Note: The system cabling is designed for reduced halogen content. All the traffic cabling is fully PVC free.

Table 126. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment
Materials/substances Presence Where

in the
equipment
Batteries External NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Batteries Internal NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Mercury NO
Cadmium NO
Capacitors with PCB’s
Capacitors with substances of concern + NO

height > 25 mm, diameter > 25 mm or pro-
portionately similar volume
Gas discharge lamps NO
Mercury containing Backlighting lamps NO
Plastic containing brominated flame retar- NO

dants other than in Printed Circuit Assem-
blies
Liquid Crystal Displays with a surface NO

greater than 100 cm2
Asbestos NO
Refractory ceramic fibres NO
Thermal conductive paste YES In all units where dissipators are present a
withe thermal conductive paste is used in
between mechanical parts.
In Figure 342. on page 546 an example is
shown.
Note: protective plastic gloves must be
used in order to avoid contact between
hands and thermal conductive paste.
Pay attention to avoid contact of thermal
conductive paste with eyes.
Radio–active substances NO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Beryllium Oxide NO
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 550 / 554
554
Materials/substances Presence Where
in the
equipment
Other forms of Beryllium YES Refer to Figure 334. on page 539 and
Figure 338. on page 543 point G.
Note: Copper–beryllium contact spring
must be separated from other material and
must be fused in a specific regulated envi-
ronment.
Pressure volume NO
Liquids Volume NO
Gasses Volume NO
”Hidden” mechanical springs or other NO

equivalent parts
Ozone depleting substances, according to NO

those categories that are already banned
in the Montreal protocol
Chloroparaffins with chain length 10–13 C NO

atoms, chlorination greater than 50% con-
tained in mechanical plastic parts heavier
than 25g,
Lead contained in mechanical parts heavi- NO

er than 25g,
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or po- NO

lychlorinated terphenyls (PCT),
Polybrominated biphenyl’s and their NO

ethers (CAS no. 32534–81–9, CAS no.
32536–52–0, CAS no 1163–19–5, CAS
no. 13654–09–6) contained in mechanical
parts heavier than 25g, in concentrations
exceeding the natural background levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 551 / 554
554
8.3 Eco declaration
1696 Metro Span is a Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) system.

Weight and Dimensional Characteristics
Refer to paragraph 5.6 on page 487.
EXTENSION OF SYSTEM LIFETIME
The product is designed to ensure an outstanding quality of service through very high reliability figures.
The architecture facilitates all kinds of future evolutions:
– On–site configuration changes as e.g.:
• Extension of the add/drop capacity without service interruption
• Self–adjustment of optical amplifiers in case of change in the traffic volume
– Implementation of new features and functionalities by remote Software download
– Extendibility can be achieved by increasing the add/drop capacity without traffic impact and/or by in-
creasing the bit rate per optical channel
– Upgradibility is ensured by a versatile multiplexing architecture that allows to upgrade the system
in–service from 1 channel to the 32 channels, i.e. the full system capacity.
The terms and conditions of warranty, service availability and spare parts availability are individually
agreed between Alcatel and the Customer and are part of the relevant contractual commitments.
POWER CONSUMPTION
Refer to paragraph 5.5.1 on page 485.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION
Regarding compliance with radio frequency emission requirements refer to paragraph 5.7.1 on page 489
and 5.7.2 on page 489.
ACOUSTICAL NOISE
Refer to paragraph 5.7.5 on page 490

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 552 / 554
554
MATERIALS
Refer to Table 126. on page 550 for details.
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to paragraph 8.2 on page 532.
BATTERIES
The product requires no backup batteries.
PACKAGING
The packaging of this Alcatel equiment complies with the directive 94/62/EEC concerning packaging and
packaging waste. Depending on the means of transportatio,n the racks are packed in a cardboard or
wooden box, which can easily be recycled after use. Environmentally harmful materials are not used for
packaging. The packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11 469. If required by the Customer and
agreed by both parties, Alcatel can take care of the proper disposal of all packaging materials.
For details refer to” Installation Handbook”.
TAKE BACK INFORMATION
On request of customers, Alcatel can take care of the take back of depreciated equipment and of the eco-
logical safe and appropriate disposal under conditions to be agreed.
For that purpose Alcatel co–operates with qualified companies.
DOCUMENTATION
In order to reduce paper consumption for Customer Documentation, Alcatel delivers the Generic Custom-
er Documentation on a CD–ROM. The CD–ROM contains interactive HW Descriptions, SW Descriptions,
Functional Descriptions, Maintenance Manuals and User Guides. This allows the operator to put the docu-
mentation on a server accessible by all relevant people in the organization without any additional paper
copies.
Additionally more specific documentations as e.g. information about products and solutions, services and
support, training events etc. will be provided by means of Alcatel website accessible by all customers. This
will allow distribution of up–to–date information very quickly and without wasting natural resources.
The Customer documentation is made under use of paper (80 g/m2) which is elemental chlorine–free
bleached.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
8DG 17415 AA AA 553 / 554
554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
END OF DOCUMENT
554
8DG 17415 AA AA
554 / 554

1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Handbook

8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

03 061018 ECR 38860 S.LOVISA C. GIANNI

8DG 17415 AA AA 1 / 554

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2.4.4 User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

8DG 17415 AA AA 2 / 554

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

4.4.1 ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

8DG 17415 AA AA 3 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

5.7.6 Environmental constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

6 HARDWARE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

8DG 17415 AA AA 4 / 554

6.5 ESC hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

6.5.1 ESC Presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

8DG 17415 AA AA 5 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 43. Shelf front view with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

8DG 17415 AA AA 6 / 554

Figure 50. Simple MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Figure 51. Double MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 97. 8 channels CWDM optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

8DG 17415 AA AA 7 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

8DG 17415 AA AA 8 / 554

Figure 152. 8–channel OADM w/o protection block diagram/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Figure 153. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

8DG 17415 AA AA 9 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

8DG 17415 AA AA 10 / 554

8DG 17415 AA AA 11 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

8DG 17415 AA AA 12 / 554

Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

8DG 17415 AA AA 13 / 554

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Table 99. OMDX/OADM specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

8DG 17415 AA AA 14 / 554

Table 106. OMDX boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Table 107. MCC boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

8DG 17415 AA AA 15 / 554

1.1 General information